P433/EN M/R-63-A
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual
All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).
WARNING
When electrical equipment is in operation dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use or improper use may endanger personnel
and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the P433 must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are
used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules must be employed.
The signals MAIN : Blocke d/f aul ty and SFMON: Warning (LED) (permanently assigned to the
LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM) can be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of
the P433. Schneider Electric strongly recommends that these output relays are hardwired into the
substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.
Any modifications to this P433 must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is
made without the express permission of Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may
render the product unsafe.
Proper and safe operation of this P433 depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage,
installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this P433.
The User should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide (SFTY/4LM/J11 or later version), with
the warnings in Chapter 5, (p. 5-1), Chapter 10, (p. 10-1), Chapter 11, (p. 11-1) and
Chapter 12, (p. 12-1) and with the content of Chapter 14, (p. 14-1), before working on the
equipment. If the warnings are disregarded, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
● are familiar with the installation, commissioning and operation of the P433 and of the system to
which it is being connected;
● are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and
are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground and label it;
● are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering
standards;
● are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
This operating manual gives instructions for installation, commissioning and operation of the P433.
However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all
topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper
authorization. Contact the appropriate technical sales office of Schneider Electric and request the
necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of Schneider
Electric, including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which
is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.
Changes after going to press
P433
Table of Contents
3 Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC) ..................................3-4
3.3.1 Bay Panel .......................................................................................................................................................3-4
3.3.2 Operation Panel .............................................................................................................................................3-6
3.3.3 Fault Panel .....................................................................................................................................................3-7
3.3.4 Ground Fault Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.5 Overload Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.6 Selection of the Control Point ...................................................................................................................... 3-10
3.3.7 Configurable Clear Key ................................................................................................................................ 3-10
3.4 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 3-11
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-13
3.4.3 Communication Interface 2 (Function Group COMM2) ................................................................................ 3-22
3.4.4 Communication Interface 3 (Function Group COMM3) ................................................................................ 3-24
3.4.5 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC and GOOSE) .................................................... 3-29
3.4.6 Redundant Ethernet Board .......................................................................................................................... 3-42
3.5 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-45
3.6 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-46
3.7 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-48
3.8 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-50
3.8.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-51
3.8.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-54
3.9 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-56
3.10 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-59
3.10.1 General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-59
3.10.2 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-61
3.10.3 Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-65
3.10.4 Output of “External” Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-71
3.11 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-72
3.11.1 Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-72
3.11.2 Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-72
3.11.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-73
3.12 Main Functions of the P433 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-76
3.12.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables ...................................................................................................... 3-76
3.12.2 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-78
3.12.3 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions .......................................................................................... 3-92
3.12.4 Current Flow Monitoring .............................................................................................................................. 3-93
3.12.5 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) .................................................................................................... 3-94
3.12.6 Measurement of Frequency ......................................................................................................................... 3-96
3.12.7 Function Blocks ........................................................................................................................................... 3-97
3.43 Underfrequency Load Shedding Protection (Function Group Pf<) .......................... 3-415
3.43.1 Disabling or Enabling Pf< Protection ......................................................................................................... 3-415
3.43.2 Pf< Readiness and Blocking ...................................................................................................................... 3-416
3.43.3 Active Power Characteristic .......................................................................................................................3-416
3.43.4 Remote and Local Choice of Active Frequency Stage ................................................................................3-418
3.44 Directional Power Protection (Function Group P<>) ............................................... 3-419
3.44.1 Disabling and Enabling P<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-419
3.44.2 Power Determination .................................................................................................................................3-419
3.44.3 Power Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................3-420
3.44.4 Active Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................... 3-421
3.44.5 Active Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ...................................................................... 3-422
3.44.6 Reactive Power Monitoring when Set Thresholds are Exceeded ................................................................3-423
3.44.7 Reactive Power Direction when Set Thresholds are Exceeded .................................................................. 3-424
3.44.8 Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..............................................................3-425
3.44.9 Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ................................................................ 3-426
3.44.10 Reactive Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ..........................................................3-428
3.44.11 Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds ............................................................ 3-429
3.44.12 Starting Signal with Direction .................................................................................................................... 3-431
3.45 Voltage Controlled Directional Reactive Power Protection (Function Group QV) .....3-432
3.45.1 Disabling and Enabling QV Protection ....................................................................................................... 3-432
3.45.2 QV Readiness and Blocking ....................................................................................................................... 3-432
3.45.3 Phase-Phase Undervoltage Monitoring ...................................................................................................... 3-433
3.45.4 Directional Reactive Power Characteristic ................................................................................................. 3-433
3.45.5 Timer and Trip Logic ..................................................................................................................................3-434
3.46 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) ........................................ 3-435
3.46.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection .........................................................................3-435
3.46.2 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-436
3.46.3 Detecting a CB Tripping .............................................................................................................................3-436
3.46.4 Current Flow Monitoring ............................................................................................................................ 3-437
3.46.5 Evaluation of CB Status Signals .................................................................................................................3-438
3.46.6 Startup Criteria ..........................................................................................................................................3-439
3.46.7 Timer Stages and Output Logic ................................................................................................................. 3-440
3.46.8 Trip Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 3-441
3.46.9 Starting Trigger ......................................................................................................................................... 3-441
3.46.10 Fault Behind CB Protection ........................................................................................................................ 3-442
3.46.11 CB Synchronization Supervision ................................................................................................................ 3-442
3.47 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) .................................................. 3-443
3.47.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................................3-443
3.47.2 Variants ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-443
3.47.3 CB Wear Characteristic ..............................................................................................................................3-444
3.47.4 Calculating the CB Wear State .................................................................................................................. 3-445
3.47.5 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-445
3.47.6 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................................3-445
3.47.7 Linking Control Functions with the Trip Command .................................................................................... 3-446
3.47.8 Pole-Selective Counter Values and Measured Values ................................................................................ 3-446
3.47.9 Resetting Measured Values ....................................................................................................................... 3-447
3.47.10 Setting Measured Values ........................................................................................................................... 3-448
3.47.11 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations ..................................................................................................3-450
3.47.12 Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-450
3.47.13 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-451
3.48 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-452
3.48.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function ................................................................................. 3-452
3.48.2 Monitoring Phase Currents and Phase Voltages ........................................................................................ 3-452
3.48.3 Monitoring the Neutral-Point Displacement Voltage ..................................................................................3-455
4 Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-6
4.2.3 Detachable HMI ............................................................................................................................................. 4-7
4.3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-9
7 Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Parame ters .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.2 C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.1.3 F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s ............................................................................................................................ 7-99
A3 Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
1.1 Overview
The P433 distance protection device has been designed for selective short-circuit
protection, ground fault protection, and overload protection in medium- and high-
voltage systems. Because of the specific functions provided by the devices the
following preferred areas of application have evolved:
● Medium- and high-voltage systems with 3-pole high-speed reclosure (HSR)
The control functions are designed for the control of up to three electrically
operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the
bay of a medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic
topology). The P433 has almost 300 predefined Bay Types stored for selection
and it is also possible to load user-defined bay templates.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the
integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and
versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This
simplifies the handling of switch bay protection and control technology from
planning to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device
parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-
permissible switching operations.
The P433 is equipped with a large number of protection and control functions.
These can be individually configured and cancelled.
These features give the user the means to adapt the P433 to the protection and
control capacity required in a specific application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the protection device also makes
it possible to accommodate special applications.
Mmuxxx Measuring ✓
TIMER Timer 4
Vref
21 50/27 51P,N 50/51 P,Q,N 51/67 P,Q,N 67N 25 67P,N 79 49 32 27/59 P,Q,N 50BF/62
MCMON TGFD
DIST SOTF BUOC DTOC IDMT GFSC ASC SCDD ARC THERM P<> V<> CBF CBM
Scheme signaling
77 26 Always Available Optional
InterMiCOM TRMON SIG_1 CMD_1 TIMER COUNT MEASO
MEASI
Distance Protection
serial conventional
and Bay Control P433
1.5 Design
The P433 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P433, version -313 -417/418/419 -654.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated “P433 Distance Protection and Control Unit” has been
designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards
EN 60255‑26 and EN 60255‑27 and with the “EMC Directive” and the “Low
Voltage Directive” issued by the Council of the European Community.
Design
● Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
● Flush-mounted case for 19″ cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
● Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
● IP 52 for the front panel.
● Flush-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)
o IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
o IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection
● Surface-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case
o IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
● 40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
● 84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
● EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
2.3 Tests
Type Tests
All tests per EN 60255-26.
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
Contact discharge
● Single discharges: > 10.
● Holding time: > 5 s.
● Test voltage: 8 kV.
● Test generator: 50 to 100 MΩ, 150 pF / 330 Ω.
Phase-to-phase
● RMS value 150 V.
● Coupling resistance 100 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.1 μF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
● RMS value 300 V.
● Coupling resistance 220 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.47 μF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps].
2.3.1.2 Insulation
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
● 2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs. The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255‑21-1 or IEC 60255‑21-1, test severity class 1.
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255‑21‑3 or IEC 60255‑21‑3, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
● 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s², 3 x 1 cycle.
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255‑21-1 or IEC 60255‑21-1, test severity class 2.
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255‑21‑3 or IEC 60255‑21‑3, test procedure A, class 2.
Frequency range
● 5 to 8 Hz, 7.5 mm / 3.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 20 / 10 m/s², 3 x 1 cycle.
Voltage Test
Per EN 60255-27.
● 2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power
supply inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Temperatures
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
Frequency
● Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable).
● Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
● Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz.
Binary I/O Module X(6I 6O) Binary I/O Module X(4H) All other modules
for switchgear control. with high-break contacts,
applicable to DC circuits
only.
Continuous 8A 10 A 5A
current:
2.6 Interfaces
2.6.2 PC Interface
● Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Wire Leads
● Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
● Distance to be bridged
o Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
o Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Wire Leads
● RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
● Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
● Distance to be bridged: max. 100 m
2.6.4.1.1 100 Base FX Interface (in Accordance with IEEE 802.3 and IEC 61850)
Leads (X10)
● Threaded terminal ends M2 for wire cross sections up to 1.5 mm²
Protocol per IEC 60870‑5‑103
Transmission rate: 300 … 57600 bit/s (settable)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1.1 Definitions
Reference Conditions
● Quasi-stationary sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom (frequency
protection excepted), total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Operate value Θ
● Deviation: ± 5% of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
Operate values
● V<>, Vpos<>: ± 1% (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
● VNG>, Vneg>: ± 1% (in the range > 0.3 Vnom)
Sector angle
● Deviation: ± 0.5°
2.9.2.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion
≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.3.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤
2%, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Load angle
● Deviation: ± 1°
Frequency
● Deviation: ± 10 mHz
Amplitude resolution
● at Inom = 1 A: 6.1 mArms
● at Inom = 5 A: 30.5 mArms
Amplitude resolution
● at Inom = 1 A: 1.0 mArms
● at Inom = 5 A: 4.9 mArms
Amplitude resolution
● 9.2 mVrms
Overload Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent overload events
Number
● The 8 most recent ground fault events
Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent faults.
Nominal burden
● … where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
o 40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
o 84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
2.13.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 61869 standards:
Xp
K d = K max ≈ 1 + Rp = 1 + ω · Tp
30
A
25
20
15
K emp B
10
C
As per IEC 60255-121 (draft 2011), the following 4 fault conditions have to be
checked to determine the required CT dimensioning.
A B
DIST
2 3 4
Case 1:
● Close-up backward short-circuit (security case)
Acceptance criteria: Stable backward direction decision, no trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Case 2:
● Close-up forward short-circuit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Instantaneous trip with less than 1 period add. delay
Required Kemp = 1.5
Case 3:
● Short-circuit at 80% of Zone 1 reach limit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Trip with less than 3 periods add. delay
Select required Kemp per curve B
Case 4:
● Short-circuit at 110% of Zone 1 reach limit (security case)
Acceptance criterion: Correct time delayed zone 2 trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Depending on the fault location, different maximum short-circuit currents and
primary system X/R ratios apply! Therefore the required CT dimensioning has to
be calculated separately for all 4 cases. The biggest sizing from all 4 cases then
has to be used.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
3 Operation
Communic. module
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
A A A
EDIT MODE
N μC P μP
Analog I/O module Processor module
Analog
Digital busbus module
module
T X Y V
Transformer module
Voltages Currents Signals Commands Signals Measured data Signals Commands Auxiliary voltage
Commands Signals Commands Commands Signals
D5Z5201C
“Parameters” Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P433, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P433 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
“Operation” Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
“Events” Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
LOC:
DEV01: Display L/R
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 070 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC:
Displ. interl. stat.
[ 221 071 ]
LOC:
Return time select.
[ 221 030 ]
LOC:
Return time illumin.
[ 003 023 ]
Q0
Remote Locked
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
45Z8003A
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
LOC:
Selected meas. val. Hold-time for Panels LOC:
[ 031 075 ] Hold-time for Panels
FT_RC:
Record. in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress ≥1
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
GF_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 005 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01CXA
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value N
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
LOC:
Fct. Grd.Fault Panel
[ 053 004 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0139B
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
LOC:
F_KEY: Fct. assign. L/R key
Fct. assignm. F1 [ 225 208 ]
[ 080 112 ]
1: R <-> L
MAIN: 2: R & L <-> L
Local/Remote key
[ 006 004 ]
1)
& S1 1 & 1
MAIN:
Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block. PC:
[ 003 086 ] Delta P
[ 003 059 ]
0 PC:
Delta f
1 [ 003 057 ]
0: No PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 003 155 ]
PC:
Delta t
MAIN: [ 003 058 ]
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
PC: [ 003 188 ]
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z80ECA
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0: No COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
COMM1:
0 Selected protocol Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
COMM1: COMM1:
-103 prot. variant Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Communic. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870‑5-103 interface protocol.
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Delta t
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Delta t (energy)
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Contin. general scan
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Comm. address length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Cause transm. length
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Address length ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig. Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 179 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat Time tag length
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel. ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta V ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta I Initializ. signal
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 199 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta P Balanced operation
[ 003 054 ] [ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415 COMM1: COMM1:
Delta f Direction bit
COMM1: [ 003 052 ] [ 003 227 ]
IEC 870-5-101
[ 003 218 ] COMM1: COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel Time-out interval
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 228 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No
COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ] 19Z51FGA
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 870-5, ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ] COMM1:
Comm. interface Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FHA
Fig. 3-13: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
COMM1: COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant Test monitor on
[ 003 214 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 210 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 211 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 212 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 213 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 152 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Commun. interface Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 244 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Link Max. Retries
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 245 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 246 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 247 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 232 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 233 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 Ind./cl. bin. count.
[ 003 240 ] [ 003 234 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 235 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 241 ] [ 003 236 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
Selected protocol [ 003 242 ] [ 003 250 ]
304 415
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z50AZA
Fig. 3-15: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Test monitor on
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Command selection
[ 003 071 ] [ 103 042 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Parity bit Signal selection
Selected protocol [ 003 171 ] [ 103 043 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Parameter selection
[ 003 202 ] [ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1: COMM1:
[ 003 170 ] Octet comm. address Delta t (COURIER)
[ 003 072 ] [ 103 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z51BAA
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
Dead time monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
Name of manufacturer
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2: COMM2:
General enable USER Select. spontan.sig.
[ 103 170 ] [ 103 179 ]
COMM2:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
0
[ 103 074 ]
1
COMM2:
0: No Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
Sig./meas.block.USER COMM2:
Delta P
[ 103 076 ]
[ 103 054 ]
0 COMM2:
Delta f
1 [ 103 052 ]
0: No COMM2:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
MAIN: Delta t
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
40Z5070A
COMM2:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
3.4.4.1 Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link
between two devices from Schneider Electric's device family “Easergy MiCOM
30”.
Over this communication link can be transmitted up to 8 binary protection
signals. Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information
interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access,
communication interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that
will transmit real time signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its
main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function group
PSIG). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be
transmitted.
Digital network:
● Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Preference: Security.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and set operating
mode Direct intertrip.
Preference: Dependability.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and set operating mode
Permissive.
Preference: Speed.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and set operating mode
Blocking.
Speed
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
Intertrip
Security Dependability
47Z1030A
Fig. 3-20: Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
Message
received
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram
receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
(Re)start of the
monitoring
timer stages
COMM3:
Time-out comm.fault
[ 120 033 ]
COMM3:
1 Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3:
Time-out link fail.
[ 120 035 ]
COMM3:
1 Comm. link failure
[ 120 044 ]
47Z1031B
With the Ethernet module there are two ordering variants available for the fiber-
optic interface: the ST connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and
1300 nm. The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The P433 may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an
alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the
Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an
alternative to function group COMM1.
Moreover, a communication module named “Redundant Ethernet Board” can be
(optionally) fitted, as an alternative to the single Ethernet board or standard
optional communication module. This module makes two fiber-optic interfaces
(each with ST connector) available, to assure redundancy at IED level. See
Section 3.4.6, (p. 3-42) for more information, and the separately available
“Redundant Ethernet Board” Technical Manual for all details.
Both the Ethernet module and the Redundant Ethernet Board additionally
provide an RS485 interface for remote access with the MiCOM S1 support
software (function group COMM2).
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
Operating program
.mcl .x3v
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
EDIT MODE
19Z7001D
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
Bank 1 Bank 2
3.4.5.1.7 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P433 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting IEC: SigGGIO1 s election. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m
out of n’ selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
1 remote-control See note [1] The control command is sent by an operator at station level.
(at the end of
this table).
2 automatic-remote See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
station level.
3 station-control See note [1]. The control command is sent by an operator at network
level.
4 automatic-station See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
network level.
5 bay-control Local HMI The control command is generated at the local HMI of the
Control P433.
6 bay-control Local EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MAIN: Ele ctrical contr ol = Local
and any of the following input signals:
● DEVxx: In p.asg. el. ct rl.ope n
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ctr.clos e .
7 remote-control Remote EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: E lectri cal control = Remote
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: In p.asg. el. ctrl. ope n
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l.ctr.clos e.
[1]: The P433 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into
the information report.
The P433 does never send the Originator Category “automatic-bay”. In all
protection devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, Automatic Reclose is
implemented as part of the protection functionality, and therefore it is treated as
process, see table row No. 8 above.
UC 7
UC 1,2
Network
HMI
Trip/close by external
Gateway protection or control
UC 7
UC 3,4 UC 10 , 11
UC 9
Circuit
Station
breaker
HMI UC 6, 7 UC 5 UC 8
t
Binary signal
Communication link
Internal interface 12Z7312C
Fig. 3-24: Use cases in the network context. The “UC” numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above.
3.4.5.1.13 Communication with the MiCOM S1 Support Software via the Ethernet Interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 support software via the Ethernet interface on
the P433 may occur through the “tunneling principle”. Transmission is carried
out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the
associated MiCOM S1 support software (specific manufacturer solution). Such
transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is
used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions
offered by the MiCOM S1 support software such as reading/writing of setting
parameters or retrieving stored data.
» Device A » Device B
S1 Studio
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 128 (SPS)
Ext. Dev 1 ... 128 (DPS)
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
19Z8203B
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P433 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
GOOSE capacity should not be exceeded, neither for GOOSE nor for reports.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P433 to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting.
Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting
GOOSE: Outp ut 1 fct.as si g.. (or Output 2, ..., Output 32). The data object
indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the
GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then
be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC ] : I ncreme nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [IC ]: Mult icast MAC Addres s, [ IC]: Application ID (hex),
[I C]: VLA N I dent ifie r (h ex), [IC] : V LA N P r iority and
[I C]: GOOSE I de nt if ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [ IC ]: Datase t R ef e rence and
[IC]: Config urat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
» Device A » Device B
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
19Z7004B
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (“uniqueness”) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P433 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information – stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P433 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
All of these boards have 1300 nm multi mode 100BaseFx fiber-optic Ethernet
ports (ST® connector) and modulated IRIG-B input and furthermore connections
for a watchdog relay and an RS485 link (COMM2 interface, see Section 3.4.3,
(p. 3-22)).
The Redundant Ethernet board is fitted into Slot 2 of the P433. Each board has
two MAC addresses, one for the managed embedded switch and one for the
P433.
Ethernet 100Base Fx
The fiber optic ports are full duplex 100 Mbps ST connectors.
Forwarding
The devices from the families Easergy MiCOM 30, 40, the C264 and the MiCOM H
switches support store and forward mode. The MiCOM switch forwards messages
with known addresses to the appropriate port. The messages with unknown
addresses, the broadcast messages and the multicast messages are forwarded
out to all ports except the source port. MiCOM switches do not forward error
packets, 802.3x pause frames or local packets.
Priority Tagging
802.1p priority is enabled on all ports.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P433 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P433. If
the P433 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
47Z02BAA
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is
irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 & F_KEY:
State F1
2 [ 080 122 ]
1: Key
2: Switch
& & S1 1
& R1 0
1)
Fig. 3-28: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter INP : Filt er.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: &
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
INP:
State U xxx
&
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-29: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 I DC / I DC,nom
I DC1 I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-31: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
Fig. 3-32: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1) SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI: MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u. Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 136 ] [ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
PT100 faulty
Measur. input PT100 [ 040 190 ]
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u.
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
19Z5262A
Fig. 3-35: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O)
module.
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
1 Outp. relays blocked
≥1 [ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: 1: Yes
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
-K xxx
4
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx & S1 1
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signal
&
MAIN:
General starting OUTP:
1 Latching reset
[ 036 000 ] & [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
1 1
100 ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
45Z8001A
Fig. 3-36: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays.
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx2
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx3 -K xxx
[ CCC CCC ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
OUTP:
Relay test
OUTP:
[ 003 043 ] Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Q6Z0139B
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
S8Z52H5A
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
MEASO: Output reset
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ] [ 037 117 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A
3.10.1.4 Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P433 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
Measurands Range
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 - PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under “minimum” and
“maximum”.)
Designation of the set values in the data "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
model
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output" (Valid BCD value)
Measurands Range
053 002 ME ASO : F ct. assi gnm. BC D FT_DA: Fau lt locat. pe rce nt
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal MEASO: Vali d BCD value = Yes are only issued
in the value range 0% to 200%.
200
FT_DA:
-320% 0% 200% 320% Fault locat. percent
[004 027]
47Z1040A
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable
value only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault
location is more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote
substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and
sensible range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = Only
aft.tr.t1/t1,ze.
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
Enabled [ 010 010 ]
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO: MEASO:
Enable 1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
304 600 [ 037 054 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 1 (BCD)
MEASO: [ 037 056 ]
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601 MEASO:
10-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 057 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 3 (BCD)
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
Selected
MEASO:
meas. oper. value 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
MEASO:
Selected meas. val. Valid BCD value
Value not measured [ 037 050 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD Meas. value ≥ 399
[ 053 002 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n c1
c2
Scaling of the
BCD output
Selected meas. val. 1
++ 2
MEASO: 1...2
Output value x
[ * ]
0 . . . 100 %
x: 3 MEASO:
037 122 BCD-Out max. value 037 143
19Z5264A
Fig. 3-42: BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure).
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program S&R-103 – PC Access Software MiCOM S1 – under “minimum” and
“maximum”.)
Measurands Range
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
Measurands Range
In this example the following P433 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
053 000 MEASO : F ct. assig nm. A-1 MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.
037 104 MEASO : Scaled m in. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 ME ASO : Scaled k ne e val. A -1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO : Sca le d m ax. val . A-1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
By setting MEASO: AnOu t m in. val. A -1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: I nvalid scaling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P433, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P433 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e).
Ia / mA
20
Max. 18
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
Min. 4
output value
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0.013 0.067 0.667 1.0 Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-43: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
Enabled [ 010 114 ]
[ 037 102 ]
Setting(s) blocked c
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)
[ --- --- ]
MEASO: R
Reset meas.val.outp.
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP: Selected
Fct.assignment K xxx Meas. event value
[ xxx xxx ] being updated
c
K x1
K x2 MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
K x3 [ 037 104 ]
K xx MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
c
MEASO:
Value A-1 output MEASO:
[ 037 118 ] Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
MEASO:
[ 053 000 ] AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
Measured value 2 [ 037 109 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Selected meas. val. Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
c1
0 . . . 100 % Value < AnOut range c2
c3
S8Z52H8B
H 4 (red) TRIP With the P433 this LED indicator is customarily configured with
function MA IN: Ge n. tri p si gnal, but the configuration may be
modified.
H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only when
the P433 is in this mode, can parameter settings be changed by
pressing the “Up” and “Down” keys. (See Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 5 to H 16 ― For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
be configured freely and independently.
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Finally, as the 13th operating mode, every LED (except the permanently
configured ones, see Section 3.11.1, (p. 3-72)) can be set to the mode ES
Alarmunit. This mode has the following flashing behavior:
● The LED starts flashing with the first starting of the signal that has been
assigned to it.
The LED assumes the color that has been assigned via setting parameter. If
both colors (red and green) have been configured to different signals, and
these two signals both become active then the LED flashes in amber color.
● If an LED reset is executed and the configured signal is still active the LED
changes to continuous light.
Important: If the LED was flashing in amber color then this color is kept,
even if one of the two signals is no longer active.
● If all the configured signals are no longer active at the time of the LED
reset, or become inactive at a later time, the LED goes out.
● If later, after the LED has gone out, any of the configured signals becomes
active again then the LED starts flashing again (in the assigned color).
If both colors have been configured and the LED shines continuously in
amber color, then it is possible that one of these two signals becomes
inactive and active again whilst the other signal stays active all the time. In
this case the LED starts flashing again with the starting of that signal. But
since the LED permanently keeps the amber color it is no longer possible to
tell the two signals from each other. Therefore general caution is
recommended whenever two different signals are configured to an LED
with this operating mode.
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
10
11
12
13 ≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) !G!
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl -Hxx (red)
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
13: ES Alarmunit
& LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
LED: &
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
&
Signal 1 &
Signal 2 &
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
& S1 1
& R1
Selected signals
&
&
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020 47Z8000A
Fig. 3-46: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators, showing the example of the “red” LED color.
A
B
C
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. sec.
[ 031 052 ]
1U
V̲ref
2U
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IP Inom device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
IA
X X⋅Y I̲A
IB
X X⋅Y I̲B
IC X X⋅Y I̲C
1: Standard
IN (Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. IN IN,nom device
[ 010 019 ] [ 010 026 ]
X X⋅Y I̲N
1: Standard
(Y = 1)
2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. sec.
[ 010 028 ]
N(e)
E(n) V̲N-G
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
U
V̲A-G
e V
V̲B-G
W
V̲C-G
N
Line
49Z6400A
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. IP
MAIN: [ 011 030 ]
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲A c1
I̲B c2
I̲C c3
c4
c5
c6
1 MAIN:
Current A p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
2 MAIN:
Current B p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
3 MAIN:
Current C p.u.
[ 007 041 ]
+
+ 4 MAIN:
+ Current Σ(IP) p.u.
[ 005 011 ]
5 MAIN:
COMP Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
6 MAIN:
Current IP,min p.u.
[ 005 056 ]
I̲max
MAIN:
I̲min Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Current A prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN:
Current B prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN:
Current C prim.
[ 007 040 ]
MAIN:
Current Σ(IP) prim.
[ 005 010 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,max prim.
[ 005 050 ]
MAIN:
Curr. IP,min prim.
[ 005 055 ]
19Z6403A
MAIN:
IA p.u.,demand
[ 006 235 ]
MAIN:
IB p.u.,demand
[ 006 236 ]
MAIN:
IC p.u.,demand
[ 006 237 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 010 113 ] [ 005 037 ]
MAIN:
MAIN: IA p.u.,demand stor.
Current A p.u.
R [ 006 232 ]
[ 005 041 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Current B p.u. IB p.u.,demand stor.
[ 006 041 ] R [ 006 233 ]
MAIN:
MAIN: IC p.u.,demand stor.
Current C p.u. [ 006 234 ]
[ 007 041 ] R
MAIN:
MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored
Current IP,max p.u. [ 005 035 ]
[ 005 051 ] R
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
IA prim,demand
[ 006 226 ]
MAIN:
IB prim,demand
[ 006 227 ]
MAIN:
IC prim,demand
[ 006 228 ]
MAIN:
IP,max prim.,delay
MAIN: [ 005 036 ]
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ] MAIN:
IA prim,demand stor.
[ 006 223 ]
0
MAIN:
1 IB prim,demand stor.
[ 006 224 ]
MAIN: 0: don't execute
General reset USER
1: execute MAIN:
[ 003 002 ] IC prim,demand stor.
1: execute [ 006 225 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT MAIN:
[ 005 255 ] IP,max prim.,stored
MAIN: [ 005 034 ]
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
19Z6404A
Fig. 3-49: Measured operating data - phase current, part 2: demand values (delayed and stored phase currents and
maximum phase current).
MAIN:
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN
General start. int.
306 539
[ 011 031 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲N
MAIN:
Current IN p.u.
[ 004 044 ]
MAIN:
IN,nom C.T. prim.
[ 010 018 ]
MAIN:
Current IN prim.
[ 004 043 ]
S8Z5097A
3.12.2.4 Display of Demand Values – Delayed and Stored Values of the Three
Phase Currents
The P433 offers the option of a delayed display of the three phase currents. This
functionality is equivalent to the display of the maximum value of the three
phase currents (see description above, Fig. 3-51, (p. 3-83) and Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-
81)). However, in this case, the delayed phase current display will have reached
90 % (not 95 %) of IA , IB or IC , respectively, after the set delay.
The stored phase currents are implemented as for the stored maximum phase
current.
The delay for these six operating data values is set at MAIN: Set tl. t.
IP,max,del as for the delayed maximum phase current.
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,delay
[ 005 037 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Current IP,max p.u.
[ 005 051 ]
MAIN:
IP,max p.u.,stored
[ 005 035 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Settl. t. IP,max,del Settl. t. IP,max,del
[ 010 113 ] [ 010 113 ]
MAIN:
Reset IP,max,st.USER
[ 003 033 ]
MAIN:
Rst IP,max,stor. EXT
[ 005 211 ]
50Z0115A
Fig. 3-51: Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display – display of demand values.
V̲A-G COMP
V̲B-G
V̲C-G
V̲PG,max V̲PG,max
V̲PG,min V̲PG,min
+
+ Σ(VPG)/3 Σ(VPG)/3
+
+ V̲A-B
−
+ V̲B-C
−
+ V̲C-A
−
MAIN:
Phase sequence COMP
[ 010 049 ]
2 V̲PP,max V̲PP,max
1 2 V̲PP,min V̲PP,min
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
V̲neg V̲neg
V̲pos V̲pos
47Z0106A
Fig. 3-52: Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages as well as the
negative-sequence and positive-sequence voltages.
The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P433 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P433.
MAIN: C
General start. int. ≥1
306 539
MAIN: MAIN:
Hardware fault Meas. value rel. V
306 540
[ 011 032 ]
V̲A-G C1
V̲B-G C2
V̲C-G C3
V̲PG,max C4
V̲PG,min C5
Σ(VPG)/3 C6
V̲A-B C7
V̲B-C C8
V̲C-A C9
V̲PP,max C10
V̲PP,min C11
MAIN:
Voltage A-G p.u.
V̲neg C12
[ 005 043 ]
V̲pos C13 MAIN:
Voltage B-G p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G p.u.
[ 007 043 ]
1 MAIN:
Voltage VPG,max p.u.
2 [ 008 043 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VPG,min p.u.
3 [ 009 043 ]
MAIN:
4 Volt. Σ(VPG)/√3 p.u.
[ 005 013 ]
MAIN:
5 Voltage A-B p.u.
[ 005 045 ]
6 MAIN:
Voltage B-C p.u.
7 [ 006 045 ]
MAIN:
8 Voltage C-A p.u.
[ 007 045 ]
9 MAIN:
Voltage VPP,max p.u.
[ 008 045 ]
10 MAIN:
Voltage VPP,min p.u.
11 [ 009 045 ]
MAIN:
12 Voltage Vneg p.u.
[ 009 017 ]
13 MAIN:
Voltage Vpos p.u.
[ 009 018 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim. MAIN:
[ 010 002 ] Voltage A-G prim.
[ 005 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-G prim.
[ 006 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-G prim.
[ 007 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,max prim.
[ 008 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPG,min prim.
[ 009 042 ]
MAIN:
Volt. Σ(VPG)/3 prim.
[ 005 012 ]
MAIN:
Voltage A-B prim.
[ 005 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage B-C prim.
[ 006 044 ]
MAIN:
Voltage C-A prim.
[ 007 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,max prim.
[ 008 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
MAIN:
Volt. VPP,min prim.
[ 009 044 ]
12Z6204C
MAIN:
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault MAIN:
306 018 Meas. val. rel. VNG
[ 011 033 ]
V̲N-G
MAIN:
Voltage VNG p.u.
[ 004 042 ]
MAIN:
VNG,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 027 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VNG prim.
[ 004 041 ]
19Z5064A
MAIN:
Meas. val. rel. Vref
[ 011 034 ]
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
V̲ref
MAIN:
Voltage Vref p.u.
[ 005 047 ]
MAIN:
Vref,nom V.T. prim.
[ 010 100 ]
MAIN:
Voltage Vref prim.
[ 005 046 ]
47Z0109A
3.12.2.6 Measured Values for Power, Active Power Factor, and Angle
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Appar. power S p.u.
[ 005 026 ]
MAIN:
Active power factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN:
I̲A > 0.025 Inom Appar. power S prim.
MAIN: [ 005 025 ]
Meas. direction P,Q
[ 006 096 ]
I̲B > 0.025 Inom
MAIN:
Active power P p.u.
X X · Y [ 004 051 ]
I̲C MAIN:
> 0.025 Inom X X · Y Reac. power Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
X X · Y MAIN:
Active power P prim.
V̲A-G > 1.5 V X X · Y [ 004 050 ]
MAIN:
1: Standard Reac. power Q prim.
(Y = 1) [ 004 052 ]
V̲B-G > 1.5 V 2: Opposite
(Y = -1)
MAIN:
Load angle phi A
[ 004 055 ]
MAIN:
& C Load angle phi B p.u
[ 005 074 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi B
[ 004 056 ]
MAIN:
& C Load angle phi C p.u
[ 005 075 ]
MAIN:
Load angle phi C
[ 004 057 ]
MAIN:
& C Angle phi N p.u.
[ 005 076 ]
MAIN:
Angle phi N
[ 004 072 ]
MAIN:
& C Angle ΣVPG/IN p.u.
[ 005 072 ]
MAIN:
Angle ΣVPG vs. IN
+ [ 005 009 ]
+
+
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018
19Z8003A
Fig. 3-56: Measured operating data – power, active power factor, and angle.
● Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and
displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy
measurement. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low
phase currents or a critical power factor value.
● The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value
exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
● Load angles will be displayed only if the respective phase current exceeds
0.1·Inom and if the phase-to-ground voltage exceeds 1.5 V.
● The angle between the measured values for the residual current and the
neutral-point displacement voltage will only be displayed if the residual
current exceeds 0.02·IN,nom and the neutral-point displacement voltage
exceeds 1.5 V.
The setting for MAI N: Meas . directi on P, Q may be changed from Standard to
Opposite if the user wishes to have the following measured operating data
displayed with the opposite sign (see Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-87)):
● MA IN : Act ive powe r P p.u .
● MA IN : R eac. po we r Q p. u.
● MAIN : Act iv e powe r P pri m.
● MAI N: R eac. power Q prim.
This setting parameter does not influence the remaining measured operating
data. It must be noted that inverting the sign will only affect the display of
measured operating data, all protection functions will internally use non-inverted
measured values.
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
I̲N
MAIN:
1 2 Phase rel. IN vs ΣIP
[ 004 073 ]
1: Equal phase
2: Reverse phase
47Z0112A
Fig. 3-57: Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current.
The P433 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and
measured residual current are coherent. If the phase displacement between the
two currents is ≤ 45°, then the indication Equal phase is displayed.
3.12.2.8 Frequency
MAIN:
General start. int. C
306 539
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 018 >0.65⋅Vnom
MAIN:
V̲A-G + C Frequency f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
V̲B-G -
MAIN:
f Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
12Z6209A
The P433 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to
exceed a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be
determined.
MAIN:
Op. mode energy cnt.
[ 010 138 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ] ∫P(t) dt MAIN:
Act.energy outp.prim
R [ 005 061 ]
-∫P(t) dt MAIN:
Act.energy inp. prim
R [ 005 062 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ] ∫Q(t) dt MAIN:
MAIN: React.en. outp. prim
Reset meas.v.en.USER R [ 005 063 ]
[ 003 032 ]
0 -∫Q(t) dt MAIN:
React. en. inp. prim
R [ 005 064 ]
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
Overflow MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
Transfer [ 009 092 ]
MAIN:
Overflow No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Transfer
19Z8033A
Fig. 3-59: Determining the active and reactive energy output and input.
The P433 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on
the primary active or reactive power.
There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy. If
procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s
(approximately). If procedure 2 is selected, active and reactive energy are
determined every 100 ms (approximately). In this way higher accuracy is
achieved.
Measured energy values are presented as text parameters with a value range of
about 0 … 6.5 TWh and a resolution of 10 kWh. In addition, 16 bit values and
overflow counters are provided, which are needed for transmission via serial
protocols (e.g. Modbus, DNP3, Courier).
Energy values as 32 bit / text Energy values as 16 bit values Overflow counters for the 16 bit
values Value range: 0 … 655,35 MWh energy values
Value range: 0 … Value range: 0 … 10000
6553500.00 MWh
(008 065) MAIN: Act .energy (005 061) MAI N: A ct. en ergy (009 090)
ou tp. prim outp.pri m MA IN: No.overfl .act.en.out
(008 066) MAIN: Act .energy (005 062) MAI N: A ct.en ergy (009 091)
in p. p rim inp. prim MA IN: No.overfl. act.e n.inp
(008 067) M AIN: React .en. (005 063) MA IN: React.e n. (009 092) MAI N: No.ov/
outp. prim out p. prim fl .re ac.en.ou t
(008 068) MAIN: R eact . en. (005 064) MA IN: React. en . (009 093) MA IN: No.ov/
inp. prim inp. prim f l.reac.en .in p
5%
2%
45° 70°
Phase Angle
S8Z0401B
Fig. 3-60: Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the
P433.
Error of measurement:
● Approx. ±2% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.7
● Approx. ±5% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.3
● where the whole measuring range is −180° ≤ φ ≤ 180°.
For phase angles φ with |cos φ| < 0.3, or when the error of measurement
resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external
counters should be used to determine the energy output.
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0 0: No (= off)
1 MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
MAIN: [ 038 046 ]
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T, the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
>0.05·Inom
I̲A MAIN:
Current flow A
[ 010 223 ]
MAIN:
I̲B Current flow B
[ 010 224 ]
MAIN:
I̲C Current flow C
[ 010 225 ]
19Z8039A
As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously
issue the phase selective signals MAIN: Cu rren t flow A, MAIN: Current flow
B, MAIN : C ur rent flow C.
MAIN: MAIN:
I> lift rush r. PSx t lift rush rstr.PSx
MAIN: & C
Protection active [ * ] [ * ]
306 001
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
& 1 t & [ 041 027 ]
I̲A
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
& &
1 t [ 041 028 ]
I̲B
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
& 1 &
t [ 041 029 ]
I̲C
>0.1 Inom
&
MAIN:
Op. mode rush r. PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
0 306 014
0: Without MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx Parameter MAIN: MAIN:
1: Not phase-selective [ * ] Op. mode rush r. PSx I> lift rush r. PSx
2: Phase-selective
set 1 017 097 017 095
fnom set 2 001 088 001 085
I(2⋅fn)/I(fn)
set 3 001 089 001 086
2*fnom
set 4 001 090 001 087
fnom
Parameter MAIN: MAIN:
2*fnom I(2⋅fn)/I(fn) Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx t lift rush rstr.PSx
12Z7306A
The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur
when transformers or machines are switched on. For all selected stages of the
Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (DTOC, IDMT), of the
Backup Overcurrent Protection (BUOC), of the Distance Protection (DIST) and of
the QV protection, the selective starting will be blocked if an inrush current flow
is detected.
The inrush stabilization function detects an inrush current by evaluating the ratio
of the second harmonic current component to the fundamental. If this ratio
exceeds the threshold that can be set with the parameter MAIN: Rush I(2fn) /
I(fn)PS x, then the inrush stabilization operates.
The current trigger MA IN : I > l i ft rush r. P Sx and a fixed threshold of 0.1·Inom
define the range in which the inrush stabilization operates. If the current is
outside of this range then the inrush stabilization is blocked.
The parameter MAI N: t l if t r ush rstr.P Sx defines the maximum hold-time for
the inrush stabilization.
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
[ * ]
m out of n
3
DIST: DIST:
MAIN: Starting I>> /
Bl.Start. I>>
Inrush stabil. trigg 011 139
3
DIST: / DIST:
MAIN: Starting Z< Bl.Start. Z<
Rush restr. A trig. 036 241
[ 041 027 ] 3
BUOC: BUOC:
Starting /
Block. Starting
MAIN: 036 013
Rush restr. B trig.
BUOC: BUOC:
[ 041 028 ] Zero-sequ. starting Bl.Zero-sequ.start.
010 185
MAIN: 3
Rush restr. C trig. DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I> /
[ 041 029 ] Bl.Start. I>
035 020
3
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I>> /
Bl.Start. I>>
035 021
3
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I>>> /
Bl.Start. I>>>
035 022
3
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I>>>> /
Bl.Start. I>>>>
035 023
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting Ineg> Block.Start. Ineg>
035 024
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting Ineg>> Block.Start. Ineg>>
035 025
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>> Block.Start. Ineg>>>
035 026
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>> Bl.Start. Ineg>>>>
035 027
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting IN> Block. Start. IN>
035 028
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting IN>> Block. Start. IN>>
035 029
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting IN>>> Block. Start. IN>>>
035 030
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting IN>>>> Block. Start. IN>>>>
035 031
IDMT: IDMT:
Starting Iref,P> Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px
040 080
IDMT: IDMT:
MAIN: Starting Iref,N> Bl.Start.Iref,N>
Parameter Funct.Rush restr.PSx 040 081
IDMT: IDMT:
set 1 017 093 Starting Iref,neg>
49Z8931A
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
set 2 017 064 040 107
Fig. 3-64: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the inrush stabilization.
The inrush stabilization is designed with respect to function groups DIST, BUOC,
DTOC, IDMT and QV. Depending on the parameter MA IN : F un ct. Rush
r est r.PSx the starting of these function groups is blocked selectively.
MAIN: &
Protection active MAIN:
Selection meas. volt
f<>: [ 018 202 ]
Ready ≥1
[ 042 101 ]
c
Pf<:
Ready
[ 016 053 ]
V̲A-G fnom
VA-G √3 1
V̲B-G fnom
VA-G √3 2
V̲C-G fnom
VA-G √3 3
+ fnom
∑ 4
−
+ fnom
∑ 5
−
+ fnom
∑ 6
−
1⋯6 f<>:
V̲Meas
1: Voltage A-G
2: Voltage B-G
3: Voltage C-G
4: Voltage A-B
5: Voltage B-C
6: Voltage C-A
◄
MAIN:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
Pf<:
Blocked by V<
MAIN: [ 016 056 ]
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f Φ
f<>:
No. periods reached
f<>:
fMeas
49Z8950A
Fig. 3-65: Measurement of frequency: measuring voltage, evaluation time, undervoltage blocking.
instantaneously if the measuring voltage falls below the set threshold of the
undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.1
[ 221 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 MAIN:
Op. delay fct. block
Signal 3 [ 221 029 ]
Signal n
t 0 MAIN:
Selected signal Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
t 0 MAIN:
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active
Inp.asg. fct.block.2 [ 221 023 ]
[ 221 022 ]
Selected signal
F0Z5016B
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 2
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
D5Z50CLA
3.12.9 Blocked/Faulty
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off) MAIN:
Device not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
SFMON: Blocked/faulty
Blocking [ 004 065 ]
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
functions can be selected that will issue the MA IN: Block ed/fault y signal by
setting a “m out of n” parameter.
3.12.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal
MAIN:
Sig.assign. CB close
[ 021 020 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV02:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
DEV03:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 131 ]
MAIN:
Selected signal CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
12Z6268A
Fig. 3-69: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal.
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that
represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the
“Closed” position signal is made by the setting MA IN: Sig.as sign. CB close.
As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input
only if this coupling is implemented.
& MAIN:
CB open 3p
MAIN: &
CB open 3p EXT [ 031 040 ]
[ 031 028 ]
&
&
[ 031 028 ]
&
configured
MAIN: MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT & & CB closed 3p
[ 036 051 ] [ 031 042 ]
&
&
[ 036 051 ]
configured
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT MAIN:
& & CB closed A
[ 031 029 ]
[ 031 035 ]
MAIN:
& & CB open A
[ 031 032 ]
[ 031 029 ]
configured
MAIN: MAIN:
CB closed B EXT & & CB closed B
[ 031 030 ] [ 031 036 ]
MAIN:
& & CB open B
[ 031 033 ]
[ 031 030 ]
configured
MAIN: MAIN:
CB closed C EXT & & CB closed C
[ 031 031 ] [ 031 037 ]
MAIN:
& & CB open C
[ 031 034 ]
[ 031 031 ]
configured
10 100 ms
5 0 t
MAIN:
CB pos.sig. implaus.
[ 031 041 ]
>0.05 Inom
Plausibility
check
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
43Z1101
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
RC inhib.by CB close
[ 015 042 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
En.man.clos.cmd.USER Rel.t. enab. man.cmd
[ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ]
0
1 t MAIN:
1 Man. cl. cmd.enabl.
[ 039 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute MAIN:
Man. close command
500ms
[ 037 068 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 023 ] [ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
C Close cmd.pulse time
ARC: &
(Re)close request [ 015 067 ]
[ 037 077 ]
MAIN:
ASC: Close command
Close enable 1
[ 037 083 ] [ 037 009 ]
t
ASC:
Enabled
&
[ 018 024 ]
&
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000 &
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0 + MAIN:
No. close commands
1 [ 009 055 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
43Z80CKA
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by
the automatic synchronism check (ASC), by parameters or via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The close command by parameters or a binary
signal input is only executed if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip
has been issued by a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the
setting of MA IN : RC inhi b.by CB clos e to Yes, the close command is not
executed if there is a “CB closed” position signal present. The duration of the
close command can be set.
If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then
the close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 stored
MAIN: S 11
[ 221 054 ]
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 1 MAIN:
[ --- --- ] Mult. sig. 2 stored
S 11 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latching
402 102
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
12Z62FMA
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function
using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple
signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment
with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal
are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
● General reset
● Latching reset
● LED indicators reset
● A command received through the communication interface
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal
will follow the updated signal.
B C B C B C
N N N
(G)
(G) (G)
A A A
Fig. 3-73: Transient condition of ground potential from faulted phase A back to the neutral point in Petersen coil-
grounded systems. (Petersen coil and ground-capacitance of the system form a 50 Hz resonant circuit.) — (a) =
under-compensation (A‑B‑C‑A). (b) = tuned circuit. (c) = over-compensation (A‑C‑B‑A).
MAIN:
Ground fault
[ 041 087 ]
V̲A-G
V̲B-G V̲min
V̲C-G
MAIN:
V̲min=V̲A-G Ground fault A
[ 041 054 ]
V̲min=V̲B-G
V̲min=V̲C-G
MAIN:
Ground fault B
[ 041 055 ]
MAIN:
Ground fault C
[ 041 056 ]
S8Z5081A
GFDSS: MAIN:
Grd. fault pow./adm. Ground fault
[ 009 037 ] [ 041 087 ]
GFDSS:
Ground fault (curr.)
[ 009 038 ]
TGFD:
Ground fault
[ 004 033 ]
GFDSS: MAIN:
Direct. forward/LS Gnd. fault forw./LS
[ 009 035 ] [ 041 088 ]
TGFD:
Forward / LS
[ 004 031 ]
GFDSS: MAIN:
Direct. backward/BS Gnd. fault backw./BS
[ 009 036 ]
[ 041 089 ]
TGFD:
Backward / BS
[ 004 032 ]
S8Z0182A
MAIN:
General reset USER MAIN:
[ 003 002 ] >+ No. general start.
↗ 1: execute ≥1 >R [ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: ≥1
General starting MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
[ 036 000 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MAIN:
OC General starting &
[ 040 000 ]
MAIN:
MAIN: Parameter Gen. start w. OC PSx
Gen. start w. OC PSx
[ * ] set 1 013 072
set 2 013 088
0 set 3 013 090
set 4 013 091
1
0: No
1: Yes
& ≥1 MAIN:
MAIN: Starting A
OC Starting A
[ 036 001 ]
[ 040 005 ]
DIST:
Starting A
BUOC:
IA> triggered
& ≥1 MAIN:
MAIN: Starting B
OC Starting B
[ 036 002 ]
[ 040 006 ]
DIST:
Starting B
BUOC:
IB> triggered
& ≥1 MAIN:
MAIN: Starting C
OC Starting C
[ 036 003 ]
[ 040 007 ]
DIST:
Starting C
BUOC:
IC> triggered
MAIN: & ≥1 MAIN:
OC Starting GF Starting GF
[ 040 008 ] [ 036 004 ]
DIST:
Signal block start.G &
DIST:
Starting N1
MAIN:
OC Starting GF
[ 040 008 ] 45Z88ASB
DIST: MAIN:
Trip signal zone 1 Trip signal
[ 035 072 ] 306 025
PSIG:
Trip enable
305 157
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSIG:
Trip 1
305 155
PSIG:
Trip 2
305 156
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG:
Trip V<
305 158
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C int.
303 022
ARC:
External trip
303 023
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
MAIN:
3-pole trip
306 013
BUOC:
Operating mode
[ 014 000 ]
2: With ARC, 3p HSR
The P433 provides four trip commands. The functions required to trip can be
selected by setting an “m out of n” parameter independently for each of the trip
commands. The minimum trip command time is settable. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
MAIN: ≥1
Trip signal
≥1 & ≥1 MAIN:
DIST: Gen. trip command 1
Trip sig. zone 2-8 >S
& 11 MAIN: [ 036 071 ]
[ 035 073 ]
1 Min.dur. trip cmd. 1
>R
[ 021 003 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ] MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 1
[ 021 001 ] t
MAIN:
◄
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
[ 021 002 ]
m out of n
1
t
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.4
[ 021 047 ] MAIN:
Min.dur. trip cmd. 4
[ 021 033 ]
m out of n
1
t
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
1 MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
0: No [ 021 013 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. block. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
47Z01AWA
DIST: MAIN:
Trip signal ≥1 & ≥1 & >+ No. final trip cmds.
[ 036 009 ] >R [ 004 005 ]
MAIN:
BUOC: 1 100ms Final trip
Trip signal
[ 038 103 ]
[ 036 014 ]
ARC: ≥1
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ] >S
11 &
1
>R
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Close command
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: >+ MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1 No. gen.trip cmds. 1
[ 036 071 ] >R
[ 004 006 ]
MAIN: >+ MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2 No. gen.trip cmds. 2
>R
[ 036 022 ] [ 009 050 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 3
Gen. trip command 3 >R
[ 009 056 ]
[ 036 113 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 4
Gen. trip command 4 >R
[ 009 057 ]
[ 036 114 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset.c.cl./tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ] 49Z89CJA
The number of trip commands is counted (individually for each of the trip
commands).
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
MAIN: S
Gen. trip command 1 11
[ 036 071 ]
R 1
P433 P433
45Z6304A
There is a special send signal for the direct transfer trip of the switch at the
remote end: MAIN : Se nd transf e r tri p. This send signal was designed for
applications with bi-directional transfer tripping so as to avoid that, for instance,
a transfer trip signal is sent only because such a transfer trip signal was received
from the remote station.
With a 3-pole trip, the MAI N: Sen d tran s fer trip signal is sent as soon as the
MAIN : Gen. t rip command 1 signal has been issued, except when this trip
command was caused by receiving the MAI N: Transfer trip. EXT signal (see
Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-112)).
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. USER
[ 003 040 ]
0
MAIN:
1 1 Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
0: don't execute 100 ms
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. trip cmd. EXT
[ 037 018 ]
19Z5008A
A manual trip command may be issued via a parameter or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included
in the selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
MAIN:
Inp.assign. tripping
[ 221 010 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal ≥1
MAIN:
Prot.trip>CB tripped
MAIN: [ 221 012 ]
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
0
1
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2 2
[ 036 022 ]
≥1 3
0 ... 3
0: Without function
1: Gen. trip command 1
2: Gen. trip command 2
3: Gen.trip command 1/2
MAIN:
Oper. mode CB Trip
[ 221 080 ]
1 ... 2
1: ALSTOM D
2: W/o command
MAIN:
Inp. asg. CB trip
[ 221 013 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV02:
Switch. device open
[ 210 086 ]
DEV03:
Switch. device open MAIN:
[ 210 136 ]
& CB trip internal
Selected signal [ 221 006 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext
[ 221 050 ]
MAIN:
& ≥1 CB tripped
Selected signal [ 221 016 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg. CB trip ext
[ 221 024 ]
Selected signal
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
12Z8169A
COMM1: MAIN:
Communication error ≥1 Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
304 422
DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140
19Z5070A
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
Time switching
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-85: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P433.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P433 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute MAIN:
≥1 Reset LED
306 020
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-86: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel.
LOC: OP_RC:
Reset key active & ≥1 Reset record. EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Assignment reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN: MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER Group reset 2 USER
[ * ] [ * ]
0 0
1 ≥1 & 1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute 0: don't execute
m out of n m out of n
OP_RC: OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT Reset record. EXT
[005 213] [005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-87: “CLEAR” key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-118) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MAIN: Fct.assign. rese t 1
in the file P433‑654_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P433 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
MAIN:
1 ≥1 Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBB
If tests are run on the P433, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes PSS:
Control via user
PSS: [ 036 102 ]
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ] PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
INP: [ 003 060 ]
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
3
U x2
4
U x3
1: Parameter subset 1
U xx
2: Parameter subset 2
Address 065 002
PSS:
1 4 Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT PSS:
[ 065 002 ] PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT PS 3 active
[ 065 003 ] [ 036 092 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT PS 4 active
[ 065 004 ] [ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
1 4
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
PSS:
0 4 Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
3.14.3 Signals
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
SFMON:
Selected monit. sig. ≥1 Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
SFMON: Warning (relay)
Hardware fault [ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154B
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON: Warning (re lay). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: OP_RC:
General reset USER No. oper. data sig.
[ 003 002 ] +
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-92: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON:
≥1 Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC:
1 ≥1 No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-93: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
OL_RC: OL_DA:
Record. in progress + Overload duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
OL_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: OL_DA:
Status THERM replica Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
I Load current THERM
305 202 [ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Object temperature Object temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Coolant temperature Coolant temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Pre-trip time left Pre-trip t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Temp. offset replica Offset THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A
Fig. 3-95: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ] +
R OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
52Z01C3A
OL_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[ * ]
OL_RC:
n Overload recording 1
Measured value 1
1 033 020
Measured value 2
2 033 021
Measured value 3
3 033 022
Measured value N
4 033 023
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021 5 033 024
MAIN:
1 ≥1
General reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117A
GF_RC: GF_DA:
Record. in progress + GF recording time
[ 035 005 ] [ 009 100 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
GF_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
50Z01DWA
S1 1 & C
R1
GF_DA:
GFDSS: GF duration pow.meas
VNG> triggered & +
[ 009 024 ]
304 151
R
GFDSS:
GF (pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ] ≥1 R
GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ] ≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0144A
Fig. 3-99: Measurement and storage of the ground fault duration from steady state power evaluation.
GFDSS: C
Grd. fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GF_DA:
I̲N Current IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GFDSS:
Direct. forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ]
≥1
GFDSS:
Direct. backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS: GF_DA:
Current IN,act p.u. Curr. IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ] [ 009 022 ]
& ≥1 R
GFDSS: GF_DA:
Curr. IN,reac p.u. Curr.IN,reac p.u.
[ 009 023 ]
R
GF_DA:
GFDSS: Voltage VNG p.u.
V̲NG [ 009 020 ]
304 150
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0145A
Fig. 3-100: Residual current and neutral-point displacement voltage from steady state value evaluation.
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: GF_DA:
+ GF durat. curr.meas.
IN> triggered
304 158 [ 009 026 ]
R
R
≥1
GFDSS:
Op. delay IN elapsed
304 157
≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0148A
Fig. 3-101: Measurement and storing the ground fault duration as determined by steady state current evaluation.
GFDSS:
Op. delay IN elapsed C
304 157
GF_DA:
I̲N Current IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GF_DA:
GFDSS: Curr. IN filt. p.u.
I̲N filtered [ 009 025 ]
304 159
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0151A
S1 1 & C
R1
GFDSS: GF_DA:
VNG> triggered + GF duration admitt.
& [ 009 068 ]
304 151
GFDSS: R
Admittance ready
[ 038 167 ] R
≥1
GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ] ≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0152A
Fig. 3-103: Measurement and storing the ground fault duration from admittance evaluation.
GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm. C
[ 009 037 ]
I̲N GF_DA:
Current IN p.u.
[ 009 021 ]
R
GFDSS:
Op.del.Y(N)> elapsed C
304 175
GFDSS: GF_DA:
Admitt. Y(N) p.u. Admittance Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ] [ 009 065 ]
R
GFDSS:
Direct. forward/LS C
[ 009 035 ] ≥1
GFDSS:
Direct. backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS:
Conduct. G(N) p.u. GF_DA:
Conduct. G(N) p.u.
[ 004 192 ]
[ 009 066 ]
& ≥1 R
GFDSS:
Suscept. B(N) p.u. GF_DA:
[ 004 193 ] Suscept. B(N) p.u.
[ 009 067 ]
R
GF_DA:
GFDSS: Voltage VNG p.u.
V̲NG
304 150
[ 009 020 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0153A
MAIN:
Ground fault GF_RC:
≥1 Record. in progress
[ 041 087 ] [ 035 005 ]
MAIN:
Gnd. fault forw./LS
[ 041 088 ]
MAIN:
Gnd. fault backw./BS
[ 041 089 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER GF_RC:
+ No. ground faults
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute [ 004 100 ]
≥1 R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 000 ]
1: execute
GF_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
50Z01B8A
GF_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 005 ]
Signal 3 1
Signal n GF_RC:
1 Ground flt.record. n
[ * ]
GF_RC:
n Ground flt.record. n
Measured value 1
1 033 010
Measured value 2
2 033 011
Measured value 3
3 033 012
Measured value N
1 ≥1
MAIN: 0: don't execute
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GF_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 242 ]
12Z6141A
Running time:
(004 021) FT_D A: Run n ing ti me
Fault duration:
(008 010) FT_D A: Faul t du ration
! G ! FT_DA:
MAIN: Running time
General starting +
[ 004 021 ]
[ 036 000 ]
R
≥1
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
FT_DA:
Start data acqu. PSx
[ * ]
1: End of fault
2: Trigger/Trip/End
FT_DA:
MAIN: Output meas. values
General starting 305 050
[ 036 000 ]
FT_DA:
Trigger EXT
[ 036 088 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Always
3: Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze
FT_DA:
Outp. fault location
305 051
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
FT_DA:
Trigger N
310 059
FT_DA:
Flt.loc. determ. PSx
[ * ]
49Z7005A
Fig. 3-108: Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output.
FT_DA:
Output meas. values C 1,2
305 050
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G C2
303 543
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ] 1,3,4 FT_DA:
1 Fault current P p.u.
BUOC: 2 [ 004 025 ]
Starting R
[ 036 013 ]
1 1 FT_DA:
Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
I̲A 2
I̲B I̲max
1 FT_DA:
I̲C Fault loop angle P
3 [ 004 024 ]
R
4 FT_DA:
1 Fault impedance, sec
[ 004 023 ]
R
DIST: 2 ... 3
Select.meas.loop A-G 1
303 537 1
1 FT_DA:
4 Fault reactance,sec.
DIST: [ 004 028 ]
Select.meas.loop B-G 2 R
303 538
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-G 3 1 FT_DA:
Fault react., prim.
303 539
[ 004 029 ]
R
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-B
1
303 540
2 FT_DA:
DIST: Fault loop angle N
Select.meas.loop B-C 2 R [ 004 048 ]
303 541
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-A 3 2 FT_DA:
Fault curr. N p.u.
303 542
R [ 004 049 ]
1 ... 3 FT_DA:
Meas. loop selected
[ 004 079 ]
< 0,2 V
DIST: 1
V̲meas
303 546 2
1
DIST:
α 2
303 552
MAIN:
General reset USER 1 ... 2
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
45Z6320A
FT_DA:
Line length PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Line reactance PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Outp. fault location C
305 051
FT_DA:
Impedance ZAG, sec.
310 060
FT_DA:
Impedance ZBG, sec.
310 061
FT_DA:
Fault location
FT_DA:
Impedance ZCG, sec. [ 004 022 ]
310 062
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ] R
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
[ 004 027 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
FT_DA:
Output meas. values C
305 050
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
FT_DA: C
Trigger N
310 059
I̲A
FT_DA:
Impedance ZAG, sec.
310 060
R
I̲B
FT_DA:
Impedance ZBG, sec.
310 061
R
I̲C
FT_DA:
Impedance ZCG, sec.
310 062
DIST: R
V̲meas
303 546
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z7006A
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC: FT_RC:
Trigger
Trigger EXT ≥1
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
FT_RC: Record. trig active
Trigger USER [ 002 002 ]
[ 003 041 ]
0 0 1 min FT_RC:
≥1 Record. in progress
1 [ 035 000 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal 2
[ 036 023 ]
FT_RC:
MAIN: + No. of faults
General reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ]
≥1 R
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT FT_RC:
[ 005 255 ] + No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
& System disturb. runn
≥1 [ 035 004 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
& S1 1
R1
45Z6325A
FT_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Signal 1 + CT200 Fault mem. overflow
1 ≥1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[ * ]
1
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
FT_RC:
n Fault recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
MAIN:
General reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-
fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC : F aul t me m . overflow will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
F T_RC : F aulty t ime tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
f Analog channel 10
R
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
19Z8020A
MCMON: ≥1 DIST:
Meas. circ. V faulty Starting blocked
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
DIST:
General enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
& DIST:
1 Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Parameter Enable PSx
0
set 1 019 009
49Z8929A
1 set 2 019 015
Fig. 3-115: Enable/disable the distance protection and fault detection blocking.
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
DIST:
DIST: I>> PSx
Starting blocked
[ * ]
303 500
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
I>>> = 2⋅I>>
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
(2/3)·Imax
I̲max
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
47Z1155A
5% of the current maximum phase current is added to the set threshold IN>,
which means that the operate value of the ground current function increases
with an increasing phase current level as a form of stabilization.
I̲A COMP
I̲B
I̲C
DIST:
I̲max IN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
303 502
|I̲x|
0.05⋅|I̲max| |I̲x|+IN>
DIST:
tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DIST: C
Starting blocked DIST:
303 500 tIN> elapsed
303 503
DIST:
tIN> running
[ 036 105 ]
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
0 50ms
[ * ]
4: Short-durat. ground.
DIST:
C VNG> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
VNG>> exceeded
303 596
V̲A-G DIST:
Start.VNG> triggered
V̲B-G 303 504
V̲C-G
DIST: DIST:
VNG>> PSx tVNG>> PSx
C
[ * ] [ * ]
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
MAIN: 303 506
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ] DIST:
1: Low-imped. grounding VNG>> triggered
[ 036 015 ]
DIST:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 036 016 ]
45Z8056A
Fig. 3-117: Monitoring the residual current and the neutral-displacement voltage.
The ground fault detection mode is a function of the neutral-point treatment set
in the P433.
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
3: Isol./res.w/o st. PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
DIST:
Start. IN> triggered
303 502 DIST:
DIST: Start. switch. to PG
Start.VNG> triggered [ 040 052 ]
303 504
100ms 0 FT_RC:
Trigger N
310 058
DIST:
tIN> elapsed FT_DA:
303 503 Trigger N
310 059
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
* Parameter MAIN:
DIST: Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
VPP< triggered
303 509 set 1 010 048
set 2 001 076
DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered set 3 001 077
303 510 set 4 001 078
49Z7004A
DIST: DIST:
Starting blocked I> (Ibl) PSx
C
303 500 [ * ]
I̲A DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg.
303 598
I̲B
DIST:
I̲C IB>(Ibl) trigg.
303 599
DIST:
IC>(Ibl) trigg.
303 600
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ] Meas.val.> set value
C
DIST:
15ms 0 Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
V̲A-G
V̲B-G
V̲C-G DIST:
15ms 0 Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST:
15ms 0 Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
C
Meas.val< set value
V̲A-G⋅√3
V̲B-G⋅√3
MAIN: V̲C-G⋅√3
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
2: Isol./res.w.start.PG
4: Short-durat. ground.
2-Pole Faults
Moreover, a plausibility check for 2-pole faults without (simultaneous) ground
fault is performed: The P433 decides in favor of an “only 2-pole” fault, if exactly
one phase voltage is considerably smaller than the other two, and at the same
time the opposite phase-ground voltage has a value in the normal range. This
means, for example, that an “only 2p–AB” fault is detected if the following
occurs:
● VAB < 0.5·VBC and VAB < 0.5·VCA and VCG > 0.8·Vnom
This condition is constantly checked for all three phase-phase measuring loops.
The test of the “opposite” phase-ground voltage prevents a false decision in case
of a nearby occuring 3-pole fault, with 3 phase-phase voltages which are small
but different from each other (due to usual system unbalance or different fault
resistances).
As soon as this “only 2-pole” condition is fulfilled for any of the phase-phase
measuring loops, the V< and Z< startings are blocked for the other two phase-
phase loops.
DIST:
Operat. mode V< PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A
303 514
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B
303 515
DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C
303 516
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
V̲A-G VA< triggered
V̲A-G⋅√3 303 517
V̲B-G V̲B-G⋅√3
DIST:
VB< triggered
V̲C-G V̲C-G⋅√3 303 518
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
VPP< triggered
303 509
DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
[ * ]
1
DIST:
Enable ZP-G
2
303 508
DIST:
Start. switch. to PG
[ 040 052 ]
DIST:
I>>> triggered
303 501
DIST: DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, A Enable ZA-G starting
303 514 303 520
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST:
VA< triggered
303 517
DIST: DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, B Enable ZB-G starting
303 515 303 521
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST:
VB< triggered
303 518
DIST: DIST:
Enable V<, Z<, C Enable ZC-G starting
303 516
303 522
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
Parameter DIST:
Operat. mode Z< PSx
set 1 010 066 DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
set 2 010 086 303 525
set 3 011 006
set 4 011 026
D5Z5010A
110°
Backward direction Forward direction
Rfw,PG
Rfw,PP
X
Xfw
Xfw
w
Zf
70°
β
R
Zfw
, PP
bw Zf
Z w,
PG
−70° D5Z5212A
Fig. 3-122: Fault detection characteristic of the underimpedance fault detection function.
DIST:
Abs. value kG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Angle kG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
I̲A-kG
303 601
DIST:
I̲B-kG
303 602
DIST:
I̲C-kG
303 603
DIST:
Enable ZP-G
303 508
DIST:
DIST: Z evaluation PSx
DIST:
I̲A-kG [ * ] Xfw PSx
303 601
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
I̲B-kG ß PSx
303 602
1 [ * ]
DIST:
I̲C-kG DIST:
303 603 Zbw/Zfw PSx
I̲A 2⋅I̲A [ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
1 2 [ * ]
DIST:
1: ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN) Rfw,PG PSx
2: ZPG=VPG/2*IP [ * ]
DIST: DIST:
Enable ZA-G starting Rfw,PP PSx
303 520 [ * ]
V̲A-G
DIST:
Z̲A-G ZA< start. triggered
303 526
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
DIST: 303 527
Enable ZB-G starting
303 521
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
V̲B-G 303 528
Z̲B-G DIST:
Start.ZPP< triggered
303 510
DIST:
Enable ZC-G starting
303 522
V̲C-G
Z̲C-G
DIST:
Enable ZA-B starting
303 523
Z̲A-B
DIST:
Enable ZB-C starting
303 524
Z̲B-C
DIST:
Enable ZC-A starting
303 525
47Z0159A
DIST:
VA< triggered DIST:
303 517
Starting A
303 529
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered
303 526
DIST:
IA>> triggered
303 511
DIST: DIST:
VB< triggered Starting B
303 518
303 530
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered
303 527
DIST:
IB>> triggered
303 512
DIST: DIST:
VC< triggered Starting C
303 519 303 531
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
303 528
DIST:
DIST: General starting
IC>> triggered [ 036 240 ]
303 513
DIST:
1-pole starting
303 533
DIST:
Multipole starting
DIST: 303 534
Starting G
303 507
DIST:
DIST: Starting N1
tIN> PSx 303 535
[ * ]
DIST:
Zero-sequ. starting
[ 036 021 ]
MAIN:
Transfer for 1p PSx
[ * ]
1: Ground
2: P or G =f(Imed,Imax)
I̲A
|I̲medium|/|I̲max|≤2/3
COMP
I̲B
I̲C
I̲max |I̲medium|/|I̲max|>2/3
I̲medium
COMP
COMP
COMP
3
DIST:
Bl.Start. I>> DIST:
450 204
≥1 Starting I>>
[ 011 139 ]
DIST:
General starting DIST:
[ 036 240 ] & Starting I>> A
[ 040 064 ]
DIST:
IA>> triggered DIST:
303 511 & Starting I>> B
[ 040 065 ]
DIST:
IB>> triggered DIST:
303 512 & Starting I>> C
[ 040 097 ]
DIST:
IC>> triggered
303 513
DIST:
& Starting V< A
[ 040 067 ]
DIST:
VA< triggered DIST:
303 517 & Starting V< B
[ 040 075 ]
DIST:
VB< triggered DIST:
303 518 & Starting V< C
[ 040 096 ]
DIST:
VC< triggered
303 519
DIST:
& Starting Z< A
[ 040 070 ]
DIST:
ZA< start. triggered DIST:
303 526 & Starting Z< B
[ 040 071 ]
DIST:
ZB< start. triggered DIST:
303 527
& Starting Z< C
[ 040 072 ]
DIST:
ZC< start. triggered
303 528 DIST:
3
≥1 Starting Z<
DIST: [ 036 241 ]
Bl.Start. Z<
450 205
45Z8032A
Phase Phase to Phase to C before A before A before C before B before A before C before B before
Priority Phase Ground A, B before C, B before A, B, B, C,
Loop Loop acyclic C, cyclic acyclic A, cyclic acyclic acyclic acyclic acyclic
Vmin
A, B, C, G I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin)
1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin
A, B, C I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin) I̲PP(Vmin)
1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin 1V̲PPmin
A, B, G I̲A-B I̲P- I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲A-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG
1V̲A-B kG(Vmin) 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G
VPGmin
A, C, G I̲C-A I̲P- I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG
1V̲C-A kG(Vmin) 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G
VPGmin
B, C, G I̲B-C I̲P- I̲C-kG I̲B-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲C-kG I̲B-kG
1V̲B-C kG(Vmin) 1V̲C-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲B-G
VPGmin
A, B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B I̲A-B
1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B 1V̲A-B
A, C I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A I̲C-A
1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A 1V̲C-A
B, C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C I̲B-C
1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C 1V̲B-C
A, G I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG I̲A-kG
1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G 1V̲A-G
B, G I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG I̲B-kG
1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G 1V̲B-G
C, G I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG I̲C-kG
1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G 1V̲C-G
DIST:
Starting C DIST:
303 531 CVT stabilization
DIST: [ 010 031 ]
Starting N1
303 535
DIST: 1
I̲A-kG
303 601 0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
I̲B-kG
303 602
DIST:
I̲C-kG
303 603
I̲A
2⋅fnom
I̲B
I̲C
V̲A-G
V̲B-G
V̲C-G
fnom
Filter 1
fnom
Filter 2
1...2 DIST:
V̲meas
303 546
DIST:
I̲meas
303 545
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-G
303 537
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-G
303 538
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-G
303 539
DIST:
Select.meas.loop A-B
303 540
DIST:
Select.meas.loop B-C
303 541
DIST:
Select.meas.loop C-A
303 542
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-G
303 543
DIST:
Select.meas.loop P-P
303 544
49Z6439A
DIST:
I>> triggered
303 597
DIST:
General starting
>0.65⋅Vnom
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
φcorr
φcorr 303 547
f/fnom = Δf
+
0.95fnom<f<1.05fnom
R
1 DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
S1 1 303 549
300ms
R1
1 DIST:
tVmemory running
2s [ 040 034 ]
C C C
DIST:
V̲A-G V̲A-B (stored)
303 548
V̲B-G
49Z6433A
determined by the frequency deviation and the time that has elapsed since
synchronization was terminated. Furthermore, an angle correction based on the
selected measuring loop and the setting at MA IN: Ph ase se qu ence is
required. The resulting angle, φX, is used for further processing.
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST: DIST:
V̲meas φF
303 546
φF 303 550
DIST:
I̲meas
303 545
φS
DIST:
V̲A-B (stored)
303 548
DIST:
φcorr
303 547
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
X⋅1
2: A - C - B X⋅(-1)
DIST: X = 0°
Select.meas.loop A-B
303 540
DIST: X = -120°
Select.meas.loop B-C
303 541
DIST: X = +120°
Select.meas.loop C-A
303 542
DIST: X = +150°
Select.meas.loop A-G
303 537
DIST: X = +30°
Select.meas.loop B-G
303 538
DIST: X = -90°
Select.meas.loop C-G
303 539
φX DIST:
φX
303 551
47Z0165A
used for directional measurement. This means that a decision is made for the
forward direction.
freigegeben φX φX
nicht α φF
freigegeben
A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle φ selected for direction
determination is in this range:
−45° < φ < +135°
In the case of angles outside this range, a decision is made for the backward
(reverse) direction.
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
< 0.002 Vnom DIST:
Forw. w/o measurem.
[ 038 044 ]
DIST:
Direct. using Vmeas
DIST: [ 038 045 ]
V̲meas
303 546
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Direct. using memory
[ 038 047 ]
1
2
DIST: 1
α
303 552
DIST: 2
φF
303 550
49Z6435A
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
V̲meas
303 546
DIST:
Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
[ * ]
3
4
2
1 1
DIST: 3
α 180°+α 2
303 552
3
1
4
2
1 ... 4 3
1 ... 3 DIST:
φZ
303 553
Parameter DIST:
* Oper.val.Vmemory PSx
49Z6436A
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1 1: Circle
2 2: Polygon
1: Circle
2: Polygon
Parameter DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set 1 012 040
set 2 073 097
set 3 074 097
set 4 075 097
D5Z5019A
| Z‾ F |
| Z‾ F,corr | = 1 + sinδ
The following relation applies in the range −45° < φZ < α:
δ = α−φZ
The following relation applies in the range 135° < φZ < (α+180°):
δ = α−φZ+180°
DIST:
Arc comp. circle PSx
[ * ]
0: No 1
1: Yes 2
-45°<φZ<α
1 2
DIST:
φZ
303 553
135°<φZ<(α+180°) 2 1
1 2 DIST:
|Z̲meas|
1 δ=α-φZ 303 567
DIST:
α
303 552
2 δ=α-φZ+180°
DIST:
Characteristic PSx 1 2
[ * ]
1: Circle
|Z̲F,corr|=
|Z̲F|/(1+sinδ)
DIST:
V̲meas
303 546
|Z̲F|=|V̲meas|/|I̲meas|
DIST:
I̲meas
303 545
In the R-X diagram, the characteristic shown in the following figure is obtained. If
the characteristic were to be measured with sine variables for the setting
Arc compensation, the dot-dash line would be obtained.
+135°
Forward direction X
αn Zn
δ
φZ
Backward direction
−45° ≘ 315°
D5Z5025A
Fig. 3-134: P433 impedance and direction characteristic for the “Circle” setting.
The calculated impedance |Z̲meas| is compared with the set impedance in the six
impedance zones. If the measured impedance is smaller than or equal to the set
impedance, then a distance decision is made for the corresponding zone(s).
DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
α2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
[ * ] α
303 552
* Parameter DIST:
Z2 (circle) PSx
DIST:
α2 (circle) PSx * Parameter DIST:
Z3 (circle) PSx
DIST:
α3 (circle) PSx
set 1 012 043 072 095 set 1 012 044 072 096
set 2 073 092 073 095 set 2 073 093 073 096
set 3 074 092 074 095 set 3 074 093 074 096
set 4 075 092 075 095 set 4 075 093 075 096
* Parameter DIST:
Z4 (circle) PSx
DIST:
α4 (circle) PSx * Parameter DIST:
Z5 (circle) PSx
DIST:
α5 (circle) PSx
set 1 012 045 072 099 set 1 012 148 012 164
set 2 073 094 073 099 set 2 012 149 012 165
set 3 074 094 074 099 set 3 012 150 012 166
set 4 075 094 075 099 set 4 012 151 012 167
Impedance zone6(n=6)
* Parameter DIST:
Z6 (circle) PSx
DIST:
α6 (circle) PSx
set 1 012 152 012 168
set 2 012 153 012 169
set 3 012 154 012 170
set 4 012 155 012 171
47Z1467A
In addition to the settings described above, the zone extension factors kze for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1. The impedances modified by zone extension factor kze are
calculated as follows:
Z1,kze = kze·Z1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
● Protective signaling (PSIG: Z1 e xte nded)
● Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or –
irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose
command.
● Switch on to fault protection (SO TF : Z1 e xtende d)
● An external signal (DIST: Zon e exte nsi on EXT).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a
time-delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
ARC: DIST:
Zone extension TDR Zone extension
303 000 [ 036 065 ]
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
ARC: DIST:
Zone extension HSR Zone extension HSR
303 001 [ 036 103 ]
MAIN:
Meas.r.extd. ext./RC
306 002
PSIG: DIST:
Z1 extended Z1 (circle) PSx
[ 035 075 ] [ * ]
ARC:
Zone extension RC DIST:
303 002
α1 (circle) PSx
[ * ]
SOTF:
Z1 extended DIST:
kze,PG TDR PSx
[ 035 076 ]
[ * ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT DIST:
kze,PP TDR PSx
[ 036 046 ]
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PG HSR PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Select.meas.loop P-G
303 543
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Select.meas.loop P-P
303 544
DIST:
|Z̲meas| DIST:
303 567
|Z̲meas|≤f(Z1,α1) Dist.decision Z1
303 562
|Z̲meas|≤f(Z1,α1,kze) DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze
303 563
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
MAIN: 303 565
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000
45Z5016A
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
2: Polygon
DIST:
V̲meas
303 546
|Z̲F|=|V̲meas|/|I̲meas|
DIST: DIST:
I̲meas |Z̲F|⋅sinφZ XF
303 545 303 555
|Z̲F|⋅cosφZ DIST:
RF
303 554
DIST:
φZ
303 553
Parameter DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set 1 012 040
set 2 073 097
set 3 074 097
set 4 075 097
D5Z5021B
The calculated quantities, RF and XF, are compared with the reference quantities,
Rref and Xref, of the four impedance zones. The reference quantities are
determined using the settings for determining the impedance zone(s). If both
quantities lie within the set impedance zone(s), then a distance decision is made
for the corresponding zone(s).
The impedance zones are determined by the following settings:
● Reactance X, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
● Resistance R, separately for phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase loops
● Angle α
● Angle σ
Note that the specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8:
Rn,PG / Xn < 8, and
Rn,PP / Xn < 8
If the ratio is greater than this (i.e. the polygon becomes extremely “flat”), the
measurement conditions for high fault resistances become quite bad, because in
this case, the angle of the fault impedance gets small, which results in quite big
measurement deviations for the reactance.
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in the
following figure.
+135°
Forward direction X
Xn
σn
45°
αn
Rfw,PP
Rfw,PG
R
Backward direction
−45° ≘ 315°
D5Z5022A
Fig. 3-138: P433 impedance and directional characteristics for the “Polygon” setting.
DIST:
DIST: c R2,PG (polygon) PSx
Select.meas.loop P-G [ * ]
303 543
DIST:
DIST: c R2,PP (polygon) PSx
Select.meas.loop P-P
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
c X2,PG (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
c X2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
α2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
σ2 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST: Rnref=f(Rn,αn,σn,φZ)
φZ
Rn,ref ≥ RF
303 553
Xnref=f(Rn,αn,σn,φZ) DIST:
Dist.decision zone n
Xn,ref ≥ XF 303 561
DIST:
RF
303 554
DIST:
XF
303 555
Impedance zone2(n=2)
Impedance zone4(n=4)
45Z8069A
Fig. 3-139: Setting impedance zones 2 to 6 (showing the example of zone 2) and distance measurement.
In addition to the settings described above, the kze zone extension factors for
high-speed reclosure (HSR) and time-delay reclosure (TDR) can also be set
separately for phase-to-ground (PG) and phase-to-phase (PP) loops for
impedance zone 1.
As a result of these settings, impedance zone 1 is extended accordingly in the R
and X directions. The R and X values modified by the kze zone extension factor
are calculated according to the following equations:
R1,kze = kze·R1
X1,kze = kze·X1
The increase in reach by zone extension factor kze HSR is controlled by the
following:
● Protective signaling (PSIG: Z1 exten de d)
● Internal auto-reclosing control, if protective signaling is not ready or –
irrespective of the readiness of protective signaling – during the reclose
command.
● Switch on to fault protection (SOTF: Z1 exte nded)
● An external signal (DI ST: Zone e xten sion EXT).
The impedance characteristic is extended by zone extension factor kze TDR if a
time-delay reclosure is carried out by internal auto-reclosing control.
MAIN:
Meas.r.extd. ext./RC
306 002
DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
ARC: DIST:
Zone extension TDR Zone extension
303 000 [ 036 065 ]
PSIG:
Ready DIST:
[ 037 027 ] Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
ARC:
Zone extension HSR
303 001
DIST:
PSIG: c X1,PG (polygon) PSx
Z1 extended [ * ]
[ 035 075 ]
DIST:
c X2,PP (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
α1 (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
ARC: σ1 (polygon) PSx
Zone extension RC [ * ]
303 002
DIST:
SOTF: kze,PG TDR PSx
Z1 extended c
[ * ]
[ 035 076 ]
DIST:
DIST: kze,PP TDR PSx
Zone extension EXT
c
[ * ]
[ 036 046 ]
DIST:
c kze,PG HSR PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
kze,PP HSR PSx
c
[ * ]
DIST:
kze (polygon) PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
DIST: c R1,PG (polygon) PSx
Select.meas.loop P-G [ * ]
303 543
DIST:
DIST: R1,PP (polygon) PSx
Select.meas.loop P-P
c
[ * ]
303 544
DIST:
φZ R1,ref1 =
303 553
R1,ref1 ≥ RF
f(R1, α1, σ1, φZ)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1
X1,ref1 =
303 562
X1,ref1 ≥ XF
f(X1, α1, σ1, φZ)
R1,ref2 =
R1,ref2 ≥ RF
f(R1,α1,σ1,φZ,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze
X1,ref2 =
303 563
X1,ref2 ≥ XF
f(X1,α1,σ1,φZ,kze)
DIST:
Dist.decis.Z1 stored
MAIN: 303 565
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000
DIST:
RF
303 554
DIST:
XF
303 555
* DIST: DIST:
Parameter
DIST: t1 PSx t1,ze PSx
t1 PSx
set 1 012 028 026 025
[ * ]
set 2 012 078 027 025
DIST: set 3 013 028 028 025
MAIN:
Meas.r.extd. ext./RC C t1,ze PSx set 4 013 078 029 025
306 002 [ * ]
DIST: t1 0 DIST:
General starting t1 elapsed
[ 036 240 ] [ 036 026 ]
t1,Ü 0
DIST:
Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
DIST: DIST:
Zone extension TDR Timer st. 1 elapsed
[ 038 022 ] 303 614
ARC: DIST:
Trip time elapsed t1,ze elapsed
303 003 [ 035 079 ]
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
305 150
SOTF:
Trip time elapsed
460 528
43Z8033A
DIST:
t2 PSx
[ * ]
DIST: t 0
General starting DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 240 ]
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
t3 PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST:
t3 elapsed
1
[ 036 028 ]
2
DIST:
3 ≥1 C t4 PSx
[ * ]
4
5 t 0
DIST:
t4 elapsed
6
[ 036 029 ]
1: Normal
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4 DIST:
3: Section cable - line t5 PSx
4: Section line - cable [ * ]
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff
6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
t 0
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
t6 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
t7 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
t8 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
* Parameter DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
DIST:
t2 PSx
DIST:
t3 PSx
DIST:
t4 PSx
set 1 012 000 012 029 012 030 012 031
set 2 012 050 012 079 012 080 012 081
set 3 013 000 013 029 013 030 013 031
set 4 013 050 013 079 013 080 013 081
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ] DIST:
Direction N1 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
1
DIST:
2 N1,bw
303 571
DIST:
Direction N2 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
1
DIST:
2 N2,bw
303 573
DIST:
Direction N3 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
1
DIST:
2 N3,bw
303 575
3
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4 Direction N4 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
3: Section cable - line N4,fw
303 578
1 DIST:
N4,bw
4: Section line - cable 2 303 577
3
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff
DIST:
6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4 Direction N5 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 578
1 DIST:
N5,bw
2 303 579
DIST:
Direction N6 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
1
DIST:
N6,bw
2 303 615
DIST:
Direction N7 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
1: Forward directional
1 DIST:
2: Backward directional N7,bw
2 303 617
3: Non-directional
3
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
1: Normal
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1 Trip zone 1
303 562
DIST: 303 584
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
DIST:
N1,bw
303 571
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze Trip zone 1,ze
303 563
303 595
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2 Trip zone 2
303 581
303 585
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3 Trip zone 3
303 582 303 586
DIST:
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 4 Trip zone 4
303 583
303 587
DIST:
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST:
N4,fw
303 578
DIST:
N4,bw
303 577
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5 Trip zone 5
303 619
303 588
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
303 579
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 Trip zone 6
303 620
303 621
DIST:
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST: DIST:
t7 elapsed Trip zone 7
303 622
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
DIST: DIST:
t8 elapsed Trip zone 8
303 626
[ 037 128 ]
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
Parameter DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
set 1 012 000
set 2 012 050
set 3 013 000
set 4 013 050
45Z5221A
Fig. 3-144: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: Normal
t8 t8
t7 t7
t6 t6
t5 t5
t4 t4
t3 t3
t2
t2
t1
t1 = 0 s
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z2 Z1 Z1 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
t8 t8
t7
t6, t7
t6
t5
t5
t4
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s t1 = 0 s
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z1
t8 t8
t7 t6
t6 t5
t5
t4
t7
t4
t3
t3
t2
t2
t1 = 0 s t1 = 0 s
Z5 Z3 Z1 Z2 Z4 Z6 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6
47Z0176A
For single-pole starting, a zone 1 trip signal will be issued once timer stage t1 has
elapsed; for multi-pole starting, it is issued once t4 has elapsed.
If t2 or t3 = t4 and N2 or N3 = N1 have been set, then timer stage t4 is set to ∞.
t8
t7
t6
t5
t3
t2
t4
t1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z5 Z6
Z1 = Z4
45Z5022A
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4
DIST: DIST:
1-pole starting 303 533 Trip zone 1
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1303 562 303 584
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw 303 572
DIST:
N1,bw 303 571
DIST:
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
Dist.decision Z1,ze
303 563 303 595
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: DIST:
Multipole starting
303 534 Trip zone 2
303 585
DIST:
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 586
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2
303 581 Trip zone 5
DIST: 303 588
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw 303 574
DIST:
N2,bw 303 573
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3
303 582 Trip zone 6
DIST: 303 621
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw 303 576
DIST:
N3,bw 303 575
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5
303 619 Trip zone 7
DIST: 303 622
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw 303 580
DIST:
N5,bw 303 579
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6
303 620 Trip zone 8
DIST: 303 626
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw 303 616
DIST:
N6,bw 303 615
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
N7,fw 303 618
DIST:
N7,bw 303 617
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ]
Parameter DIST:
DIST: Op. mode zone 4 PSx
Fault forward / LS set 1 012 000
[ 036 018 ]
DIST: set 2 012 050
Fault backward / BS set 3 013 000
[ 036 019 ] set 4 013 050
45Z5223A
Fig. 3-147: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4
cable must form the front part of the transmission section and the line the rear
part.
Timer stage t1 and direction setting N1 are assigned to impedance zones 1 and
4. Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.
A zone 1 or zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following conditions are satisfied:
● A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.
● The measured direction matches direction setting N1.
● Timer stage t1 has elapsed.
In order for the P433 to be able to determine the section in which the fault is
located, impedance zone 1 must be set to the total length of the power
transmission section (e.g. cable plus line) and impedance zone 4 to the cable
length. If a distance trip for zones 1 and 4 occurs after t1 has elapsed, the auto-
reclosing function will be blocked because the fault lies in the cable section.
t8
t7
t6
t5
t3
t2
t1
t1 = t4
Z4 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z5 Z6
45Z5024A
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
3: Section cable - line
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1 Trip zone 1
303 562
DIST: 303 584
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
DIST:
N1,bw
303 571
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze Trip zone 1,ze
303 563
DIST: 303 595
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 4 Trip zone 2
303 583
303 585
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2 Trip zone 3
303 581
DIST: 303 586
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3 Trip zone 4
303 582
DIST: 303 587
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5 Trip zone 5
303 619
DIST: 303 588
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
303 579
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 Trip zone 6
303 620
DIST: 303 621
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST: DIST:
t7 elapsed Trip zone 7
[ 037 127 ] 303 622
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
DIST: DIST:
t8 elapsed Trip zone 8
[ 037 128 ] 303 626
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
Parameter DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
set 1 012 000
set 2 012 050
set 3 013 000
set 4 013 050
45Z5225A
Fig. 3-149: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: Section cable - line
line must form the front part of the transmission section and the cable the rear
part.
Timer stage t1 and direction setting N1 are assigned to impedance zones 1 and
4. Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.
The “Distance trip Zone 1” or “Distance trip Zone 4” decision is reached if the
following conditions are satisfied:
● A distance decision exists for zone 1 or zone 4.
● The measured direction matches direction setting N1.
● Timer stage t1 has elapsed.
In order for the P433 to determine the section in which the fault is located,
impedance zone 1 must be set to the total length of the transmission section and
impedance zone 4 for the length of the line. If a distance trip occurs only in after
t1 has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function will be blocked because the fault lies
in the cable section.
t8
t7
t6
t5
t3
t2
t1
t1 = t4
Z4 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z5 Z6
45Z5024A
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
4: Section line - cable
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1 Trip zone 1
303 562
DIST: 303 584
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
DIST:
N1,bw
303 571
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze DIST:
303 563 Trip zone 1,ze
DIST: 303 595
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 4 DIST:
Trip zone 2
303 583
303 585
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2 Trip zone 3
303 581
303 586
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3 Trip zone 4
303 582
DIST: 303 587
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5 DIST:
303 619 Trip zone 5
DIST: 303 588
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
303 579
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 DIST:
303 620
Trip zone 6
DIST: 303 621
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST: DIST:
t7 elapsed Trip zone 7
[ 037 127 ] 303 622
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
DIST: DIST:
t8 elapsed Trip zone 8
[ 037 128 ] 303 626
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
Parameter DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
set 1 012 000
set 2 012 050
set 3 013 000
set 4 013 050
45Z5226A
Fig. 3-151: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: Section line - cable
conductor effect. Since the effect occurs approximately 70 ms after the onset of
the fault, it is not a factor in impedance zone 1 (where t1 = 0 s). Compensation
therefore takes place during impedance measurement in zone 2 – with
assistance from impedance zone 4.
Timer stage t2 and direction setting N2 are assigned to impedance zones 2 and
4. Timer stage t4 setting and direction setting N4 are inactive.
The settings for impedance zone 2 need to be made without regard to the bundle
conductor effect. The setting values for impedance zone 4, on the other hand,
need to take the bundle conductor effect into account.
The P433 checks 30 ms after distance protection has started to determine
whether the following conditions are satisfied:
● A distance decision exists for zone 2.
● The measured direction matches direction setting N2.
This information is then stored. The zone 4 trip signal is issued if the following
conditions are satisfied:
● A distance decision exists for zone 4.
● The measured direction matches direction setting N2.
● The buffer has been initiated 30 ms after distance protection has started.
t8
t7
t6
t5
t3
t2, t4
t2 = t4 t1
Z1 Z2 Z4 Z3 Z5 Z6
45Z5027A
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
5: Comp.bundle cond.eff DIST:
Parameter Op. mode zone 4 PSx
DIST:
General starting set 1 012 000
[ 036 240 ] set 2 012 050
set 3 013 000
set 4 013 050
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2
303 581
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST:
DIST: Trip zone 1
Dist.decision zone 4 303 584
303 583
DIST:
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1 Trip zone 1,ze
303 562
DIST: 303 595
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
DIST:
N1,bw
303 571
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision Z1,ze Trip zone 2
303 563
303 585
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 586
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3 Trip zone 4
303 582
DIST: 303 587
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5 Trip zone 5
303 619 303 588
DIST:
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
303 579
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 Trip zone 6
303 620
DIST: 303 621
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST: DIST:
t7 elapsed Trip zone 7
[ 037 127 ] 303 622
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
DIST: DIST:
t8 elapsed Trip zone 8
[ 037 128 ] 303 626
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
45Z6332A
Fig. 3-153: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: Comp.bundle cond.eff
t8
t7
t6
t5
t3
t2
t4
t1
Z1 Z2 Z3 Z5 Z6
Z1 = Z4
45Z5022A
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
DIST:
1-pole starting 303 533 DIST:
Trip zone 1
DIST:
Dist.decision Z1303 562 303 584
DIST:
Timer st. 1 elapsed
303 614
DIST:
N1,fw
303 572
DIST:
N1,bw
303 571 DIST:
DIST: Trip zone 1,ze
Dist.decision Z1,ze 303 595
303 563
DIST:
t1,ze elapsed
[ 035 079 ]
DIST: DIST:
Multipole starting Trip zone 2
303 534
303 585
DIST:
t4 elapsed
[ 036 029 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 586
DIST:
Dist.decision zone 2 DIST:
303 581
Trip zone 5
DIST: 303 588
t2 elapsed
[ 036 027 ]
DIST:
N2,fw
303 574
DIST:
N2,bw
303 573
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 3 Trip zone 6
303 582
DIST: 303 621
t3 elapsed
[ 036 028 ]
DIST:
N3,fw
303 576
DIST:
N3,bw
303 575
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 5 Trip zone 7
303 619
DIST: 303 622
t5 elapsed
[ 036 030 ]
DIST:
N5,fw
303 580
DIST:
N5,bw
303 579
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 Trip zone 8
303 620
DIST: 303 626
t6 elapsed
[ 036 031 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
DIST:
t7 elapsed
[ 037 127 ]
DIST:
N7,fw
303 618
DIST:
N7,bw
303 617
DIST:
t8 elapsed
[ 037 128 ] Parameter DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
DIST: set 1 012 000
Fault forward / LS set 2 012 050
[ 036 018 ]
DIST: set 3 013 000
Fault backward / BS set 4 013 050
[ 036 019 ]
45Z5229A
Fig. 3-155: Distance protection trip signals, zone 4 operating mode: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z1 EXT Trip signal zone 1
[ 036 034 ] [ 035 072 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z1
304 850
DIST:
Trip zone 1
303 584
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z1,ze EXT Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 036 036 ] [ 035 074 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z1,e
304 851
DIST:
Trip zone 1,ze
303 595
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z2 EXT Trip signal zone 2
[ 036 037 ] [ 041 084 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z2
304 852
DIST:
Trip zone 2
303 585
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z3 EXT Trip signal zone 3
[ 036 039 ] [ 040 056 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z3
304 853
DIST:
Trip zone 3
303 586
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z4 EXT Trip signal zone 4
[ 036 041 ] [ 040 057 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z4
304 854
DIST:
Trip zone 4
303 587
DIST:
DIST: Trip signal zone 5
Blocking Z5 EXT [ 040 058 ]
[ 036 044 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z5
304 855
DIST:
Trip zone 5
303 588
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z6 EXT Trip signal zone 6
[ 036 061 ] [ 040 059 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z6
304 856
DIST:
Trip zone 6
303 621
DIST: DIST:
Blocking Z7 EXT Trip signal zone 7
[ 036 067 ] [ 037 129 ]
PSB:
Blocking Z7
304 857
DIST:
Trip zone 7
303 622
DIST:
Blocking Z8 EXT DIST:
Trip signal zone 8
[ 036 068 ]
[ 037 130 ]
PSB: DIST:
Blocking Z8 Trip sig. zone 2-8
304 858
[ 035 073 ]
DIST:
Trip zone 8 DIST:
303 626 Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx DIST:
[ * ] ARC blocked
303 589
3: Section cable - line
DIST:
Parameter Op. mode zone 4 PSx
set 1 012 000
set 2 012 050
set 3 013 000
set 4 013 050
45Z5273B
For special applications, the P433 issues the DIST: Impedan ce in zone 6
signal if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
DIST: DIST:
Dist.decision zone 6 Impedance in zone 6
303 620 [ 037 200 ]
DIST:
N6,fw
303 616
DIST:
N6,bw
303 615
47Z0185A
PSB:
General enable USER
[ 014 050 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PSB:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
PSB:
Enabled
0 [ 040 095 ]
0: No PSB:
Ready
1: Yes 304 859
MAIN:
Protection active * Parameter PSB:
306 001 Enable PSx
PSB: set 1 015 090
Blocked
[ 011 144 ] set 2 015 091
MCMON: set 3 015 092
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ] set 4 015 093
47Z11CBC
3.24.1 Measurement
PSB:
R
[ 014 060 ]
PSB:
posX
[ 014 061 ]
PSB:
negX
[ 006 185 ]
PSB: PSB:
α Asyn. power swing
[ 014 062 ] 304 860
V̲A-G
V̲B-G V̲pos
V̲C-G
Z̲pos PSB:
I̲A Z within polygon
[ 036 024 ]
I̲B I̲pos
I̲C
45Z80CCA
PSB:
X posX
Z̲pos(t)
1
2
PSB:
α R
PSB:
R
PSB:
negX
47Z13CFB
Fig. 3-160: Power swing detection polygon and examples of trajectories of the positive-sequence impedance during
a power swing. ➀: Example trajectory of a stable power swing. ➁: Example trajectory of an instable power swing.
function decides on power swing only if the rate of change is smaller than the
set threshold ΔRx/ΔT and subsequently blocks all selected zones.
The threshold ΔRx has a fixed value:
● ΔRx = 5 Ω for Inom = 1 A
● ΔRx = 1 Ω for Inom = 5 A.
Timer stage ΔT can be set at P SB: Ope r. valu e Delt a T.
A power swing decision once made is stored until one of the following conditions
is met:
● The positive-sequence impedance exits the power swing polygon.
● The expected maximum power swing duration (PSB: Max. PS cycle
dur.) or permitted maximum duration of power swing blocking (PSB: Max .
blocking ti me) has elapsed.
● One of the PSB current stages has started.
MiCOM P433 operates task oriented. The PSB task is processed approximately
every 6 ms. The internal ΔRx threshold value will be adapted according to the
measured actual time delay between 2 consecutive measurements. With each
processing step, the impedance Zpos is determined and stored. Thus ΔRpos is
calculated from 2 consecutive processing steps:
ΔRpos = Rpos(n) - Rpos(n-1),
Where:
● Rmit(n): the first measurement inside the power swing detection
polygon
● Rmit(n-1): the previous measurement outside the power swing
detection polygon
X
150
Starting characteristic
100
50
−50 0 50 100 R
−50
With the Power Swing polygon setting (“entry into the power swing polygon”),
the function will operate when the positive-sequence impedance enters the
power swing polygon, the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedance’s
real component is measured and evaluated.
With the PS-polygon + 3pStart setting (“power swing polygon + 3-phase start”),
the speed of change of the positive-sequence impedance’s real component is
measured under the following conditions only:
The result is that the state “positive-sequence impedance locus in the power
swing polygon” will now just be an enabling condition. In this case it is irrelevant
whether the positive-sequence impedance is now being measured for the first
time within the power swing polygon or it was already there during a previous
measurement.
Crucial for a measurement decision is the onset of the (distance) general start.
In theory, a 3-phase start (without ground) is to be expected, as power swing
occurrences are symmetrical (i.e. the same measurement conditions are to be
found in all 3 phases).The result is that with the onset of a phase-ground start
there will be no power swing occurence (i.e. when with the onset of a start there
is also a phase-ground start or it is already present, then the blocking effect can
no longer be set).
In practice all currents and voltages will be unbalanced (mainly because of
unbalanced lines, but asymmetrical loads and infeeds, as well as measurement
errors by transformers and even by the protection device itself are also to be
considered) so that possibly one of the three phase-phase starting systems will
trigger first. Therefore, with a high R1 reach for zone 1 (i.e. the resistance reach
of DIST zone 1: (012 006) DIST: R1 ,PP ( polygon ) PSx or (012 005)
D IS T: R 1,PG (polygon) PSx), the 2-phase start may have already led to a trip
command during a power swing event, even before a 3-phase start has activated
power swing blocking. Therefore, in order to also have control of this state, the
power swing blocking function carries out the R measurement at the onset of the
2-phase start, but only if currents are adequately balanced. To ensure this, the
negative-sequence current is measured continuously. With the onset of the first
2-phase start, caused by a power swing event, the Ineg value must not be
significant, i.e. in this case:
Ineg < 0.1·Inom + 0.2·IP,max
On the other hand, the device will make a (2-phase) short-circuit decision when
the negative-sequence current value exceeds this value.
This is the preferred approach when looking at a parallel undervoltage start. The
reach of the undervoltage start is basically not definable in the impedance plane
and can therefore not be covered safely by a purely impedance-defined power
swing polygon. Since it is now possible to select the decision moment of power
swing events, the first occurence of the undervoltage condition can be
ascertained in time if the power swing polygon is set to a sufficient size.
Overlapping of the power swing polygon with the area of minimum load
impedance is permitted.
According to the basic ΔZ principle, the decision is taken only once (in this case
with the onset of above mentioned starting conditions). If a power swing event is
detected, power swing blocking is set and stored until the reset condition is met.
The power swing blocking is adapted (extended) when this new acquisition
method is used. The blocking effect is lifted if one of the following conditions is
met:
● The general start is terminated (only with the setting PS-polygon +
3pStart), or (as before)
● the positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing polygon, or
● (at least) one current trigger (IP>, Ineg>, IN>) is triggered, or
● the maximum duration of a power swing period has been reached.
PS condition
[008 234] PSB:
PS condition Abort delay
A reset reset reset set reset
PSB: set set set
Blocking initiated
[036 032]
B
(re)trig. (re)trig. (re)trig. (re)trig.
PSB:
Hold time running
C [011 142] PSB:
[011 142] PSB:
Hold time Hold time
(B or C)
D
trigger trigger
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
E
[010 179] PSB: trigger [010 179] PSB:
Max. blocking time Max. blocking time
PSB:
Blocked
[011 144]
F [011 143] PSB:
Blocking time int.
45Z8009
Fig. 3-162: Signal flow diagram for P S B : B l o c k e d, showing the relationship between the PSB timer stages and
signals.
Power swing blocking is blocked when one the following conditions is present:
● An external blocking signal (008 248) P SB: Blockin g E XT is present.
● The set maximum permissible duration of power swing blocking has been
exceeded.
● A short circuit has been detected by one of the following overcurrent
stages:
o (036 012) PSB: I P> trigge red
o (036 011) P SB: In eg> trigge r ed
o (036 010) PSB: IN> tri gge re d
PSB blocking is reported by using the signal PSB: Block ed. The blocking of the
distance zones and undervoltage stages that have been selected via PSB: Fct.
assign. block . is reset as soon as the signal P SB: Blocked is issued.
The permissible duration of power swing blocking can be limited using (010 179)
PS B: Max. blockin g tim e. When the maximum permissible duration of power
swing blocking is exceeded, then power swing blocking is blocked for the set
time period (011 143) P SB: Blocki ng time int..
PSB: Blocke d has no influence on all other PSB-related functions such as the
determination of Z̲pos, the detection of a power swing condition, or the counting
of power swings and power swing starting when dedicated counts are reached.
The signal flow diagram is based on the assumption that PSB is enabled and not
blocked by an external input signal (i.e. by P SB: Blockin g EXT = Yes).
● A: The first line in the signal flow diagram represents the basic relevant
measuring and logic condition that is used to establish the power swing
blocking condition (i.e. Zpos is within the power swing polygon, the PSB
activation condition was fulfilled, and no unblocking condition is present, or
abort delay P SB: Abor t de lay).
● B: If PSB is not blocked, the signal P SB: Blocking initiated is issued.
This signal is the condition used to block the selected DIST zones and V<
stages.
● C: When the signal P SB: Blocki ng in iti ate d falls back to No, a settable
hold timer is triggered or retriggered. It does not matter, whether the reset
of power swing blocking was caused because Z̲pos has left the power swing
polygon, or because of any unblocking condition (current triggers or
PS B: Max. PS cycl e du r. elapsed).
● D: Signal D is the result of a logical OR operation: B or C.
● E: The raising edge of the signal D (i.e. the beginning of a measured power
swing condition) triggers a timer. If this timer reaches the set PSB: Max.
bl ocki ng ti me a further pulse timer (=signal F) is triggered, which is
running for the set time PSB: Bl ocking ti me int..
● F: While this pulse timer is elapsing (i.e. during the time interval
PSB: Blocking ti me int.) the signal PSB: Blocked is issued.
[036 032]
PSB:
Blocking initiated
PSB: = Yes
Blocking EXT
not active (per 012 017 selected
Normal
DIST zones and V<> stages
[040 095]
PSB: PSB: are blocked.)
Blocked Enabled
ext. = Yes
[008 248]
PSB: Activation condition fulfilled
Blocking EXT (basically:
= Yes [036 024]
PSB: PSB:
Z within polygon = Yes) Blocking initiated
Block. time De-activation condition fulfilled
(basically “[036 024] = No”)
PSB: elapsed Short-circuit condition present (I>, Ineg>, IN> triggered)
Blocking EXT max. PS cycle duration elapsed (Tmax elapsed)
active
PSB: PSB:
Blocking time int. PSB: Abort delay
Hold time running
elapsed
[011 144]
PSB: PSB:
Blocked Hold time running
PSB:
Max.block.time runn.
AS BS
ZA Z AB ZB
DIST
Based on this equivalent circuit, the impedance plot per Fig. 3-165, (p. 3-212)
could be drawn. The origin of the complex plane is put at the location of the
distance protection device, that is at busbar A.
For this simplified description any apparent impedance Z̲ measured from the
distance protection during a steady-state out-of-step condition moves along
circles with its origin in either AS or BS source, depending on the ratio of the
absolute values of the 2 source voltages. The rotation sense further depends on
which source is leading.
This description of power swings is rather simplified but sufficient to describe the
functionality as implemented in the P433.
X
BS
ZB
Z̲
Z AB
A R
ZA
AS
47Z1351B
The basic power swing detection zone of P433 is of quadrilateral shape. While
resistive reach in forward and backward direction is equal, the reactive reaches
can be set independently to provide coverage adjustable to the power system
impedances (essentially to cover differences in reverse source impedance and
forward line plus remote source impedances).
Power swing detection is achieved by measuring the rate of change of the
resistance (real part) of the positive sequence impedance when entering the
power swing polygon (see Section 3.24.2, (p. 3-204)) or upon general starting
(see Section 3.24.3, (p. 3-205)).
Inside the power swing detection zone, 2 more lines are defined by a settable
resistance P SB: R (OO S) to determine an out-of-step condition (see Fig. 3-166,
(p. 3-214)). Thus this decision could be taken before leaving the power swing
detection zone.
The relay checks that settings are valid:
● The resistive lines have to be inside the power swing detection zone:
Rinstab. ≤ Rstab.
Otherwise the internal R(OOS) variable is limited to the R(PSB) value as per
Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-214) (left-hand part).
● The resistive lines must not cross the X-axis.
Otherwise the lines are limited to the X-axis as per Fig. 3-167, (p. 3-214)
(right-hand part).
3.24.7.1 Counters
An out-of-step condition is determined if the apparent positive-sequence
impedance moves along its trajectory from the right side into the power swing
detection zone and then crosses the left side OOS detection line (trajectory ➀ in
Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-214) below), or vice versa (trajectory ➁). In both cases the out-
of-step counter nOOS is incremented by 1.
If the apparent positive-sequence impedance leaves the power swing detection
zone on the same side as it entered, a stable power swing is determined (e.g.
trajectory ➂). In this case the power swing counter nPSB is incremented by 1.
By this definition, the counter values are only available during a power swing or
out-of-step condition, respectively. As it is desirable to have the counter values
available for post-mortem analysis, the values are stored as event counters, too.
The following counters are implemented to count unstable and stable swings as
described above:
● ninstab.: P SB: No. OOS-Sw in g
● nstab.: P SB: N o. stab. P Swin g
X
R stab. = [ 014 060 ]PSB:
R BS
R instab. = [ 006 184 ]PSB:
R (OOS)
n instab. = [ 006 026 ]PSB:
No. OOS-Swing
①
n stab. = [ 006 025 ]PSB:
No. stab. PSwing
n instab.+1
③
n instab.+1
n stab.+1
② −Rinstab. R
+Rinstab.
+Rstab.
AS
47Z1353A
X X
BS BS
−Rinstab. −Rinstab.
R R
+Rinstab. +Rinstab.
AS AS
47Z1354A
Fig. 3-167: Automatic limiting for the position of the resistive lines.
n instab,a
X instab,⊕
① ③
n stab R
X instab,⊖ n instab,b
AS
47Z1355B
DIST: SFMON:
Starting G Zero-sequ. starting
303 507
[ 098 015 ]
MCMON:
Enabled 300ms 0
[ 040 094 ] SFMON:
M.c.b. trip V
[ 098 000 ]
MAIN: MCMON:
M.c.b. trip V EXT Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage SFMON:
[ 038 038 ] Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 098 017 ]
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered MCMON:
[ 041 079 ] M.circ. V,Vref flty.
MCMON: [ 040 078 ]
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ] SFMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 098 023 ]
MCMON: MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 038 100 ] [ 007 213 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT 300ms 0
SFMON:
[ 036 086 ] M.c.b. trip Vref
[ 098 011 ]
MAIN: MCMON:
M.c.b. trip VNG EXT M.circ. VNG faulty
[ 002 183 ] [ 007 214 ]
MCMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
MCMON: [ 037 020 ]
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ] SFMON:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
GFSC: [ 098 016 ]
Monitor. triggered
[ 038 095 ] MCMON:
Peripheral fault
PSIG: [ 038 024 ]
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ] SFMON:
Peripheral fault
GFSIG: [ 098 018 ]
Telecom. faulty
[ 038 017 ]
45Z6340A
If ground starting SG is present for more than 10 s without phase starting, the
following monitoring signal is issued: MCMON: Zero-sequ . st art in g
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the
event of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
MCMON:
General enable USER
[ 014 001 ]
0
MCMON:
1 Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MCMON:
Current monitoring
[ 014 006 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
MAIN: Imin curr. monitor.
Prot. ext. disabled [ 010 183 ]
[ 038 046 ]
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
|I̲neg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ]
MCMON:
Ineg> + 300 ms
[ 014 002 ] SFMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 098 005 ]
MCMON:
|I̲neg|/|I̲max| Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
I̲max
45Z8022A
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
≥0.7·Vnom/√3
MAIN: C
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
V̲A-G
V̲B-G >0.2·Vnom/√3
C
V̲C-G
|V̲neg|
MCMON:
Operate delay
[ 017 011 ] SFMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 098 014 ]
t 0
MCMON:
Vneg> triggered
[ 041 079 ]
t 0
DIST: S11
General starting SFMON:
Undervoltage
[ 036 240 ] R1 [ 098 009 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
BUOC:
Starting
[ 036 013 ]
MCMON:
Op. mode volt. mon. MCMON:
Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 014 007 ] [ 038 049 ]
SFMON:
1 Phase sequ. V faulty
[ 098 001 ]
2
3
1: Vneg
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MCMON:
C Imin Vneg monitoring
[ 010 184 ]
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
<0.4·Vnom
C
>0.65·Vnom
C
0 5s MCMON:
Meas. voltage o.k.
[ 038 048 ]
45Z8041B
Fuse failure monitoring for 3-phase faults in the measuring circuit is only active
within a 50 ms time window after a positive sequence undervoltage condition is
detected.
If the above conditions are satisfied, a memory is set. The settable operate delay
timer should remain at 0 s to ensure that fuse failure monitoring is able to
prevent false pick up of distance protection.
The memory is reset when the positive-sequence voltage exceeds the fixed
threshold of 0.5·Vnom and the negative-sequence voltage falls below an internal
threshold.
If the buffer memory has been set the P433 decides that the secondary circuit of
the voltage transformer is faulty if the following conditions are met:
● At least one of the phase currents exceeds the I> threshold, or:
● The set threshold of the negative-sequence voltage has been exceeded and
three cycles previously at least one phase-to-ground voltage had been
above 50% Vnom/√3.
In this case distance protection is blocked, and the device switches to backup
overcurrent time protection – provided that the appropriate setting has been
selected.
DIST:
IA>(Ibl) trigg. ≥1 ≥1 & MCMON:
303 598
FF, V triggered
DIST: 0 30ms t 0
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
≥1
MAIN:
CB open 3p IA(t) < 0.9⋅IA(t-3⋅T) ≥2
[ 031 040 ]
IB(t) < 0.9⋅IB(t-3⋅T)
&
MCMON:
Blocking FF, V EXT
≥1
[ 002 182 ] IC(t) < 0.9⋅IC(t-3⋅T)
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
& ≥1
Ipos(t) > 0.9⋅Ipos(t-3⋅T)
&
Ineg
1 50 ms
V̲A-G
&
V̲B-G Vneg
V̲C-G
&
VA-G(t-3⋅T)>0.5 Vnom/√3 ≥1
VB-G(t-3⋅T)>0.5 Vnom/√3
VC-G(t-3⋅T)>0.5 Vnom/√3
Vpos
43Z8025C
MCMON:
FF,Vref enabled USER
MCMON:
[ 014 013 ] Oper. delay FF, Vref
[ 014 012 ] SFMON:
FF, Vref triggered
0 [ 098 022 ]
t 0
1 & MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
0: No [ 038 100 ]
1: Yes
MCMON:
Blocking FF,Vref EXT
[ 018 099 ]
V̲ref
|V̲ref|-|V̲Meas|≥
ASC: 0.1 Vnom
Vmeas
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ] 49Z8978A
The P433 includes “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage function,
which is required by the “Automatic Synchronism Check” (ASC).
Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC
function has been configured. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary
contact is available on the voltage transformer m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is
not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in
the three-phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing
because of a short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the
reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference
voltage is present when the following conditions are met:
● The circuit breaker is closed.
● The voltage difference between the line side and the busbar must exceed
0.1⋅Vnom.
When converting an existing setting file from a former software release using the
operating program, then “Blocked” has to be set manually in case the neutral point
setting is “isolated” or “compensated” in order to retain the previous functionality.
Inrush stabilization blocks the ground starting of BUOC protection (if included in
the selection, see Section 3.12.5.1, (p. 3-95)).
The setting for the operating mode controls whether the BUOC protection
function will trigger an auto-reclosure (ARC). If auto-reclosure is desired, timer
stages tI> and tIN> will be blocked when the ARC function is ready. With phase
starting, the trip signal will then be issued instantaneously; with ground starting,
it will be issued after an 80 ms delay. Timer stage tIN> (or fixed 80 ms starting
time in case of ARC) is also blocked by phase starting.
If auto-reclosure is not required or if auto-reclosure with three-pole HSR is
required, then the trip signal is always three-pole.
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
BUOC:
General enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
SFMON:
0 & BUOC not active
[ 098 002 ]
1
BUOC:
0: No Enabled
1: Yes & [ 040 093 ]
≥1
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
BUOC:
Operating mode
[ 014 000 ] SFMON:
&
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
1 ≥1
2 SFMON:
≥1 & BUOC active with ARC
3 [ 098 004 ]
BUOC:
1: Without ARC ≥1 Active
2: With ARC, 3p HSR [ 037 021 ]
3: With ARC, 1/3p. HSR &
◄
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
BUOC: &
MAIN: tI> PSx
Rush restr. A trig. c
[ * ]
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN: ≥1
Rush restr. B trig. t 0 ≥1
[ 041 028 ] ≥1
MAIN:
Rush restr. C trig. & BUOC:
≥1 Trip A
[ 041 029 ]
& BUOC:
BUOC: ≥1 Trip B
& c I> PSx
BUOC:
Blocking I> EXT [ * ] & ≥1 BUOC:
Trip C
[ 018 217 ]
& BUOC:
MAIN: IA> triggered
Protection active
I̲A & BUOC:
IB> triggered
I̲B
& BUOC:
I̲C IC> triggered
≥1 BUOC:
c tIN> PSx
ARC:
Dead time running [ * ]
[ 037 002 ] ≥1 ≥1 BUOC:
Trip signal
BUOC: t 0
& c IN> PSx [ 036 014 ]
& ≥1
[ * ]
BUOC:
Blocking IN> EXT
[ 018 218 ] +
+∑
c
+
80ms 0
& ≥1 BUOC:
BUOC: Starting
Block. Starting
[ 036 013 ]
& BUOC:
BUOC: Zero-sequ. starting
Bl.Zero-sequ.start. [ 010 185 ]
SOTF:
With V< enable PSx
[ * ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Operate delay PSx
[ * ]
SOTF:
Release delay PSx
[ * ] SOTF:
V < 0.7 Vnom/√3 Line dead trig. en.
310 006
t t &
V̲A-G & &
V̲B-G
V̲C-G
MCMON: SOTF:
Meas. circ. V faulty Line dead
[ 038 023 ] [ 006 147 ]
Regarding the SOTF trip signal, one of the following operating modes can be
selected:
● SOTF operating mode = Trip with starting
While the SOTF function is active, the occurrence of a general trip
command of distance protection or backup overcurrent protection
immediately causes the SOTF trip signal to be issued which has to be
configured to the general trip command 1 in that operating mode.
● SOTF operating mode = Trip with overreach
While the SOTF function is active, the measuring range of the impedance
zone 1 is extended (SOTF: Z1 e xte nded). A distance protection starting
with the measured impedance within the extended zone 1 causes a trip
command with the tripping time as defined by the SOTF function
(S OT F: Tripping ti me P Sx). This trip command is an inherent part of the
general trip command 1.
Furthermore, the SOTF function provides a single-stage overcurrent protection
for phase as well as residual currents. This allows for a fully functional current-
based SOTF protection function even if voltage measurement fails. Separate
overcurrent stages and associated timer stages can be defined for phase
currents and residual currents. When the threshold of an overcurrent stage is
exceeded then a corresponding signal is issued, and the timer stage is started;
see Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-229). When timer stages have elapsed, the SOTF trip signal
is issued.
● While the SOTF function is active, the built-in ARC function is automatically
blocked. This is to avoid that a SOTF trip command causes an ARC cycle to
start. An external ARC device can be blocked the same way by using the
SO TF : Act iv e status signal.
● While the ARC function is active, in general it is not necessary to activate
the SOTF function because the line was already energized prior to the
beginning of the ARC cycle. Therefore, the built-in ARC function
automatically blocks the triggering of the SOTF function. To generate the
same functionality with an external ARC device, the auto-reclosing
command of the external ARC device has to be configured to the
SO TF : Par. AR C ru nning EXT binary input signal. The condition-based
activation of the SOTF function has then to be ensured by means of
correspondingly long operate delays.
In some applications, a “zone extension during reclosure” is required. With
the built-in ARC function this can be configured in a straightforward manner
(AR C: Z one e xt.du r. RC P Sx). With an external ARC device, the SOTF
activation mode Trigger can be used, or, as an alternative, the SOTF
operate delay has to be set shorter than the ARC dead time.
SOTF:
Active
[ 006 146 ]
SOTF: SOTF:
Evaluation IN PSx tIN> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1 t 0
SOTF:
2 tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
1: Calculated
2: Measured SOTF:
IN> (meas.) PSx
C
[ * ]
SOTF:
& Starting IN>
[ 001 187 ]
IN(meas.)
SOTF: SOTF:
tI> PSx
C IN> (calc.) PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0
IN(calc.) SOTF:
tI> elapsed
[ 006 129 ]
SOTF:
I> PSx
SOTF:
[ * ] & Starting I>
[ 006 128 ]
I̲A
I̲B
I̲C
47Z1306A
1
* Parameter
**
SOTF: PSU:
0: No Tripping time PSx y PS y active
1: Yes set 1 010 218 1 036 090
set 2 010 219 2 036 091
set 3 010 221 3 036 092
SOTF:
Enable PSx set 4 010 222 4 036 093
[ * ]
0 SOTF:
& Enabled
1 [ 040 069 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PSU:
PS y active
[ ** ]
SOTF: SOTF:
tI> elapsed Trip signal
[ 006 129 ] [ 036 064 ]
SOTF:
tIN> elapsed
[ 001 188 ]
MAIN:
General starting &
[ 036 000 ]
&
SOTF:
Par. ARC running EXT SOTF:
[ 039 063 ] Man. close timer PSx SOTF:
C [ * ]
& Z1 extended
MAIN: [ 035 076 ]
Protection active
306 001
SOTF:
Line dead trig. en. 1 SOTF:
310 006
& Active
[ 006 146 ]
MAIN: SOTF:
Manual close EXT & tManual-close runn.
[ 036 047 ] [ 036 063 ]
SOTF:
Trigger EXT
[ 002 127 ]
SOTF:
ARC: ARC blocked
Close command 305 650
303 021
SOTF: SOTF:
Activation mode PSx Operating mode PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1 4
2 & 5
t 0
SOTF:
DIST: & Trip time elapsed
General starting 460 528
[ 036 240 ]
45Z8040A
Bug notice:
SOTF in operating mode Trip with starting still does operate upon DIST and BUOC
starting only, irrespective of setting to include DTOC/IDMT starting in general
starting. In order to accomplish OC trip the SOTF OC stages have to be used.
PSIG:
General enable USER
[ 015 004 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
PSIG:
0 Enabled
[ 015 008 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
PSIG:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 023 ]
PSIG:
Enable EXT
[ 037 025 ]
PSIG:
Enable USER
[ 003 132 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG:
Disable EXT
[ 037 026 ]
PSIG:
Disable USER
[ 003 131 ]
0: don't execute
PSIG:
Ready
1: execute
[ 037 027 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Telecom. faulty Not ready
[ 036 060 ] [ 037 028 ]
Parameter PSIG:
Enable PSx
45Z5032C
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: PUTT
8: Direction comparison
MAIN:
Meas.r.extd. ext./RC
306 002
PSIG: PSIG:
Tripping time PSx Timer stage elapsed
[ * ] 305 164
PSIG:
Trip time elapsed
PSIG: t 0 305 150
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
* PSIG: PSIG:
Parameter
Tripping time PSx Operating mode PSx
set 1 015 011 015 000
set 2 024 003 024 000
set 3 024 063 024 060
set 4 025 023 025 020
49Z6442A
PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
& PSIG:
PSIG: Receive
Receive (A) EXT [ 006 036 ]
[ 036 048 ]
&
&
PSIG:
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ]
Parameter PSIG:
3ended line prot PSx
set 1 006 039
set 2 006 046
set 3 006 047
set 4 006 048
47Z1204 B
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
6: DC loop operat. mode & ≥1 PSIG:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
SFMON:
[ * ] Telecom. faulty/PSIG
[ 098 006 ]
DIST:
General starting ≥1
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty int.
305 151
PSIG: ≥1 &
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
& &
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT PSIG:
[ 008 094 ] Blk.f.telcom.flt PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Frequency monit. PSx Parameter Frequency monit. PSx
[ * ] set 1 015 025
set 2 024 011
set 3 024 071
0
set 4 025 031
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
PSIG: 20ms 0 305 152
Receive 1
[ 006 036 ] 150ms
PSIG:
Freq. mon. trig. EXT
[ 038 080 ]
45Z6348B
PSIG:
tBlock PSx PSIG:
tBlock PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS 1 PSIG:
S1 1 Transient blocking
[ 036 019 ] t
305 154
DIST: R1
General starting
* PSIG:
[ 036 240 ] Parameter
tBlock PSx
PSIG:
DC loop op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Transm.relay break c
2: Transm.relay make co
PSIG:
& ≥1 Send (transm.relay)
PSIG:
Send (signal) [ 037 024 ]
[ 036 035 ] &
PSIG:
Parameter DC loop op. mode PSx
Depending on the contact of the output relays that is used the logical signal is
inverted for transmission. Although this feature is required only in case of the
wire-based DC loop, it is always enabled, independent of the PSIG operating
mode and even if the integrated InterMiCOM interface is used. As a consequence,
the setting PSI G: DC loop op. mode PSx must be set to its default value,
“Transm.relay break c”, whenever a DC loop is not used.
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
0 0: Without
1 1: Dir.trans.trip.under
2 2: PUTT
3 3: Zone extension
4 4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
5
7: Reverse interlocking
7
8 8: Direction comparison
0: Without
1: Dir.trans.trip.under
2: PUTT
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme Parameter PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
5: Blocking scheme
set 1 015 000
6: DC loop operat. mode
set 2 024 000
7: Reverse interlocking
set 3 024 070
8: Direction comparison
set 4 025 020
D5Z5061A
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ] & ≥1 SFMON:
& Op.mode PSIG inval.
1: Signal comp. release
[ 098 019 ]
&
2: Signal comp. block.
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2: Common channel
Parameter PSIG:
Operating mode PSx
set 1 015 000
set 2 024 000
set 3 024 060
set 4 025 020
47Z8037A
The P433 features protective signaling and ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling. If the P433 is operating with protective signaling and ground fault
protective signaling, then the user has the option to specify whether ground fault
protective signaling will share the channel used by protective signaling (distance
schemes) for signal transmission. If this is the case, the operating modes for
protective signaling and ground fault protection signaling must be set identically.
Otherwise a signal will be issued.
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx ↗ PSIG:
[ * ] Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: 0 t PSIG:
Ready & & Send (signal)
[ 037 027 ] [ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
PSIG: Send
Operating mode PSx [ 012 243 ]
[ * ]
↗1: Dir.trans.trip.under
DIST: ≥1
Trip zone 1
DIST: PSIG:
Trip zone 1,ze & Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
PSIG: ≥1
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
& PSIG:
PSIG: Trip 1
Frequ. monit. trigg.
PSIG: PSIG:
Transient blocking Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Parameter Operating mode PSx Release t. send PSx
Fig. 3-187: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the “Dir.trans.trip.under” operating mode.
When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the
remote station’s protection device.
Upon receipt of the signal from the remote station, the circuit breaker is tripped.
If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will be ignored.
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx ↗ PSIG:
[ * ] Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: 0 t PSIG:
Ready & & Send (signal)
[ 037 027 ] [ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
PSIG: Send
Operating mode PSx [ 012 243 ]
[ * ]
↗2: PUTT
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1
[ 035 072 ]
PSIG:
& Receive (signal)
PSIG: ≥1 [ 037 029 ]
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
& PSIG:
Trip 2
PSIG: PSIG:
Transient blocking Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Parameter Operating mode PSx Release t. send PSx
Fig. 3-188: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the “PUTT” operating mode.
When a distance protection trip zone 1 has occurred, a signal is sent to the
remote station’s protection device. On receipt of the signal by the remote
station, the remote station’s circuit breaker is subject to permissive
underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT) once the protective signaling tripping
time has elapsed. If transient blocking is operating, then the receive signal will
be ignored.
Nfw
A B
Nfw
49Z8953A
Fig. 3-189: Reaches with zone extension. Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor kze HSR.
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: 0 t PSIG:
Ready Send (signal)
[ 037 027 ]
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Operating mode PSx Send
[ 012 243 ]
[ * ]
3: Zone extension
DIST:
Trip signal zone 1 PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 072 ]
[ 035 075 ]
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
40ms 0
S1 1
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
R1
305 152
PSIG:
Transient blocking
305 154
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
DIST:
Op. mode zone 4 PSx
[ * ]
2: 1p:Z1/t1(3p)3p:Z1/t4
6: 1p:Z1/t1, 3p:Z1/t4
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
MAIN: [ 037 029 ]
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
1: Direct.-dependent PSIG:
Trip enable
2: Dist.-dependent 305 157
PSIG:
Trip signal
DIST: [ 038 007 ]
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] PSIG:
Trip 1
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed 305 155
305 164
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
Fig. 3-190: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the “Zone
extension” operating mode.
Nfw
A B
Nfw
49Z8953A
Fig. 3-191: Zone reaches with the release (permissive) scheme. Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone
extension factor kze HSR.
The setting at PS IG: Ope r . mode s en d P Sx defines when the P433 sends a
signal to the remote station.
● “Direct.-dependent”
If the distance protection function detects a fault in the forward direction,
the P433 sends a signal to the remote station.
● “Dist.-dependent”
If the distance protection function detects a fault within extended zone 1,
the P433 sends a signal to the remote station.
The PSIG trip upon receiving a signal from the remote station is determined by
the setting at PSI G: Oper . mode trip P Sx.
● “Direct.-dependent”
Tripping occurs if there is a receive signal after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed and if distance protection has decided in favor of
“forward direction”.
● “Dist.-dependent”
Tripping occurs if there is a receive signal after the protective signaling
tripping time has elapsed and if distance protection has decided in favor of
a “trip in extended zone 1”.
The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
PSIG:
Ready &
PSIG:
[ 037 027 ] Release t. send PSx
PSIG: [ * ]
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx [ * ]
[ * ] 0 t PSIG:
& ≥1 Send (signal)
↗4: Release scheme 1
[ 036 035 ]
2 PSIG:
& & Send
1: Direct.-dependent [ 012 243 ]
2: Dist.-dependent
DIST:
Fault forward / LS PSIG:
[ 036 018 ] Z1 extended
DIST: [ 035 075 ]
Dist.decision Z1,ze
PSIG: PSIG:
≥1 & & Receive (signal)
Receive
[ 006 036 ] [ 037 029 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
PSIG:
Transient blocking
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
& PSIG:
Trip enable
2 & ≥1 PSIG:
Trip signal
1 [ 038 007 ]
2: Dist.-dependent
1: Direct.-dependent
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] & PSIG:
Trip 1
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
Fig. 3-192: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the “Release
scheme” (permissive) operating mode.
Nbw Nfw
A B
Nfw Nbw
49Z8955A
Fig. 3-193: Zone reaches with the blocking scheme. Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension
factor kze HSR.
The setting at PSIG: Oper. mode s e nd PSx defines when the P433 sends a
signal to the remote station.
● “Direct.-dependent”
If distance protection detects a fault in the backward (reverse) direction a
signal is sent to the remote station.
● “Dist.-dependent”
If the distance protection function detects a fault within zone 6 and if the
measured direction matches the direction set for zone 6, then the P433
sends a signal to the remote station.
A signal is always sent to the remote station during transient blocking.
PSIG:
Ready &
PSIG:
[ 037 027 ] Release t. send PSx
PSIG: [ * ]
Oper. mode send PSx
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx [ * ]
[ * ] 0 t PSIG:
& ≥1 Send (signal)
↗5: Blocking scheme 1
[ 036 035 ]
2 & PSIG:
Send
1: Direct.-dependent [ 012 243 ]
2: Dist.-dependent
DIST: ≥1
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
PSIG:
Transient blocking
PSIG:
≥1 & Z1 extended
DIST: [ 035 075 ]
Impedance in zone 6
[ 037 200 ] ≥1
PSIG:
Receive ≥1
PSIG:
[ 006 036 ] & Receive (signal)
PSIG: [ 037 029 ]
Frequ. monit. trigg.
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
& PSIG:
Trip 1
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Oper. mode trip PSx
[ * ]
& PSIG:
2 Trip enable
1: Direct.-dependent
PSIG:
2: Dist.-dependent ≥1 Trip signal
DIST: &
[ 038 007 ]
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
Fig. 3-194: PSIG send, zone extension, trip and trip enable signals issued by protective signaling in the “Blocking
scheme” operating mode.
L- L+
Prot.rel. w. make c.
Prot.rel. w. make c.
Prot.rel. w.break c.
Prot.rel. w.break c.
L+ L-
PSIG:
Send (transm.relay) PSIG:
[ 037 024 ] Send (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
L+ L+
PSIG: PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ] L- L- [ 036 048 ]
45Z6353A
PSIG:
Ready &
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
PSIG: Release t. send PSx
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
↗6: DC loop operat. mode
0 t PSIG:
& ≥1 & Send (signal)
DIST: ≥1 [ 036 035 ]
IA>> triggered
& PSIG:
DIST: Send
IB>> triggered
[ 012 243 ]
DIST: >S
IC>> triggered 11 &
1
>R
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
DIST:
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
PSIG:
Z1 extended
[ 035 075 ]
& PSIG:
Trip enable
PSIG: ≥1
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg. PSIG:
& Trip signal
DIST: [ 038 007 ]
Trip zone 1,ze
PSIG:
& Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Parameter Operating mode PSx Release t. send PSx
Fig. 3-196: PSIG send, zone extension and trip enable signals by protective signaling in the “DC loop operat. mode”
operating mode.
The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. If, during a fault-free operation,
i.e. with no distance protection general starting condition present, no signal is
received from the DC loop for a period longer than the set transmitted signal
reset time plus 600 ms, then the PSIG: Tel e com. faulty signal is issued
(see Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-234)) and protective signaling is blocked.
L+
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
L- [ 036 048 ]
L-
P433
L+
45Z6355A
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ]
PSIG:
Revers.interlock.bl.
460 529
PSIG:
Ready
[ 037 027 ]
PSIG:
Operating mode PSx PSIG:
[ * ] Trip signal
7: Reverse interlocking [ 038 007 ]
PSIG:
PSIG: Trip enable
tBlock PSx 305 157
[ * ]
PSIG:
t1 revers.interlock
PSIG: 0 t [ 036 020 ]
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Z1 extended
PSIG: [ 035 075 ]
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Telecom. faulty int.
10s 0 305 151
S1 1
R1
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
PSIG:
Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
1 PSIG:
Transient blocking
[ 037 255 ]
Fig. 3-198: Trip enable and trip signal in the “Reverse interlocking” operating mode.
PSIG:
Release t. send PSx ↗ PSIG:
[ * ] Release t. send PSx
[ * ]
PSIG: 0 t PSIG:
Ready &
Send (signal)
[ 037 027 ] [ 036 035 ]
PSIG:
PSIG: Send
Operating mode PSx
[ 012 243 ]
[ * ]
↗8: Direction comparison PSIG:
& Trip 2
DIST: PSIG:
Fault forward / LS Trip signal
[ 036 018 ] [ 038 007 ]
PSIG: ≥1
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
PSIG:
Timer stage elapsed
PSIG:
Transient blocking
PSIG:
& Receive (signal)
[ 037 029 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
PSIG: PSIG:
Parameter Operating mode PSx Release t. send PSx
Fig. 3-199: PSIG send signal and trip signal by protective signaling in the “Direction comparison” operating mode.
A signal is sent to the remote station if distance protection detects a fault in the
forward direction.
Once the tripping time has elapsed, protective signaling issues a trip decision if a
receive signal is present and distance protection detects a fault in the forward
direction. In the event of a direction change, the receive signal is ignored for the
PS IG: tBlock PSx set time (“transient blocking”) so as to avoid unwanted
tripping in the protection of double circuit lines.
PSIG:
Weak inf. ready
310 014 PSIG:
Trip signal V< PSx
PSIG:
PSIG: tV< PSx [ * ]
GSCSG: V< weak infeed PSx
Bl. PSIG weak infeed [ * ]
304 003 [ * ]
0
V̲A-G 1
V̲B-G 0: No
1: Yes
V̲C-G
PSIG:
V< triggered
305 162
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ] PSIG:
Trip V<, A
305 159
U x1 PSIG:
Trip V<, B
305 160
U x2
PSIG:
U x3 Trip V<, C
305 161
U xx
PSIG:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT PSIG:
[ 043 062 ] Receive weak inf.
310 047
PSIG:
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Trip V<
305 158
43Z6358B
V < 0.35Vnom/√3
5s 0
VA-G &
VB-G
VC-G
DIST:
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
MAIN:
General starting >S
11
[ 036 000 ] 1
& >R
0 50ms
PSIG: Blocking condition:
Receive weak inf.
Starting, extended
until the received
signal ends.
PSIG:
Block. weak inf. EXT
[ 036 255 ]
43Z8059B
PSIG:
Echo on receive PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
1: On receive
2: On receive & V< PSIG: PSIG:
Op. delay echo PSx Pulse dur. echo PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
PSIG:
V< triggered
305 162 t 0 PSIG:
& ≥1 1 Send (signal)
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT ≥1 & [ 036 035 ]
[ 036 048 ] &
0 t+1s PSIG:
PSIG: Send
Receive (B) EXT
[ 006 037 ] [ 012 243 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
DIST: ≥1
General starting
[ 036 240 ]
If operation with the echo function is desired along with permissive overreaching
schemes, then the user may specify whether the receive signal alone is to be
employed in activating the echo pulse or whether the receive signal and the
triggering signal of the weak-infeed logic are to be used. The conditions for
activation of the echo pulse must persist for a period in excess of the set time-
delay, and distance protection starting must be absent for the echo pulse to be
activated. The echo pulse is then transmitted to the remote station for the set
pulse duration. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for
the set pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being
transmitted.
The echo function may be disabled.
↗ PSIG:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ] PSIG:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
0 t PSIG:
Send (signal)
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG: 1 PSIG:
Test telecom. EXT ≥1 Test telecom. chann.
500ms
[ 036 038 ] [ 034 016 ]
PSIG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 015 009 ]
0 PSIG:
Parameter Release t. send PSx
1
set 1 015 002
0: don't execute set 2 024 001
1: execute set 3 024 061
set 4 025 021
49Z8964A
The communications link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is
issued through a binary signal input or by a setting parameter. It is extended by
the reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if
the transmission link is in order.
The integral ARC function in the P433 offers the possibility of multiple reclosures.
When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first
begin with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure
by an HSR, then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-
delayed reclosure (TDR). Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if
the ARC operating mode is set accordingly.
ARC: ARC:
Operating mode PSx Operating mode PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
D5Z5095A
ARC:
General enable USER
[ 015 060 ]
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0 ARC:
Enabled
1 [ 015 064 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
ARC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 013 ]
ARC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 010 ]
ARC:
Enable USER
[ 003 134 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 011 ]
ARC:
Disable USER
[ 003 133 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter ARC:
Enable PSx
set 1 015 046
set 2 015 047
set 3 015 048
set 4 015 049
45Z5039A
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
[ * ]
0: Without ARC:
CB closed
1: With 303 004
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ] ARC:
Ready
MAIN: [ 004 068 ]
Protection active
306 001
ARC:
CB drive ready EXT
[ 004 066 ]
ARC: ARC:
Blocked Not ready
[ 004 069 ] [ 037 008 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
Parameter ARC:
ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
Cycle running set 1 015 050
[ 037 000 ] set 2 024 024
set 3 024 084
set 4 025 044
D5Z5066A
ARC: ARC:
Enabled Blocked
[ 015 064 ] [ 004 069 ]
DIST:
ARC blocked
303 589
SOTF: ARC:
ARC blocked Block. time int. PSx
305 650
[ * ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ]
ARC:
Block. time running
SFMON: [ 037 004 ]
BUOC active w/o ARC
[ 098 003 ]
CBF:
Trip signal
[ 040 026 ]
GFSC:
Trip signal
[ 039 092 ]
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
304 008
GFSIG:
Trip signal
[ 037 087 ]
ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
GFTRP: [ * ]
Trip signal
[ 037 091 ]
ARC:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 050 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC:
Block. time int. PSx Block. time ext. PSx
set 1 015 043 015 058
set 2 024 021 024 032
set 3 024 081 024 092
set 4 025 041 025 052
45Z5040A
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
PSIG:
Not ready
[ 037 028 ]
SFMON:
BUOC active with ARC
[ 098 004 ]
ARC:
Trip time HSR PSx ARC:
ARC: Trip time HSR PSx
[ * ]
TDR [ * ]
303 006
MAIN: ARC:
General starting Trip time elapsed
303 003
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
Trip time TDR PSx
[ * ]
Trip dur. op. time 1 Trip dur. op. time 2 Close reject
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
3-pole trip
306 013
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 007 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
ARC:
ARC: Reject test HSR
Ready [ 036 055 ]
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
2: TDR only permitted
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C
ARC: [ 034 023 ]
Test HSR A-B-C USER
[ 011 066 ]
1 ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C int.
303 022
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Test HSR A-B-C EXT
[ 037 017 ]
Parameter ARC:
Operating mode PSx
set 1 015 100
set 2 015 101
set 3 015 102
set 4 015 103
43Z5293A
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
3-pole trip
306 013
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
D5Z5096A
If the setting at MAI N: Ne utr.pt. tre at. PSx is Low-imped. grounding, then
both phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
either Isol./res.w.start.PG, Isol./res.w/o st. PG or Short-durat. ground., then only
the phase‑to‑phase voltages are checked.
ARC:
Enable RRC PSx
[ * ]
0: No ARC:
V> RRC PSx
1: Yes C
[ * ]
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
V̲A-G⋅√3 303 014
V̲A-G
V̲B-G V̲B-G⋅√3
V̲C-G
V̲C-G⋅√3
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Low-imped. grounding
If the starting conditions for rapid reclosing drop out during operative time 1, the
RRC timer stage tRRC is started. After the timer stage has elapsed, the P433
checks to determine whether the voltages measured by distance protection were
greater than or equal to the set threshold value (ARC: V> RRC PSx) during the
last 100 ms. If this was the case, then a close request is sent to the automatic
synchronism check function (ASC). The ASC response is a function of whether a
single- or three-pole trip command has been issued.
In the case of a single-pole trip, a close command is immediately issued.
If a three-pole trip has been activated, the ASC checks to determine whether
reclosing can occur. If the ASC decision is positive, a close enable and then a
close command are issued. If reclosing is not permitted, there is a final trip.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated or if its decisions are to be ignored, then the
close request is immediately acknowledged and a close command is issued, even
in the case of a three-pole trip.
If it is determined after timer stage tRRC has elapsed that the voltages were not
greater or equal to the set threshold (A RC: V> RRC PSx), then the ARC cycle is
continued by the HSR or TDR.
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running
[ 037 065 ]
MAIN:
1-pole trip
306 006
MAIN:
3-pole trip
306 013
ARC:
tRRC running
303 015
ARC:
V> for RRC triggered
303 014
ARC:
(Re)close request
[ 037 077 ]
ASC:
Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
3p final trip
[ 036 043 ]
ARC:
Reclaim time running
[ 036 042 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
D5Z5098A
effect exercised by the trip of the parallel protection device depends on the
setting at A RC : Parall el trip P Sx (see Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-271) for setting).
● AR C: Paral le l t r ip P Sx = Without function
The trip of the external protection device does not intervene in the
functional sequence.
● AR C: P arallel tri p PSx = Parall. bloc.w/o ini
The trip of the external parallel protection device does not intervene in the
TDR, HSR or RRC functional sequence.
● A RC : Parallel trip P Sx = Parall. bloc.w. init
The trip of the external protection device starts a TDR, HSR or RRC. The
sequence is the same as with initiation by the P433.
BUOC:
Trip signal
[ 036 014 ]
DIST:
Trip signal ARC:
[ 036 009 ] Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
[ * ]
ARC: 1 ARC:
Reclaim time running Zone extension HSR
[ 036 042 ] 0: No 303 001
ARC: 1: Yes
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR 0
[ 037 007 ] ARC:
1 Zone extension RC
MAIN: 2
303 002
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 0: Without
1: Following HSR
2: Always
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
ARC:
1 Zone extension TDR
303 000
0: No
ARC:
TDR permitted 1: Yes
303 019
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
ARC:
Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes ARC:
Switch to tPmax
303 024
PSIG: 50 ms 0
Receive
[ 006 036 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ]
ARC:
Dead time 3p running
[ 037 067 ]
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ]
ARC:
* Parameter Mon. PSIG recv. PSx
ARC: ARC:
HSR A-B-C + No. of HSR A-B-C
303 005 [ 004 004 ]
R
ARC: + ARC:
TDR Number TDR
303 006 [ 004 008 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
49Z64ACA
LOGIC:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
IDMT: ARC:
Trip signal tIref,P> Fct.assgn. tLOGIC
[ 040 084 ] ≥1 [ 015 033 ]
IDMT:
Trip signal tIref,N>
[ 040 085 ]
LOGIC: 1 out of n
Output 01
t 0
ARC:
Start by LOGIC
LOGIC: [ 037 078 ]
Output 01 (t)
MAIN:
Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
[ 021 001 ]
m out of n
49Z8849A
Fig. 3-218: Example: Start of the ARC operative time using output 01 of the programmable logic.
By using the assignment (015 033) A RC: Fct.as s gn. tLOGIC, additional user-
specific conditions for starting an ARC cycle can easily be defined within the
programmable logic.
All internal signals (for example an IDMT trip signal or a ground fault direction
determination decision) and all external conditions fed in by means of binary
input signals are available for that purpose (unless for the latter the equivalent
signal (037 096) AR C: Ge ne ral s tar ting EXT is to be used). With the logical
operators and time stages of the programmable logic, even complex
dependencies can be realized.
Under the precondition that the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) is ready,
the ARC operative time is started as soon as the assigned logical output enters
the active state.
Note that this signal assignment does not automatically lead to a trip. A trip has
to be defined separately in the programmable logic. In the simplest case, this can
be achieved by linking the logical signal (with or without an appropriate delay) to
the general trip command 1. Solely the successful execution of this trip
command (more precisely, the raise and termination of the general trip signal 1
prior to the operative time 1 or 2 have elapsed) lead to the start of the dead
time.
The example in Fig. 3-218, (p. 3-272) illustrates a possible configuration.
In general, any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to
start the ARC tripping time.
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) USER PSx
[ 016 222 ]
≥1 ASC:
↗ 1: Yes Meas.V(T90) active
[ 016 240 ]
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) EXT
[ 016 221 ]
V̲(T90) 1
0⋯1 ASC:
ASC: Vmeas
Measurement loop PSx
[ * ]
V̲A-G Φ
V̲B-G
V̲C-G
+
∑
−
+
∑
−
+
∑
−
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
ASC:
Parameter Measurement loop PSx 1: Loop A-G
2: Loop B-G
set 1 031 060
3: Loop C-G
set 2 077 044
4: Loop A-B
set 3 078 044 5: Loop B-C
set 4 079 044 6: Loop C-A 19Z8925A
ASC:
General enable USER
[ 018 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0 ASC:
Enabled
1 [ 018 024 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
ASC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 092 ]
ASC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 049 ]
ASC:
Enable USER
[ 003 136 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 061 ]
ASC:
Disable USER
[ 003 135 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter ASC:
Enable PSx
set 1 018 020
set 2 018 021
set 3 018 022
set 4 018 023
19Z5232A
signal input, then the ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the ASC: Disable EXT function has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no
effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued.
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
ASC: ASC:
Blocking EXT Blocked
[ 037 048 ] [ 038 018 ]
ASC: ASC:
Enabled Ready
[ 018 024 ] [ 037 079 ]
ASC:
MAIN: Not ready
Protection active [ 037 082 ]
306 001
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable w.block
305 001
0 ASC:
Close reject.w.block
1 305 002
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
0 Active
305 003
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
HSR
303 156
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR
303 006
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000
19Z51BCA
ARC:
(Re)close request ASC:
[ 037 077 ] Gen. close request
306 012
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DEV01: ASC:
Close request Manual close request
307 001
305 000
ASC:
AC effect. for DEV01
305 040
ASC:
AR close requ. USER
[ 008 238 ]
1 500ms 1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
AR close request
[ 008 239 ]
ASC: 50ms 0
AR close request EXT 1
[ 008 236 ] 500ms
ASC: 50ms 0
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
ASC:
Test AR close r.USER
[ 008 237 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1 100ms 1 1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC: ASC:
Test AR close r. EXT Test AR close requ.
[ 000 106 ] [ 008 240 ]
19Z8073A
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, via setting parameters, from an
appropriately configured binary signal input (A SC: Enabl.close requ.EXT), or
via a close request from the control function. Close requests via a setting
parameter, the binary signal input or the control function are accepted only if no
ARC cycle is running.
ARC:
(Re)close request ASC:
[ 037 077 ] Gen. close request
306 012
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DEV01: ASC:
Close request Manual close request
307 001
305 000
ASC:
AC effect. for DEV01
305 040
ASC:
MC close requ. USER
[ 018 004 ]
1 500ms 1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
MC Close request
[ 034 018 ]
ASC: 50ms 0
MC Close request EXT 1
[ 037 062 ] 500ms
ASC: 50ms 0
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
ASC:
Test MC close r USER
[ 018 005 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1 100ms 1 1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC: ASC:
Test MC close r. EXT Test MC close requ.
[ 037 064 ] [ 034 019 ]
19Z8072A
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A SC : C lose r e j ecti on signal is generated for 100 ms.
ASC: ASC:
Cycle running Cycle running
[ 038 019 ] [ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Gen. close request Gen. close request
ASC: ASC:
Operat.time running Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ] [ 037 093 ]
① ①
ASC: ASC:
Close enable Close rejection
[ 037 083 ] [ 037 086 ]
100ms
100ms
MAIN: MAIN:
Close command Close command
[ 037 009 ] [ 037 009 ]
②
① ②
ASC: MAIN:
Parameter Operative time PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 018 010
set 2 077 034
set 3 078 034
set 4 079 034 D5Z5073C
Fig. 3-224: Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection.
ASC:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Φ ASC:
Gen. close request Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Test Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC: ASC:
Close reject.w.block Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Parameter Operative time PSx
Close enable conditions for Auto- Close enable conditions for Manual
reclose control close command
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request
is issued by the integrated ARC (for an RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request
from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function A SC: AR
close reque st E XT.
yes yes
no no
47Z1085A_EN
Fig. 3-226: Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check.
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting ASC: AR with tCB PSx to Yes
makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker closing time when issuing a
close command.
The condition for “slightly asynchronous power systems” is given if the difference
in frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < Δf < Δfmax. If this condition and
the voltage condition (ΔV < ΔVmax) are met then the next point in time is
continuously calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding
voltage of the three-phase system are in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase
angles approaches 0°). The close command, allowing for the set CB close time
M AIN: tC B,close is then issued sooner.
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) active
[ 016 240 ]
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
c AR V> volt.check PSx
↗ 1: Voltage-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt.&sync.-checked
V̲A-G 1V̲A-G·√3 &
V̲B-G 1V̲B-G·√3
V̲C-G 1V̲C-G·√3 0
V̲(T90) V̲(T90)⋅√3 1
0⋯1
0
ASC:
c AR V< volt.check PSx
1
[ * ]
0⋯1
&
◄
◄
ASC:
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
1
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx ◄
2 [ * ]
& ≥1
V̲ref V̲ref·√3 1 1
2 &
2
&
1⋯2 3
& ≥1 &
4
&
6 &
◄
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
t 0 1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
1 ASC:
≥1 ≥1
ARC: 100ms Close enable
HSR
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
set 1 018 025 026 017 018 017 018 029 018 018
set 2 018 026 077 043 077 040 018 030 077 041
set 3 018 027 078 043 078 040 018 031 078 041
set 4 018 028 079 043 079 040 018 032 079 041
19Z8980A
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three
phase-to-ground voltages (or – alternatively, see above – the voltage measured
at T90) need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition
for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating
mode for the voltage synchronism check are met, then the close enable is issued
after the set minimum time has elapsed.
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately
for each parameter subset:
● Vref but not V
● V but not Vref
● Not V and not Vref
● Not V or not Vref
● N V&Vref or V&n Vref
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) active
[ 016 240 ]
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
c MC V> volt.check PSx
↗ 1: Voltage-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt./sync.-checked
V̲A-G 1V̲A-G·√3 &
V̲B-G 1V̲B-G·√3
V̲C-G 1V̲C-G·√3 0
V̲(T90) V̲(T90)⋅√3 1
0⋯1
0
ASC:
c MC V< volt.check PSx
1
[ * ]
0⋯1
&
◄
◄
ASC:
ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG
1
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx ◄
2 [ * ]
& ≥1
V̲ref V̲ref·√3 1 1
2 &
2
&
1⋯2 3
& ≥1 &
4
&
6 &
◄
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
t 0 1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
1 ASC:
≥1 ≥1
ARC: 100ms Close enable
HSR
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
set 1 000 056 000 064 000 068 000 060 000 072
set 2 000 057 000 065 000 069 000 061 000 073
set 3 000 058 000 066 000 070 000 062 000 074
set 4 000 059 000 067 000 071 000 063 000 075
19Z8981A
Fig. 3-228: Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control for manual close control.
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) active
[ 016 240 ]
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
↗ 1: Low-imped. grounding
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
c AR V> sync.check PSx
↗ 2: Sync.-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt.&sync.-checked
V̲A-G V̲A-G⋅√3 & & & ≥1
◄
◄
ASC: 1 ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG AR tmin sync.chk PSx
2 [ * ]
t1 t2
ASC: >
Test
ASC:
>R Volt. magn. diff.
ASC:
c AR delta Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ] ASC:
>R Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ΔVmax ASC:
ASC: >R Angle difference
Volt. sel. meas.loop [ 004 089 ]
[ 004 088 ]
MAIN:
Parameter Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
ASC:
◄
◄ c AR delta f max PSx set 1 010 048
[ * ] set 2 001 076
c set 3 001 077
Δfmax set 4 001 078
ASC:
Parameter AR op. mode PSx
φ
set 1 018 025
◄
◄ set 2 018 026
set 3 018 027
ASC: ASC: set 4 018 028
Phi offset PSx AR delta phi max PSx
[ * ] [ * ] ASC:
Parameter AR V> sync.check PSx
set 1 018 015 018 012 018 014 018 034 018 013
set 2 077 039 077 036 077 038 077 042 077 037
set 3 078 039 078 036 078 038 078 042 078 037
set 4 079 039 079 036 079 038 079 042 079 037
19Z8982A
Before a close enable signal is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for
synchronism. Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
● The three phase voltages and the reference voltage must exceed the set
threshold value.
When with a three-phase voltage the setting of MAI N: Neu tr. pt. t reat.
PS x is Low-imped. grounding both the phase-to-ground and the phase-to-
phase voltages are checked.
If the setting is Isol./res.w.start.PG only the phase-to-phase voltages are
checked.
If the ASC is set to use the T90 voltage instead of the phase voltages (see
Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-274), Section 3.30.6.1, (p. 3-283)), then the voltage
measured at T90 and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value.
If these conditions are met for at least the set time A SC : A R tmin s ync.chk
PS x or AS C: MC t min sync.ch k P Sx, respectively, then a close enable signal
is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in voltage,
angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are
stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In
the event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the
new data.
ASC:
Meas.V(T90) active
[ 016 240 ]
MAIN:
Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
[ * ]
↗ 1: Low-imped. grounding
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
cMC V> sync.check PSx
↗ 2: Sync.-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt./sync.-checked
V̲A-G V̲A-G⋅√3 & & & ≥1
◄
◄
ASC: 1 ASC:
Select. meas.loop PG MC tmin sync.chk PSx
2 [ * ]
t1 t2
ASC: >
Test
ASC:
>R Volt. magn. diff.
ASC:
c MC delta Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ] ASC:
>R Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ΔVmax ASC:
ASC: >R Angle difference
Volt. sel. meas.loop [ 004 089 ]
[ 004 088 ]
MAIN:
Parameter Neutr.pt. treat. PSx
ASC:
◄
◄ c MC delta f max PSx set 1 010 048
[ * ] set 2 001 076
c set 3 001 077
Δfmax set 4 001 078
ASC:
Parameter MC op. mode PSx
φ
set 1 000 056
◄
◄ set 2 000 057
set 3 000 058
ASC: ASC: set 4 000 059
Phi offset PSx MC delta phi max PSx
[ * ] [ * ] ASC:
Parameter MC V> sync.check PSx
set 1 000 098 000 080 000 084 018 034 000 089
set 2 000 099 000 081 000 086 077 042 000 091
set 3 000 100 000 082 000 087 078 042 000 092
set 4 000 101 000 083 000 088 079 042 000 093
19Z8983A
ASC: ASC:
Cycle running Cycle running
[ 038 019 ] [ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Gen. close request Gen. close request
ASC: ASC:
Operat.time running Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ] [ 037 093 ]
① ①
ASC: ASC:
Close enable Close enable
[ 037 083 ] [ 037 083 ]
② ② ②
ASC: ASC:
Close rejection Close rejection
[ 037 086 ] [ 037 086 ]
100ms
① ②
ASC:
Parameter Operative time PSx ≥ 100 ms
set 1 018 010
set 2 077 034
set 3 078 034
set 4 079 034 19Z5230B
For test purposes a close request can be issued via a setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Fig. 3-231, (p. 3-289)). In this
case no close command is issued and it is not counted.
Separate triggering parameters are available for testing the function with
parameters for manual (MC) and automatic (AR) reclosure.
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request.
The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and
ASC: C lose en abl e is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no
network synchronism is registered, a 100 ms signal ASC : C lose r ejection is
issued.
3.30.8 Integrating the ASC Function into the Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
CB assignment PSx
[ * ]
No assignment
DEV01
DEV02
DEV03
DEVxx ASC:
AC effect. for DEV01
305 040
Sel. DEV01
ASC:
Close enable DEV01
305 041
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
System integrat. PSx
[ * ]
2
1: Autom.synchron.check
2: Autom.synchr.control
12Z51BGB
Fig. 3-232: Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units.
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible.
This requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that
the ASC system integration is set to Autom.synchr.control. If the control function
issues a close request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires
the ASC : Cl ose enable (see Section 3.51.6.6, (p. 3-481)).
However if AS C: Syst e m inte grat. PSx is set to Autom.synchron.check ASC
will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and
continuously updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations
have been set accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may
make decisions as to which external device is to be given a switching command.
ASC:
Transm.cycle,meas.v.
[ 101 212 ]
ASC:
Cycle running c
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Voltage Vref
[ 004 087 ]
ASC:
Volt. sel. meas.loop
[ 004 088 ]
ASC:
Volt. magn. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
19Z5231B
The following measured values are obtained and calculated during an ASC cycle
and are transmitted during a set cycle time:
● Voltage from the reference voltage channel
● Voltage from the selected measuring loop
● Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
● Difference in phase angles
● Frequency difference
Outside of the ASC cycle the measured values have the status of Not measured.
ASC: >S
Manual close request 11 & >+
1 ASC:
>R No. RC aft. man.clos
>R
MAIN: [ 004 009 ]
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: >+
Gen. close request ASC:
>R No. close requests
[ 009 033 ]
ASC: >+
Close rejection ASC:
No. close rejections
[ 037 086 ] >R
[ 009 034 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute 47Z1377B
GFSC:
General enable USER
018[ 060 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0 GFSC:
Enabled
1 [ 038 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
xxx[ xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
GFSC:
Ext. enabled
[ 039 097 ]
GFSC:
Enable EXT
[ 039 095 ]
GFSC:
Enable USER
003[ 138 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSC:
Disable EXT
[ 039 096 ]
GFSC:
Disable USER
003[ 137 ]
0: don't execute
GFSC:
1: execute Ready
[ 039 093 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
GFSC:
GFSC: Not ready
Blocked
[ 039 094 ]
310 002
Parameter GFSC:
* Enable PSx
set 1 018 072
set 2 018 073
set 3 018 074
set 4 018 075
47Z1117A
GFSC:
Blocking EXT GFSC:
[ 043 068 ] Blocked
MCMON: 310 002
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023
GFSC:
Evaluation VNG
002 136 ]
1: Calculated
2: Measured
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip VNG EXT
[ 002 183 ]
300ms 0 SFMON:
M.c.b. trip VNG
[ 098 132 ]
GFSC:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 006 020 ]
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ] m out of n
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032
. ]
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
selected
conditions occurs
43Z1307
GFSC:
V̲N-G Evaluation VNG
[ 002 136 ]
2
V̲A-G
V̲B-G 1
V̲C-G GFSC:
1 ... 2 V̲NG
310 001
1: Calculated
2: Measured
≥0.7·Vnom/√3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z1115A
3.31.4 Starting
The digitally filtered fundamental waves of current and voltage are measured.
They are monitored to determine whether they exceed set thresholds
(GFSC : I N> and GFS C: V NG>). If both thresholds have been exceeded, a
settable timer stage (GFSC: Start. ope r. de l ay) is started. Once the trigger
has dropped out, the starting persists until the settable release delay
(GFSC : St art. re le as. delay) has elapsed. Directional measurement is
enabled if the current reaches 70% of the set threshold (GFSC: IN>) and the
voltage exceeds the trigger threshold (GFSC : VNG>).
GFSC:
GFSC: IN>
Ready [ 018 063 ]
[ 039 093 ]
f0
I̲N GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
I̲N / 0.7
GFSC:
VNG>
[ 018 062 ]
f0
V̲A-G
GFSC:
V̲B-G VNG> triggered
V̲C-G
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
Start. oper. delay
[ 018 064 ]
GFSC:
Start. releas. delay
[ 018 065 ]
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
I̲N filtered
303 951
GFSC:
V̲NG filtered
303 950
≥0.7·Vnom/√3
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
47Z0127A
90°+φ(I̲N)
I̲N
Forward direction
V̲B-G
47Z1090A
To neg.-sequ.
-jXC 0 system neutral
ZL0
I meas = I N = 3 I 0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
Backward
V meas (capacitive, if Im{ZS 0 ( fwd ) } < XC 0 ) V meas (inductive, if Im{ZS 0 ( fwd ) } > XC 0 )
Forward
Fig. 3-240: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in forward direction.
1 pG faults backward
To neg.-sequ.
system neutral -jXC 0
ZL0
I meas = - I N = - 1 / 3 I 0
Z S 0 ( bwd )
V meas = VNG = - V 0 = ( Z L 0 + Z S 0 ( bwd ) ) * I0
Via RF
to pos.-sequ. system
I meas
Backward
V meas (always inductive!)
Forward
Fig. 3-241: Zero-sequence fault measurands on series compensated lines, faults in backward (reverse) direction.
measurement is only done at the IN> starting. Its valid result is memorized until
the IN> trigger resets.
The phase selection is further depending on the operation of the distance
function:
● If DIST has identified a multi-phase(-to-ground) fault, then the above phase
selection is disabled.
● If DIST has identified a single phase-to-ground fault, then this phase is
used.
These signals are used to provide 1-pole tripping of ground fault signaling
function (GSCSG) if no phase selection by distance starting is available (initiating
1p HSR cycle, as previously guided by distance starting). They are also used to
apply the “virtual current polarization” technique (Section 3.31.7.2, (p. 3-301)).
GFSC
GFSC:
IN> triggered
no
[ 039 088 ]
yes
Determination of faulty
GFSC reset phase
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ] yes
no
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
no [ 006 009 ]
yes
Faulty phase
no determined?
yes
Calculation
of
Vpol = Σ VPG
only the 2
healthy phases)
GFSC
47Z1205B
Fig. 3-242: GFSC Phase selection and optional virtual current polarization.
40
35
30
Tripping Time tS
25
20
15
10
0 V
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Voltage VN-G
47Z0129A
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
1: VNG-dependent
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
tA
GFSC: GFSC:
V̲NG filtered Volt.-dep. trip sig.
303 950 303 954
VNG
47Z0130A
0 Definite Time t =k
a
Per IEC 255–3 t =k · I b
(I ) -1
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
a k ·R
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
(I )b - 1 (I ) -1
ref ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
a k ·R
Per ANSI t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
b
(I ) -1 (I ) -1
ref ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
1
11 RI-Type Inverse t =k · 0.236
0.339 - I
(I )
ref
I
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k · (5.8 - 1.35 · ln I )
ref
Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3, Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
I/Iref I/Iref
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
I/Iref I/Iref
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
k=0.1
k=0.05 k=0.1
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
GFSC:
Operating mode tS
[ 018 080 ]
2: IN-dependent
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Iref,N
[ 018 076 ]
1.05 Iref,G
GFSC:
I̲N filtered
303 951
GFSC:
Characteristic N
[ 018 078 ]
GFSC:
Factor kt,N
[ 018 077 ]
|I̲N|/Iref,G GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
303 955
GFSC:
Characteristic N
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv.
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
47Z0131A
Note: After timer stage t1 or t2 has elapsed, a trip signal is issued and remains
present until the starting drops off – even if the direction decision changes or is
reset. This latching is not shown in the diagram.
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
GFSC:
t1 (forward) GFSC:
t1 elapsed
[ 018 066 ]
GFSC: [ 038 097 ]
Direct.determ.enabl. GFSC:
GFSC:
[ 043 061 ] Angle phi N t2 (backward) GFSC:
t2 elapsed
[ 018 061 ] [ 018 067 ]
GFSC: [ 038 098 ]
I̲N filtered
303 951 GFSC:
(90°+φG)≥φ>(270°+φG) Trip signal
GFSC: [ 039 092 ]
(90°+φG)≤φ<(270°+φG)
V̲NG filtered
303 950
GFSC:
Starting
[ 038 096 ]
GFSC:
Criteria tS active
[ 018 071 ]
0: blocked
1: forward
2: non-directional
GFSC:
Volt.-dep. trip sig.
303 954
GFSC:
Curr.-dep. trip sig.
303 955
GFSC:
t3 (non-directional)
[ 018 068 ]
GFSC:
t3 elapsed
[ 038 099 ]
GFSC:
Angle VNG/IN
[ 009 098 ]
47Z0132A
3.31.10 Counters
The trip signals issued by ground fault (short-circuit) protection are counted. The
counter can be reset either at the counter address or by a general reset action.
GFSC:
Trip signal GFSC:
+ No. of trip signals
[ 039 092 ]
[ 009 054 ]
MAIN: R
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
47Z13AHA
10 s 0
GFSC: GFSC:
IN> triggered
& ≥1 Monitor. triggered
[ 039 088 ] [ 038 095 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ] &
GFSC:
Voltage present
303 953
43Z8050
GSCSG:
General enable USER
[ 023 069 ]
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
GSCSG:
0 Enabled
[ 023 070 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
GSCSG:
Ext. enabled
[ 043 066 ]
GSCSG:
Enable EXT
[ 043 050 ]
GSCSG:
Enable USER
[ 003 140 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
GSCSG:
Disable EXT
[ 043 051 ]
GSCSG:
Disable USER
[ 003 139 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter GSCSG:
Enable PSx
set 1 023 071
set 2 023 072
set 3 023 073
set 4 023 074
45Z5043A
MAIN: GSCSG:
Protection active Not ready
306 001 [ 043 058 ]
GSCSG:
Enabled
GFSC:
Not ready
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
GSCSG:
Ready
1 [ 043 057 ]
2
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Blocking EXT
[ 043 052 ]
PSIG:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
GSCSG:
Telecom. faulty EXT
[ 043 053 ]
PSIG:
Telec.faulty (A) EXT
[ 004 064 ]
PSIG: GSCSG:
Telec.faulty (B) EXT Telecom. faulty
[ 008 094 ]
[ 046 060 ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3:
Sig.asg. comm.fault
[ 120 034 ]
0: None
1: Telecom. flt.(A)PSIG
2: Telecom.faulty GSCSG
3: TCflt.(A)PSIG &GSCSG
GSCSG:
Fct.assign. blocking
[ 002 180 ]
MAIN:
General starting
m out of n
[ 036 000 ]
DIST:
Trip signal
[ 036 009 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
.
.
.
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
Any of the
conditions occurs
43Z1418B
GSCSG:
Tripping time
[ 023 075 ]
GSCSG: GSCSG:
Ready & Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 057 ] [ 043 063 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
&
GFSC:
Virtual current pol.
[ 006 009 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
47Z1325 A
GSCSG: GSCSG:
Channel mode Frequency monitoring
[ 023 078 ] [ 023 085 ]
1 0
2 1
1: Independent channel 0: No
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon.trigd. EXT
[ 043 054 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. trigg.
305 152
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 1
305 169
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 2
305 170
PSIG:
Frequ. monit. ch. 3
305 171
47Z0135A
GSCSG:
tBlock
[ 023 077 ]
GFSC: S1 1 1 GSCSG:
Fault backward / BS & Transient blocking
t 304 001
[ 039 091 ] R1
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
47Z0136B
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2
1: Independent channel
GSCSG:
2: Common channel Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
GFSC: GSCSG:
Fault forward / LS Send internal signal
[ 039 090 ] 304 002
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
GSCSG:
[ 037 254 ] Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000 GSCSG:
Bl. PSIG weak infeed
304 003
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
45Z8038A
Fig. 3-258: GSCSG send signal and trip signal in the “Signal comp. release” (permissive) operating mode and
blocking of the weak indeed logic of distance protection protective signaling.
GSCSG:
Ready
[ 043 057 ]
GSCSG:
Operating mode
[ 023 079 ]
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
2
1: Independent channel
GSCSG:
2: Common channel Release time send
[ 023 076 ]
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 039 091 ] [ 043 059 ]
GSCSG: GSCSG:
Transient blocking Send internal signal
304 001 304 002
GSCSG:
Block. sig. nondir.
[ 023 089 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
GFSC:
Direct.determ.enabl.
[ 043 061 ]
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS GSCSG:
[ 039 090 ] Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG:
Tripping time elaps.
[ 043 063 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
47Z0139A
Fig. 3-259: Send signal and trip signal in the operating mode “Signal comp. block.”.
GSCSG:
Weak infeed trip
[ 023 084 ]
0: No
1: With directional r.
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
GSCSG:
1 Op.delay weak infeed
[ 023 087 ]
2
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Trip signal
[ 043 060 ]
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GFSC:
Fault forward / LS
[ 039 090 ]
GFSC:
VNG> triggered
[ 039 089 ]
GFSC:
IN> triggered
[ 039 088 ]
GSCSG:
Transient blocking
[ 037 254 ]
45Z8039A
GSCSG:
Trip mode
[ 023 088 ]
GSCSG:
GSCSG: Trip A
Trip signal 304 004
[ 043 060 ]
DIST:
Starting A
303 529 GSCSG:
Trip B
304 005
DIST:
Starting B
303 530 GSCSG:
Trip C
304 006
DIST:
Starting C
303 531
GSCSG:
Blocking ARC
304 008
47Z0142A
GSCSG:
Echo on receive
[ 023 080 ]
0: No
1: Yes
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
GSCSG:
GFSC: Send internal signal
IN> triggered S1 1
304 002
[ 039 088 ]
R1
GSCSG:
Receive EXT
[ 043 055 ]
PSIG:
Receive
305 165
GSCSG:
Frequ.mon. triggered
304 000
GFSC:
Fault backward / BS
[ 039 091 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p
[ 031 042 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
GSCSG:
tBlock echo
[ 023 083 ]
45Z6310A
GSCSG:
Channel mode
[ 023 078 ]
1: Independent channel
2: Common channel
GSCSG:
Test telecom. USER
[ 023 086 ]
1 GSCSG:
Release time send
0: don't execute [ 023 076 ] GSCSG:
Send signal
[ 043 059 ]
1: execute
GSCSG:
GSCSG: Send internal signal
Test telecom. EXT 304 002
[ 043 056 ]
GSCSG:
Test telecom. chann.
[ 034 029 ]
47Z0143A
DTOC:
General enable USER
[ 031 068 ]
0
DTOC:
1 Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter DTOC:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 072 098
1 set 2 073 098
set 3 074 098
0: No set 4 075 098
1: Yes
45Z8089A
SCDD:
Fault P forward & ≥1 DTOC: DTOC:
Parameter Direction tI> PSx I> PSx
[ 013 110 ]
set 1 017 071 072 007
SCDD: &
Fault P backward set 2 077 237 073 007
[ 013 111 ] set 3 078 237 074 007
I̲A ≥1 MAIN:
OC Starting A
[ 040 005 ]
I̲B ≥1
MAIN:
I̲C OC Starting B
≥1
[ 040 006 ]
IDMT: MAIN:
Starting A OC Starting C
IDMT: [ 040 007 ]
Starting B
IDMT:
Starting C DTOC:
&
Trip signal tI>
[ 013 123 ]
DTOC:
◄
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ] DTOC:
DTOC: c tI> PSx
Mode timer start PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
& ≥1 t 0 DTOC:
tI> elapsed
1
[ 040 010 ]
&
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ] 49Z8805B
Fig. 3-265: Monitoring the phase currents (using the first overcurrent stage as an example, other stages
analogously)
The selected measured values of the three phase currents (DTOC : Meas. value
I/I N> PS x) are monitored by the P433 to detect when they exceed the set
thresholds. When the thresholds are exceeded, a starting signal is issued (for
example (035 020) DTOC: Star ting I > = Yes).
Depending on the setting DTOC: Mode t ime r s tart PSx, the timer stages for
the phase current stages are triggered with the starting (With starting, i.e. with
exceeding of the operate value) or are direction-dependent (With direction, i.e.
starting condition and current flow in the set direction are present at the same
time). After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued (for example
(040 010) DTOC: tI> elaps ed = Yes). The elapsing of the operate delays may
be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs (for example (041
060) DT OC : B lockin g tI > E XT = Yes).
The directional operation mode of the overcurrent stages can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs (for example (013 119)
DTOC: Block . dir. tI > EXT = Yes). Then the overcurrent stage operates non-
directional.
This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a
measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
After the set operate delays have elapsed, a tripping signal is issued for the
respective phase current stage if the measured direction matches the set
direction (for example (013 123) DTOC: Trip sign al tI> = Yes).
DTOC:
Blocking tIneg> EXT
[ 041 102 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg &
306 014
MAIN:
Protection active &
306 001
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
MAIN: c Ineg> PSx c tIneg> PSx
Phase sequence
[ * ] [ * ]
[ 010 049 ]
I̲A
t 0
I̲B I̲neg DTOC:
tIneg> elapsed
I̲C [ 035 033 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>
[ 035 024 ]
Parameter DTOC: DTOC:
* Ineg> PSx tIneg> PSx
set 1 072 011 072 023
set 2 073 011 073 023
set 3 074 011 074 023
set 4 075 011 075 023
49Z8806A
Fig. 3-266: Monitoring the negative-sequence current (using the first overcurrent stage as an example, other
stages analogously)
DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
I̲A
I̲B 1
I̲C
2
Parameter DTOC:
Evaluation IN PSx
set 1 073 189
set 2 073 190
set 3 073 202
set 4 073 219
45Z5045B
Depending on the setting, the P433 monitors the residual current, calculated
from the three phase currents or measured at the current transformer T4.
The selected measured value of the residual current (DTOC : Meas. value
I/I N> PSx) is monitored by the P433 to detect when it exceeds the set
threshold. When the threshold is exceeded, a starting signal is issued (for
example for the first stage: (035 028) DTOC: Star t ing IN>).
Moreover, the P433 determines the angle between the residual current and the
neutral-displacement voltage for the direction determination. The direction
determination is enabled when a current stage is started and the neutral-
displacement voltage exceeds the set threshold SCD D: VNG> PSx. See
Section 3.35.5, (p. 3-354), in particular Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-356). After the operate
delay has elapsed, a trip signal of the respective residual current stage is issued
if the set direction matches the measured direction.
DTOC:
Blocking tIN> EXT
[ 041 063 ]
SCDD:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ] &
SCDD:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ] &
DTOC:
Block. dir. tIN> EXT
[ 002 176 ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Mode timer start PSx
[*]
DTOC:
1 tIN> PSx
c
[ * ]
2 &
1: With starting
t 0
DTOC:
2: With direction tIN> elapsed
[ 035 037 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg & & DTOC:
306 014 Trip signal tIN>
[ 035 043 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001 & DTOC:
c Meas.value I/IN> PSx &
DTOC: [*]
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
I̲N DTOC:
402 625 Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
Fig. 3-268: Monitoring the residual current (using the first overcurrent stage as an example, the other stages
analogical).
Depending on the setting DTO C: Mode ti mer start PSx, the timer stages for
the neutral current stages are triggered with the starting (i.e. with exceeding of
the operate value), or are direction-dependent (i.e. starting condition and current
flow in the set direction are present at the same time).
After the set operate delays have elapsed, a signal is issued (for example for the
first stage: (035 037) D TOC : t IN > e laps ed).
The elapsing of the operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured
binary signal inputs (for example by the signal (041 063) DTOC: Blocking
t IN > EXT).
The directional operation mode of the overcurrent stages can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs (for example by the signal (002
176) DTOC: Block. di r. tIN> E XT). In this case the overcurrent stage
operates non-directional.
This input function may also be applied to block the directional operation should a
measuring circuit failure occur (by using the signal from the associated m.c.b.).
After the set operate delays have elapsed, a tripping signal is issued for the
respective phase current stage if the measured direction matches the set
direction (for example for the first stage: (035 043) DTOC: Trip s ignal tIN>).
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC:
Starting I> Starting IP
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>
[ 035 022 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>>>
[ 035 023 ]
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC:
Starting Ineg> Starting IP
[ 035 024 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>
[ 035 025 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>
[ 035 026 ]
DTOC:
Starting Ineg>>>>
[ 035 027 ]
≥1 MAIN:
OC Starting Ineg
IDMT:
Starting Iref,neg> [ 040 105 ]
[ 040 107 ]
DTOC: ≥1 DTOC:
Starting IN> Starting IN
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>
[ 035 029 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>
[ 035 030 ]
DTOC:
Starting IN>>>>
[ 035 031 ]
≥1 MAIN:
OC Starting GF
IDMT:
Starting Iref,N> [ 040 008 ]
[ 040 081 ]
MAIN: ≥1 ≥1 MAIN:
OC Starting A OC General starting
[ 040 005 ] [ 040 000 ]
MAIN: ≥1 &
MAIN: Gen. start. mode PSx
OC Starting B
[ 040 006 ] [ * ]
& MAIN:
MAIN: Gen. Starting Iref,N
OC Starting C 0
[ 040 007 ]
1
MAIN:
0: W/o start. IN, Ineg Parameter Gen. start. mode PSx
1: With start. IN, Ineg
set 1 017 027
set 2 001 219
set 3 001 220
set 4 001 221
45Z8821A
The starting signals for all overcurrent stages – including IDMT stages (see
Section 3.34, (p. 3-334)) – are grouped to form dedicated starting signals. The
setting MA IN : Gen. start w. OC P Sx allows for the three starting signals
(phase currents – MAI N: OC Gen eral startin g, residual current – MAIN: OC
St arti ng GF and negative-sequence current – MAIN: OC Starting Ineg) to
trigger the general starting of the P433, see Section 3.12.15.1, (p. 3-107).
DTOC:
Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
tIN>,interm. PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
& Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
DTOC: [ 039 073 ]
Starting IN> Hold-time logic
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
305 462
0 t DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
MAIN:
General starting DTOC:
[ 036 000 ] tIN>,interm. elapsed
[ 040 099 ]
49Z6449A
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
49Z6450A
Fig. 3-271: Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value.
DTOC:
Starting IN>
[ 035 028 ]
DTOC:
Pulse prolong. runn.
305 462
DTOC:
H.-time tIN>,i. runn
[ 040 086 ]
DTOC:
t2 N
305 454
DTOC:
Trip sig. tIN>,intm.
[ 039 073 ]
Settings
49Z6451A
Fig. 3-272: Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value.
IDMT:
General enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
0
IDMT:
1 Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMT:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter IDMT:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 072 070
1 set 2 073 070
set 3 074 070
0: No
set 4 075 070
1: Yes
19Z5020A
Fig. 3-273: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection. (Only IDMT1 is shown; the logic, however, also applies to IDMT2
with different numerical addresses.)
0 Definite Time t =k
a
Per IEC 255–3 t =k · I b
(I ) -1
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
a k ·R
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
(I )b - 1 (I ) -1
ref ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
a k ·R
Per ANSI t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
b
(I ) -1 (I ) -1
ref ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
1
11 RI-Type Inverse t =k · 0.236
0.339 - I
(I )
ref
I
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k · (5.8 - 1.35 · ln I )
ref
Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3, Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
I/Iref I/Iref
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
I/Iref I/Iref
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
k=0.1
k=0.05 k=0.1
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
IDMT:
Factor KI,y PSx
t/s 10
IDMT:
Min. trip time y PSx
1
1 10 100
Iref,y
Fig. 3-278: Influence of the minimum operate value and the minimum trip time on the IDMT characteristics
3
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,P> Px /
IDMT: &
Enabled
IDMT: IDMT:
[ 040 100 ] Starting A
Meas.value I/IN PSx
IDMT:
MAIN: c Iref,P PSx [ * ]
Protection active IDMT:
[ * ] Starting B
c IDMT:
Starting C
1.05 Iref
& ≥1 IDMT:
I̲A Starting Iref,P>
& [ 040 080 ]
I̲B
&
I̲C
IDMT: Setting
Characteristic P PSx IDMT:
[ * ] Characteristic P PSx
IDMT:
Time Correction PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Block. tIref,P> EXT c
[ 040 101 ]
c
Φ IDMT:
Memory P clear
[ 040 110 ]
I̲P,max/Iref,P IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
set 1 060 018 072 050 072 059 007 250 013 143
set 2 060 019 073 050 073 059 007 251 013 144
set 3 060 020 074 050 074 059 007 252 013 145
set 4 060 021 075 050 075 059 007 253 013 146 47Z8834B
The three phase currents are monitored by the P433 to detect when they exceed
the set thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value is exceeded in one phase. The P433 will then determine
the maximum current flowing in the three phases and this value is used for
further processing. Depending on the characteristic selected and the current
magnitude the P433 will determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time
will under no circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold
irrespective of the current flow magnitude.
When the inrush stabilization function (see Section 3.12.5, (p. 3-94)) is triggered,
the phase current stage as well as the residual current stage is blocked.
However, when a phase starting is present then no subsequent triggering of the
inrush stabilization will be taken into account. (When a change from a single-
phase fault to a two-phase fault or from a two-phase fault to a three-phase fault
had occurred, it was possible that, because of transients during the change, the
inrush stabilization was momentarily triggered which would reset the starting
and the timer.)
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
IDMT:
Bl.Start.Iref,neg>
IDMT: &
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT:
MAIN: c Iref,neg PSx c
Protection active [ * ]
IDMT: Setting
Character. neg. PSx IDMT:
[ * ] Character. neg. PSx
IDMT:
Time Correction PSx
[ * ]
& c
IDMT:
Block. tIref,neg>EXT
[ 040 102 ] Φ IDMT:
Memory neg clear
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg [ 040 111 ]
IDMT:
Hold time neg runn.
[ 040 113 ]
IDMT:
IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: tIref,neg> elapsed
Parameter Iref,neg PSx Character. neg. PSx Factor kt,neg PSx [ 040 109 ]
IDMT:
set 1 072 051 072 057 072 054 Trip sig. tIref,neg>
set 2 073 051 073 057 073 054 [ 040 108 ]
set 3 074 051 074 057 074 054
set 4 075 051 075 057 075 054
set 1 072 078 072 072 072 060 007 254 013 143
set 2 073 078 073 072 073 060 007 255 013 144
set 3 074 078 074 072 074 060 008 002 013 145
set 4 075 078 075 072 075 060 008 005 013 146 47Z8835B
3.34.6 Selecting the Measured Variable for the Residual Current Stage
IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
I̲N 2
1
I̲A
I̲B 1 2 IDMT:
IN
I̲C 307 100
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter IDMT:
Evaluation IN PSx
set 1 072 075
set 2 073 075
set 3 074 075
set 4 075 075
19Z5022A
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P433 as the residual current:
either the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the
residual current directly measured at the fourth current transformer (T 4).
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ] IDMT:
Meas.value I/IN PSx
IDMT:
c Iref,N PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
c
1.05 Iref
IDMT: Setting
Characteristic N PSx IDMT:
[ * ] Characteristic N PSx
IDMT:
Time Correction PSx
[ * ]
& c
IDMT:
Block. tIref,N> EXT
[ 040 103 ] Φ IDMT:
Memory N clear
MAIN:
Bl. timer st. IN,neg [ 040 112 ]
IDMT:
Hold time N running
[ 040 054 ]
IDMT:
IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: tIref,N> elapsed
Parameter Iref,N PSx Meas.value I/IN PSx Characteristic N PSx [ 040 083 ]
IDMT:
set 1 072 052 060 018 072 058
47Z8836B
Trip signal tIref,N>
set 2 073 052 060 019 073 058 [ 040 085 ]
set 3 074 052 060 020 074 058
set 4 075 052 060 021 075 058
set 1 072 055 072 079 072 073 072 061 001 173 013 143
set 2 073 055 073 079 073 073 073 061 001 174 013 144
set 3 074 055 074 079 074 073 074 061 001 175 013 145
set 4 075 055 075 079 075 073 075 061 001 176 013 146
The residual current is monitored by the P433 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. The IDMT protection will trigger when the 1.05-fold of the set
reference current value is exceeded by the residual current. Depending on the
characteristic selected and the residual current magnitude the P433 will
determine the tripping time. Moreover the tripping time will under no
circumstances fall below a settable minimum time threshold irrespective of the
residual current flow magnitude.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. In addition the inverse-time stage can also be automatically blocked
by single-pole or multi-pole starting (depending on the setting).
Case A
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Case B
IDMT:
Starting Iref,P>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time P running
[ 040 053 ]
Non-delayed
Per characteristic
IDMT:
tIref,P> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter IDMT:
Hold time P PSx
set 1 072 071
set 2 073 071
set 3 074 071
set 4 075 071 19Z5025B
Fig. 3-283: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. Example A: Hold time determined
is not reached. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
Depending on the current flow the P433 will determine the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during
which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped
out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the
renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting
times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P433 then the
corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold
time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the
characteristic set. In Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-347), the effect of hold time is shown by
the example of a phase current stage.
SCDD:
General enable USER
[ 017 070 ]
& SCDD:
1 Enabled
0: No
1: Yes
SCDD:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
SCDD:
Parameter Enable PSx
0
set 1 076 235
49Z8927A
1 set 2 077 235
Measurem. relation
Forward direction
αP
IA
VB-C
Backward direction
Line of direction
S8Z5005A
Fig. 3-285: Example for the forming of a directional phase current stage decision with a single-pole fault in phase A
to ground (A-G) and with an inductive system and a phase sequence A-B-C (clockwise rotary field direction)
will not use VABmeas but will revert to the voltage memory, if it has been enabled.
The following signal is issued: SCDD: Dire ct. usi ng memory
If the voltage memory has not been enabled (e.g. |Delta f| > 2.5 Hz) the SCDD
function will check if Vmeas is sufficient for direction determination.
Should the result with a disabled voltage memory be Vmeas > 200 mV the
direction will be determined on the basis of Vmeas. The following signal is issued:
SC DD : Dire ct . usin g Vme as
If Vmeas < 200 mV, a forward fault is detected if the voltage memory is disabled
and if the pre-orientation is active (set under SCD D: Trip bias PSx), otherwise
the directional decision is blocked. The following signal is issued: SC DD: Forw.
w/o m ea sur em.
These signals are additionally delivered to the following signals:
● SCD D : Faul t P forward
● S CD D: Faul t P backward
● SC DD: Fau lt P or G forw d.
● SC DD : Fault P or G backw.
MCMON: SCDD:
Meas. circ. V faulty Blocked
[ 038 023 ] [ 040 062 ]
MAIN:
OC Starting A ≥1
[ 040 005 ]
MAIN:
OC Starting B
[ 040 006 ]
MAIN:
OC Starting C
[ 040 007 ]
>200 mV
V̲A-G + ≥2
∑
V̲B-G −
+
∑
V̲C-G −
−
∑
+
SCDD:
& Determin. P enabled
>0.1 Inom
≥1
I̲A & SCDD:
Phase curr.stage bl.
I̲B
I̲C
SCDD:
Enabled 49Z8928A
Direction determination for phase current stages is only enabled if the following
conditions are met simultaneously:
● Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected no faults in the voltage
measuring loop (see Section 3.25, (p. 3-217)).
● A phase current starting signal is present.
● At least two phase-to-phase voltages exceed 200 mV.
● All three phase current values exceed 0.1 Inom.
Voltage memory can be applied when 3-pole faults have occurred (see
Section 3.35.2.1, (p. 3-349)).
After being enabled and depending on the direction determination decision one
of the following signals will be issued:
● With a fault in forward direction, SC DD: F ault P forward
● With a fault in backward (reverse) direction, SC DD : F au lt P back ward
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
1: A - B - C
2: A - C - B
SCDD:
Determin. P enabled
304 456
MAIN:
Starting A int.
306 513
MAIN:
Starting B int. Starting Selected meas. var. Characteristic
306 514
at at
I̲A
Setting Setting
Phase sequence Phase sequence
I̲B
A–B–C A–C–B
I̲C
V̲A-G +
B I̲B V̲C-A +45° +135°
V̲C-G +
A-B I̲A V̲B-C +60° +150°
SCDD:
Fault P forward
[ 013 110 ]
Direction determin.
SCDD:
Fault P backward
[ 013 111 ]
47Z8829A
3.35.4 Forming the Blocking Signal for the Phase Current Stages
SCDD:
Trip bias PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
SCDD:
Phase curr.stage bl.
304 460
DTOC:
Direction tI> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional SCDD:
3: Non-directional Block. direct. tI>
304 461
DTOC:
Direction tI>> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional SCDD:
3: Non-directional Block. direct. tI>>
304 462
DTOC:
Direction tI>>> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional SCDD:
3: Non-directional Block. Direct. tI>>>
310 067
DTOC:
Direction tI>>>> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional SCDD:
3: Non-directional Block.Direct.tI>>>>
460 539
IDMT:
Direct. tIref,P> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional SCDD:
3: Non-directional Bl.Direct. tIref,P>
DIST: 304 465
Fault forward / LS
[ 036 018 ]
DIST:
Fault backward / BS
[ 036 019 ]
set 1 017 074 017 071 017 072 007 230 013 115 017 066
set 2 077 236 077 237 077 238 007 231 013 116 077 233
set 3 078 236 078 237 078 238 007 232 013 117 078 233
set 4 079 236 079 237 079 238 007 233 013 118 079 233
Fig. 3-288: Forming the blocking signals for the phase current stages
To form the blocking signal for the DTOC phase current stages and the IDMT
phase current stage the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may
Line of direction
Backward direction
V̲G-N = -V̲N-G
IN αN
Forward direction
Measurem. relation
S8Z5006A
Fig. 3-289: Example for forming a directional decision in the residual current stage
SCDD:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
V̲N-G 2
1
V̲A-G
V̲B-G 1 ... 2 SCDD:
VNG
V̲C-G 310 026
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter SCDD:
Evaluation VNG PSx
set 1 071 056
set 2 071 057
set 3 071 058
set 4 071 059
19Z6450A
SCDD:
Evaluation IN PSx
[ * ]
I̲N 2
1
I̲A
I̲B 1 ... 2 SCDD:
IN
I̲C 310 027
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter SCDD:
Evaluation IN PSx
set 1 008 105
set 2 008 106
set 3 008 107
set 4 008 108
49Z8850A
SCDD: SCDD:
IN Resid.curr.stage bl.
SCDD:
Enabled
49Z8951A
SCDD:
SCDD: Charact. angle G PSx
Determin. N enabled
304 455
[ * ]
SCDD:
IN
310 027
Direction determin.
SCDD:
VNG
310 026
SCDD:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
SCDD:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
Parameter SCDD:
Charact. angle G PSx
set 1 004 092
set 2 004 247
set 3 004 248
set 4 004 249
49Z8852A
3.35.8 Forming the Blocking Signal for the Residual Current Stages
MAIN:
Starting A int.
306 513
MAIN:
Starting B int.
306 514
MAIN:
Starting C int.
306 515
SCDD:
Resid.curr.stage bl.
304 454
DTOC:
Direction tIN> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
Direction tIN>>>>PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Direct. tIref,N> PSx
[ * ]
SCDD:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: IDMT:
Parameter Direction tIN> PSx Direction tIN>> PSx Direction tIN>>> PSx Direction tIN>>>>PSx Direct. tIref,N> PSx
set 1 072 032 072 033 072 034 072 035 017 067
set 2 072 042 072 043 072 044 072 045 077 242
set 3 072 082 072 083 072 084 072 085 078 242
set 4 072 091 072 092 072 093 072 094 079 242 49Z8833A
Fig. 3-294: Forming the blocking signals for the residual current stages.
To form the blocking signal for the DTOC and the IDMT residual current stages
the fault direction to evaluate the measuring decision may be set separately for
each of the stages to either Forward directional, Backward directional or Non-
directional.
A blocking signal for the residual current stage is formed when one of the
following conditions is met:
● The direction for the residual current stage is set to Forward directional and
the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in backward
direction.
● The direction for the residual current stage is set to Backward directional
and the short-circuit direction determination detects a fault in forward
direction.
SCDD: SCDD:
Fault P forward ≥1 Fault P or G forwd.
[ 013 110 ] [ 040 039 ]
SCDD:
Fault N forward
[ 035 047 ]
SCDD: SCDD:
Fault P backward ≥1 Fault P or G backw.
[ 013 111 ] [ 040 040 ]
SCDD:
Fault N backward
[ 035 048 ]
49Z8829A
Fig. 3-295: Fault signals from phase or residual current stages forward or backward directional.
GFDSS:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
GFDSS:
General enable USER
[ 016 060 ]
GFDSS:
Enabled
&
[ 042 096 ]
0
0: No
1: Yes
&
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
GFDSS:
Operating mode
[ 016 090 ]
1: Steady-state power
2: Steady-state current
3: Steady-state admitt.
GFDSS:
& GF (pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
GF (curr.) eval. EXT GF (pow.) not ready
[ 038 020 ] [ 038 027 ]
GFDSS:
& GF (curr.) ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS:
GF (curr.) not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS:
GF (curr.) evaluat.
[ 039 071 ]
GFDSS:
& Admittance ready
[ 038 167 ]
12Z6243A
Fig. 3-296: Enabling, disabling and readiness of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values.
GFDSS:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
V̲N-G 2
1
V̲A-G
V̲B-G 1 ... 2 GFDSS:
V̲NG
V̲C-G 304 150
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter GFDSS:
Evaluation VNG PSx
set 1 016 083
set 2 001 011
set 3 001 012
set 4 001 013
12Z6241A
GFDSS: GFDSS:
GFDSS: VNG> PSx tVNG> PSx
GF (pow.) ready C
[ 038 026 ] [ * ] [ * ]
MAIN:
General start. int.
t 0
306 539
GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS:
VNG> triggered
304 151
GFDSS:
f/fnom (P.meas.) PSx
C
[ * ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
V̲NG V̲NG filtered
304 150 304 152
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx Meas. direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
I̲N
1 1
2 2
C C
GFDSS:
Direction LS
304 153
Q
GFDSS:
Direction BS
304 154
GFDSS:
P
304 155
GFDSS:
Q
304 156
Fig. 3-298: Direction determination with the “Steady-state power” operating mode.
VNG
BS
BS
GFDSS:
Sector angle BS PSx
GFDSS:
IN,act>/reac> BS PSx
IN
GFDSS:
IN,act>/reac> LS PSx
GFDSS:
Sector angle LS PSx
LS
LS
D5Z50BLA
Fig. 3-299: Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, “cos φ” operating
mode.
VNG
BS LS
GFDSS: GFDSS:
IN,act>/reac> BS PSx IN,act>/reac> LS PSx
IN
BS LS
D5Z50BMA
Fig. 3-300: Characteristic of the ground fault direction determination using steady-state values, “sin φ” operating
mode.
GFDSS:
GF (pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx IN,act>/reac> LS PSx
[ * ] C
1, 3, 4 [ * ]
1: cos phi circuit
GFDSS:
P
304 155
IN,act 1, 3
GFDSS:
GFDSS: C IN,act>/reac> BS PSx
V̲NG filtered [ * ]
304 152
GFDSS:
Q
304 156
IN,reac 2, 4
GFDSS:
4 Curr. IN,reac p.u.
[ 004 046 ]
3
GFDSS:
1 ... 2 Current IN,act p.u.
[ 004 045 ]
GFDSS:
Direction LS
304 153
GFDSS:
Direction BS
304 154
GFDSS:
Starting forward/LS
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS:
Trip signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Operate delay LS PSx Release delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS:
C Sector angle LS PSx GFDSS:
[ * ] Direct. forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Operate delay BS PSx Release delay BS PSx GFDSS:
Release delay BS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
GFDSS:
C
Sector angle BS PSx
[ * ]
GFDSS:
Direct. backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS:
GF (curr.) not ready
[ 038 029 ]
GFDSS:
Starting backward/BS
[ 009 041 ]
Fig. 3-301: Output of the direction decisions with the “steady-state power” operating mode.
GFDSS:
Admittance ready
[ 038 167 ]
GFDSS:
GF (pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ]
GFDSS:
Op. delay IN elapsed
304 157
GFDSS:
IN> triggered
304 158
GFDSS:
I̲N filtered
304 159
GFDSS:
Curr. IN filt. p.u.
[ 004 047 ]
GFDSS:
GFDSS: + No. GF (curr. meas)
Direction BS
[ 009 003 ]
304 154
R
GFDSS:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1 ≥1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z61BRA
The frequency provided by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these values by
using a Fourier analysis.
The measurement is enabled when the time delay set at GFDSS: t VNG> PS x
and which was triggered by VNG> has elapsed. Depending on the selected
operating mode (cos phi circuit or sin phi circuit) the sign of the active power
(GFDSS : Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx = cos phi circuit) or of the reactive power
(GFDSS : Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx = sin phi circuit) is used to determine the
direction. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the
setting at GF D SS: Meas. dire ction P Sx. When the Standard connection has
been made a ground fault on the line side will issue the decision “LS” and a
ground fault on the busbar side will issue the decision “BS”. Phase-angle errors of
the system transformers can be compensated with the setting at
GFDSS : C or rect ion angle P Sx.
GFDSS: GFDSS:
MAIN: C VNG> PSx tVNG> PSx
General start. int. [ * ]
[ * ]
306 539
GFDSS:
Admittance ready t 0
[ 038 167 ] GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm.
[ 009 037 ]
GFDSS:
VNG> triggered
304 151
GFDSS:
f/fnom (P.meas.) PSx
C
[ * ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
V̲NG V̲NG filtered
304 150 304 152
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx Meas. direction PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
I̲
1 1
2 2
GFDSS:
C Correction angle PSx
[ * ]
C C
GFDSS:
Direction LS
Q 304 153
GFDSS:
Direction BS
304 154
GFDSS:
P
304 155
GFDSS:
Q
304 156
Fig. 3-304: Direction determination with the “Steady-state admittance” operating mode.
VNG
BS
BS
GFDSS:
G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx
GFDSS:
G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx
LS
LS
19Z5059A
Fig. 3-305: Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using steady-state admittance, “cos φ” operating
mode.
VNG
BS LS
GFDSS: GFDSS:
G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx
IN
BS LS
19Z5060A
Fig. 3-306: Characteristic for ground fault direction determination using Steady-state admittance, “sin φ” operating
mode.
GFDSS:
Admittance ready
[ 038 167 ]
GFDSS:
G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx
C
GFDSS: [ * ]
Direction LS
304 153
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Direction BS Starting forward/LS
304 154
[ 009 040 ]
GFDSS:
Op.m.GF pow./adm PSx
[ * ] 1, 3, 4, 5 GFDSS:
1: cos phi circuit C G(N)> / B(N)> BS PSx
[ * ]
2, 3, 4, 5
2: sin phi circuit
GFDSS:
GFDSS: Starting backward/BS
P [ 009 041 ]
304 155
G(N) 1, 3
GFDSS:
V̲NG filtered
304 152
GFDSS:
Q
304 156
2, 4
B(N)
5
Y(N)
GFDSS:
Admitt. Y(N) p.u.
[ 004 191 ]
5 GFDSS:
Conduct. G(N) p.u.
[ 004 192 ]
4
GFDSS:
3 Suscept. B(N) p.u.
[ 004 193 ]
1 ... 2
GFDSS:
Trip signal forw./LS
[ 009 031 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Operate delay LS PSx Release delay LS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS:
Direct. forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Operate delay BS PSx Release delay BS PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
t 0 0 t GFDSS:
Direct. backward/BS
[ 009 036 ]
GFDSS:
GF (curr.) not ready
[ 038 029 ]
Fig. 3-307: Output of the direction decisions with the “Steady-state admittance” operating mode.
The trip signal from the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by
the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip
command.
GFDSS:
Op.del.Y(N)> elapsed
304 175
t 0 0 t GFDSS:
I̲N Trip Y(N)>
[ 009 075 ]
GFDSS:
GF (curr.) ready
[ 038 028 ]
GFDSS:
GF (pow.) ready
[ 038 026 ] GFDSS:
Trip signal Y(N)>
[ 009 072 ]
GFDSS:
Starting Y(N)>
[ 009 074 ]
GFDSS:
GFDSS: + No. GF admitt. Y(N)
Op.del.Y(N)> elapsed
[ 009 060 ]
304 175
R
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Grd. fault pow./adm. + No. GF power/admitt.
[ 009 037 ] [ 009 002 ]
R
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Direct. forward/LS + No. GF forward/LS
[ 009 035 ] [ 009 000 ]
R
GFDSS: GFDSS:
Direct. backward/BS + No. GF backward/BS
[ 009 036 ] [ 009 001 ]
R
GFDSS:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 004 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: 0: don't execute
General reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
GFDSS:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 245 ]
12Z6191B
The number of ground faults and directional decisions are counted. The counters
may be reset individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.12.19,
(p. 3-117)).
GFTRP:
General enable USER
[ 014 005 ]
1 GFTRP:
Enabled
0: No [ 040 092 ]
1: Yes
GFTRP:
Trip signal
MAIN:
Protection active [ 037 091 ]
306 001
MCMON:
M.circ. V,Vref flty.
[ 040 078 ]
GFTRP:
Blocking EXT
[ 037 046 ]
ARC:
Dead time running
[ 037 002 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
SOTF:
tManual-close runn.
[ 036 063 ]
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
DIST:
VNG>> exceeded
3063 596
GFTRP:
VNG> triggered EXT
[ 037 047 ]
V̲A-G
V̲B-G
45Z5050A
GFSIG:
General enable USER
[ 016 078 ]
0: No
1: Yes
GFSIG:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
GFSIG:
Enabled
[ 040 091 ]
0 GFSIG:
DC loop op. mode
[ * ]
1
GFSIG:
0: No Send (transm.relay)
1: Yes 1
[ 037 089 ]
MAIN:
Protection active 2
306 001
GFSIG:
Test telecom. USER 1: Transm.relay break c
[ 016 079 ]
2: Transm.relay make co
0
GFSIG:
Send reset time
1
[ * ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
GFSIG:
Send (signal)
GFSIG: 500ms [ 037 088 ]
Test telecom. EXT
[ 037 045 ]
GFSIG:
Test telecom.
[ 034 025 ]
GFSIG:
Operate delay
[ * ]
GFDSS: GFSIG:
Direct. backward/BS Trip signal
[ 009 036 ] [ 037 087 ]
GFDSS:
Direct. forward/LS
[ 009 035 ]
GFSIG:
Receive EXT
[ 037 044 ]
GFDSS:
Release delay BS PSx
[ * ]
GFSIG:
GFDSS: Telecom. faulty
Grd. fault pow./adm. [ 038 017 ]
[ 009 037 ]
SFMON:
Telecom.faulty/GFSIG
[ 098 012 ]
set 1 001 134 016 076 016 077 016 074 016 073
set 2 001 136 001 142 001 145 001 139 001 008
set 3 001 137 001 143 001 146 001 140 001 009
set 4 001 138 001 144 001 147 001 141 001 010
45Z63BWA
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
TGFD:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
TGFD:
General enable USER
[ 016 040 ]
0 TGFD:
Enabled
1 [ 037 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
50: 50 Hz
SFMON:
Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz
60: 60 Hz
[ 093 098 ]
TGFD:
Ready
[ 037 080 ]
TGFD:
Blocking EXT
[ 004 034 ]
TGFD:
Direct. determined
[ 004 030 ]
SFMON:
TGFD mon. triggered
[ 093 094 ]
TGFD:
Not ready
[ 037 081 ]
SFMON:
Module N DPR faulty TGFD:
[ 093 090 ] Hardware fault
304 207
SFMON:
Module N RAM faulty
[ 093 091 ]
SFMON:
Time-out module N
[ 093 092 ]
SFMON:
Invalid SW vers. N
[ 093 093 ]
SFMON:
Module N DAC faulty Parameter TGFD:
[ 093 095 ] Enable PSx
SFMON: set 1 001 054
Module N +15V faulty
[ 093 096 ] set 2 001 055
SFMON: set 3 001 056
Module N -15V faulty set 4 001 057
[ 093 097 ]
12Z6282A
Fig. 3-312: Enabling, disabling and readiness of the transient ground fault detection function.
TGFD:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
V̲N-G 2
1
V̲A-G
V̲B-G 1 ... 2 TGFD:
V̲NG
V̲C-G 304 200
1: Calculated
2: Measured
Parameter TGFD:
Evaluation VNG PSx
TGFD:
Hardware fault
304 207
TGFD:
TGFD: C IN,p> PSx
Ready
[ 037 080 ] [ * ]
I̲N TGFD:
IN,p triggered
304 201
TGFD:
VNG> PSx TGFD:
[ * ] Operate delay PSx
[ * ]
TGFD:
TGFD: Ground fault
V̲NG [ 004 033 ]
304 200
C TGFD:
VNG> (f0) triggered
304 202
TGFD:
VNG> triggered
304 203
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
TGFD:
Measurem. direc. PSx
[ * ]
TGFD:
1 Direction LS
304 204
1 TGFD:
Direction BS
2 304 205
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Directional decisions are output for the duration of the set buffer time. If buffer
time is set to 0 s, directional decisions are output until the neutral-point
displacement voltage's fundamental component no longer exceeds the trigger
threshold set at TGFD: VNG> PSx.
TGFD:
Hardware fault
304 207
TGFD:
Buffer time PSx
[ * ]
TGFD:
Forward / LS
TGFD: 1 [ 004 031 ]
Direction LS
R
304 204
TGFD:
TGFD: 1 Backward / BS
Direction BS [ 004 032 ]
304 205 R
TGFD:
VNG> (f0) triggered
304 202
S1 1
R1 Parameter TGFD:
Buffer time PSx
S1 1 set 1 016 043
set 2 001 070
R1
set 3 001 071
set 4 001 072
12Z62EVA
TGFD:
Reset signals USER
[ 003 009 ]
100 ms TGFD:
1 ≥1 Signal reset
[ 004 141 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
TGFD:
Reset signals EXT
[ 004 140 ]
MAIN: TGFD:
General reset USER ≥1 Reset signal
[ 003 002 ] 304 206
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
12Z61EWA
5s 0
TGFD: SFMON:
30 ms TGFD mon. triggered
IN,p triggered &
304 201
[ 093 094 ]
TGFD:
VNG> triggered
304 203
TGFD:
VNG> (f0) triggered &
304 202
TGFD:
Ready
[ 037 080 ]
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
1: execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z61EXB
TGFD: TGFD:
Ground fault + No. GF
[ 004 033 ] [ 004 015 ]
R
TGFD: TGFD:
Forward / LS + No. GF forward/LS
[ 004 031 ] [ 004 013 ]
R
TGFD: TGFD:
Backward / BS + No. GF backward/BS
[ 004 032 ] [ 004 014 ]
R
TGFD:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 022 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: 0: don't execute
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
TGFD:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 246 ]
12Z61EYA
THERM:
General enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
THERM:
1 & Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes y PSU: Parameter THERM:
PS y active Enable PSx
19Z6112B
COMP
THERM:
Select current PSx
I̲max [ * ]
∑
0
I̲A +
1
I̲B +
+ 2
I̲C
0 ... 2 AR_MV THERM:
I
I̲N
0: Max. phase current
1: IN calculated
2: IN measured
THERM:
Parameter Select current PSx
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P433 for the Thermal
Overload Protection: either the maximum RMS phase current, or the residual
current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current directly
measured at the fourth current transformer (T 4).
THERM:
Select meas.inputPSx
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
With CTA
0: None 305 201
1: PT100
2: 20mA input
MEASI: &
PT100 faulty
[ 040 190 ]
&
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI: THERM:
Open circ. 20mA inp. CTA error
[ 040 192 ] [ 039 111 ]
THERM:
CTA error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
SFMON:
THERM: CTA error
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
[ 098 034 ]
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
Block. by CTA error
3 305 200
THERM: THERM:
Parameter Select meas.inputPSx Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
The maximum permitted coolant temperature Θc,max is derived from the difference
between the T H E R M : M a x . o b j e c t t e m p . P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s .
P S x settings.
Θ/%
10000
1000
τ / min
100
200
10 110 1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50 1
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / I ref
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-321: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ΔϑP = 0 % and
identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).
The selected current (THERM: I, see Section 3.40.2, (p. 3-385)) is used to track a
first-order thermal replica as specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating
mode dependent settings the following parameters will govern the tripping time:
● The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object,
THERM: Tim.con st.1, >Ibl P Sx
● The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0
● The current measured coolant temperature Θc
● If the value of the selected current (THERM: I) is greater than 10·Iref then
only the fixed maximum value 10·Iref is used for calculating the tripping
time.
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
I
(I )2 - Δϑ0
ref
t = τ · ln Θa - Θa,max
I
(I )2 - Δϑtrip · (1 - Θ )
ref max - Θa,max
The Δϑtrip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode
is Absolute replica.
3.40.10 Trip
THERM:
I
305 202
MAIN:
Protection active & c
306 001
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
THERM: [ 041 108 ]
Block replica EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM:
Block. by CTA error & c
305 200
THERM:
Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
c [ * ]
THERM: THERM:
Iref PSx Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
[ * ] <0.1 Iref c
[ * ]
THERM: THERM:
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx O/T f.Iref pers. PSx
[ * ] c [ * ]
THERM:
k·Iref c Warning temp. PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
c Max.object temp. PSx
THERM: [ * ]
Absolute replica
[ 022 065 ] THERM:
c Max. cool. temp. PSx
[ * ]
0 THERM: THERM:
c Θ warning PSx Within pre-trip time
[ * ]
1 [ 041 109 ]
THERM:
0: No Θ trip PSx SFMON:
c [ * ] Setting error THERM
1: Yes [ 098 035 ]
THERM:
c Coolant temp.
[ * ]
PSx THERM:
Setting error,block.
THERM: THERM: [ 039 110 ]
Relative replica Hysteres. Θ,trip PSx THERM:
[ 022 064 ] [ * ] Warning
THERM: [ 039 025 ]
0 Warning pre-trip PSx THERM:
[ * ] Trip signal
1 [ 039 020 ]
THERM:
0: No Buffer empty
1: Yes [ 039 112 ]
THERM:
THERM: Status THERM replica
With CTA c [ 004 016 ]
305 201
R THERM:
Coolant temperature I/Iref Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM: THERM:
Reset replica Coolant temperature
[ 039 061 ] [ 004 149 ]
c THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. p.u.
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM:
Iref PSx Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx [ 004 178 ]
THERM:
set 1 072 179 072 180 072 187 Object temp. p.u.
set 2 073 179 073 180 073 187 [ 004 179 ]
set 3 074 179 074 180 074 187 THERM:
set 4 075 179 075 180 075 187 Therm. replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM:
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx O/T f.Iref pers. PSx Warning temp. PSx Max.object temp. PSx Current I,therm prim
set 1 072 188 072 167 072 153 072 182 [ 007 220 ]
set 2 073 188 073 167 073 153 073 182 THERM:
Current I,therm p.u
set 3 074 188 074 167 074 153 074 182
[ 007 221 ]
set 4 075 188 075 167 075 153 075 182
set 1 072 185 072 184 072 181 072 186 072 183 072 191
set 2 073 185 073 184 073 181 073 186 073 183 073 191
set 3 074 185 074 184 074 181 074 186 074 183 074 191
set 4 075 185 075 184 075 181 075 186 075 183 075 191 47Z8842A
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the
following parameters:
● Relative replica: TH ERM: Θ trip P Sx
● Absolute replica: THERM: Max.obje ct te mp. PSx
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the
thermal replica has decreased by the value set at THERM: Hystere s. Θ,t r ip
PSx, at least for a fixed time of 5 s.
3.40.11 Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is
applied with the time constant set at TH ER M: Tim .const.2,<Ibl PSx. This
element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of
stopped motors.
3.40.13 Resetting
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be
blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THERM:
Reset replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
THERM:
1 Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Reset replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020A
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0
V<>:
1 Enabled
[ 040 066 ]
0: No
1: Yes
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty V<>:
[ 038 023 ] Not ready
[ 042 004 ]
45Z8085A
V<>:
Op. mode V< mon. PSx
[ * ]
0 ≥1 V<>:
V< ready
1 &
0: Without
≥1
1: With
V<>:
I enable V< PSx
[ * ]
I̲B &
I̲C
& ≥1 V<>:
V< B(-C) ready
&
& ≥1 V<>:
V< C(-A) ready
V<>:
Operating mode PSx &
[ * ]
1: Delta
2: Star
There is an optional enabling threshold available with the V<> element which is
based on minimum current monitoring for the undervoltage stages (V<, V<<,
V<<<, Vpos<, Vpos<<).
The following two settings may be used to activate the operating mode for
minimum current monitoring and to set the enabling threshold:
● V<>: Op. mode V< mon. P Sx – activates the threshold if set to With.
● V <>: I enable V< PSx – defines the threshold value (in units of Inom).
If V<>: O p. mode V< mon. PSx = With, the undervoltage stages Vpos< and
Vpos<< are enabled only if the phase current value of at least one phase is
exceeding the set threshold.
Moreover, there is a phase-specific monitoring for the undervoltage stages V<,
V<<, V<<<:
● For V<>: O pe rat ing mode PSx = Star, these stages are enabled for
loop A–N, for example, only if the value of I̲A is exceeding the set threshold
(and accordingly for the other two phases).
● For V<>: O pe rat in g mode P Sx = Delta, these stages are enabled for
loop A–B, for example, only if the values of both I̲A and I̲B are exceeding
the set threshold (and accordingly for the other two loops).
V<>:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
V̲A-G
V̲B-G
fnom 1
V̲C-G
fnom
fnom
VA-G √3
fnom
2
VB-G √3
fnom
VC-G √3
1V̲A(-B)
1 2 1V̲B(-C)
1V̲C(-A)
1: Delta
2: Star
Parameter V<>:
Operating mode PSx
set 1 076 001
set 2 077 001
set 3 078 001
set 4 079 001
47Z0147A
The P433 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Dependent on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the
phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages
(Delta operating mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages
that can be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If undervoltage monitoring decisions are to be included in the trip commands,
then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip
command would always be present when the system voltage was disconnected,
and it would therefore not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV> PSx
V<>: [ * ]
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V> PSx
[ * ]
1V̲A(-B) V<>:
tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
1V̲B(-C)
1V̲C(-A) V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>:
tV> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
tV> 3-pole elapsed
[ 041 098 ]
V<>:
Starting V> 3-pole
[ 041 097 ]
V<>:
tV>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT
[ 041 069 ]
V<>:
tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> A(-B)
[ 041 031 ]
V<>:
Starting V>/>> B(-C)
[ 041 032 ]
V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV>>> PSx
V<>: [ * ]
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V>>> PSx
[ * ]
1V̲A(-B) V<>:
tV>>> elapsed
1V̲B(-C) [ 010 233 ]
1V̲C(-A) V<>:
Starting V>>>
[ 010 231 ]
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Blocking tV>>> EXT
[ 010 246 ]
V<>:
tV>>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 234 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>> 3-pole
[ 010 232 ]
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT V<>:
[ 041 070 ] tV< PSx
V<>: [ * ]
V< A(-B) ready
↗ V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx c V<>:
[ * ] & ≥1 & Fault V<
V<>: [ 041 110 ]
V< PSx
[ * ] t 0 V<>:
tV< elapsed
1V̲A(-B)
[ 041 041 ]
1V̲B(-C)
V<>:
V< C(-A) ready
1V̲C(-A)
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
[ 042 023 ] V<>:
=1 Starting V< 1-pole
[ 019 006 ]
V<>:
tV< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
c V<>:
& ≥1 & Fault V< 3-pole
[ 041 111 ]
t 0 V<>:
& tV< 3-pole elapsed
[ 042 006 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V< 3-pole
V<>: [ 042 005 ]
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
[ 042 024 ] V<>:
Starting V< A(-B)
V<>:
Starting V< B(-C)
V<>:
Starting V< C(-A)
Fig. 3-329: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 1: stage V<. (Transient pulse: See diagram below.)
V<>:
Blocking tV<< EXT
V<>:
[ 041 071 ] tV<< PSx
V<>: [ * ]
V< A(-B) ready
↗ V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx c V<>:
[ * ] & ≥1 & Fault V<<
V<>: [ 041 112 ]
V<< PSx
[ * ] t 0 V<>:
tV<< elapsed
1V̲A(-B)
[ 041 042 ]
1V̲B(-C)
V<>:
V< C(-A) ready
1V̲C(-A)
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
[ 042 025 ] V<>:
=1 Starting V<< 1-pole
[ 019 007 ]
V<>:
tV<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
c V<>:
& ≥1 & Fault V<< 3-pole
[ 011 132 ]
t 0 V<>:
& tV>> 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 227 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<< 3-pole
V<>: [ 010 228 ]
tV<< 3p elaps. trans
[ 010 230 ] V<>:
≥1 Starting V</<< A(-B)
V<>: [ 041 038 ]
Starting V< A(-B)
V<>:
≥1 Starting V</<< B(-C)
V<>: [ 041 039 ]
Starting V< B(-C)
≥1 V<>:
Starting V</<< C(-A)
V<>: [ 041 040 ]
Starting V< C(-A)
Fig. 3-330: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 2: stage V<<. (Transient pulse: See diagram below.)
V<>:
Blocking tV<<< EXT
V<>:
[ 010 247 ] tV<<< PSx
V<>: [ * ]
V< A(-B) ready
↗ V<>:
Hyst. V<> meas. PSx c V<>:
[ * ] & ≥1 & Fault V<<<
V<>: [ 011 134 ]
V<<< PSx
[ * ] t 0 V<>:
tV<<< elapsed
1V̲A(-B)
[ 010 237 ]
1V̲B(-C)
V<>:
V< C(-A) ready
1V̲C(-A)
V<>:
tV<<< elaps.transien
[ 010 238 ] V<>:
=1 Starting V<<< 1-pole
[ 019 008 ]
V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole PSx
[ * ]
c V<>:
& ≥1 & Fault V<<< 3-pole
[ 011 133 ]
t 0 V<>:
& tV<<< 3-pole elapsed
[ 010 239 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting V<<< 3-pole
V<>: [ 010 236 ]
tV<<< 3p elaps.trans
[ 010 240 ]
Fig. 3-331: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 3: stage V<<<. (Transient pulse: See following diagram.)
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx ↗V<>:
[ * ] tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
V<>: V<>:
tV< elapsed 1
tV< elaps. transient
t
[ 041 041 ] [ 042 023 ]
V<>: V<>:
tV< 3-pole elapsed 1
tV< 3p elaps. trans.
t
[ 042 006 ] [ 042 024 ]
V<>: V<>:
tV<< elapsed 1
tV<< elapsed trans.
t
[ 041 042 ] [ 042 025 ]
V<>: 1 V<>:
tV<< 3-pole elapsed tV<< 3p elaps. trans
t
[ 010 229 ] [ 010 230 ]
V<>: V<>:
tV<<< elapsed 1
tV<<< elaps.transien
t
[ 010 237 ] [ 010 238 ]
V<>: V<>:
tV<<< 3-pole elapsed 1
tV<<< 3p elaps.trans
t
[ 010 239 ] [ 010 240 ]
V<>:
≥1 tV</<</<<< el.trans
[ 042 007 ]
V<>:
Parameter tTransient pulse PSx
Fig. 3-332: Undervoltage monitoring, Part 4: Transient pulse for stages V</<</<<<.
MAIN:
Phase sequence
[ 010 049 ]
MAIN:
Protection active & C
306 001
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
fnom
V̲A-G V<>:
V̲pos
305 250
fnom
V̲B-G V̲pos
fnom
V̲C-G
V̲neg V<>:
V̲neg
305 251
D5Z50AYB
Fig. 3-333: Determination of positive- and negative-sequence voltages. (Note: The previous terminology for
MAIN: Phase sequence was MAIN: Rotary field.)
V<>: V<>:
Blocking tVpos> EXT Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ 041 090 ] [ * ]
V<>: V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx tVpos> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
Vpos> PSx
[ * ]
V<>: V<>:
V̲pos tVpos> elapsed
305 250 [ 042 012 ]
V<>:
Starting Vpos>
V<>:
Blocking tVpos>> EXT [ 042 010 ]
[ 041 091 ]
V<>:
tVpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vpos>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVpos>> elapsed
[ 042 013 ]
V<>:
Starting Vpos>>
V<>:
Blocking tVpos< EXT [ 042 011 ]
[ 041 092 ] V<>:
tVpos< PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V< ready
460 506
V<>: V<>:
Vpos< PSx tVpos< elapsed
[ * ] [ 042 016 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<
[ 042 014 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< PSx
V<>: [ * ]
Blocking tVpos<< EXT V<>:
[ 041 093 ] Fault Vpos<
[ 041 113 ]
V<>:
tVpos<< elapsed
[ 042 017 ]
V<>:
Vpos<< PSx
[ * ] Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vpos<<
[ 042 015 ]
V<>:
Fault Vpos<<
[ 041 114 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ] V<>:
Parameter V<>: V<>: tVpos< elaps. trans.
Vpos> PSx tVpos> PSx [ 042 026 ]
set 1 076 015 076 017
set 2 077 015 077 017 V<>:
tVpos<< elaps.trans.
set 3 078 015 078 017 [ 042 027 ]
set 4 079 015 079 017
19Z80AZA
V<>:
Blocking tVneg> EXT
[ 041 094 ]
V<>:
V<>: tVneg> PSx
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx [ * ]
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
V<>: tVneg> elapsed
V̲neg
305 251 [ 042 021 ]
V<>: V<>:
Blocking tVneg>> EXT Starting Vneg>
[ 041 095 ] [ 042 019 ]
V<>:
tVneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
Vneg>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVneg>> elapsed
[ 042 022 ]
V<>:
Starting Vneg>>
[ 042 020 ]
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:
Vneg> PSx tVneg> PSx Vneg>> PSx tVneg>> PSx Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
set 1 076 023 076 025 076 024 076 026 076 049
set 2 077 023 077 025 077 024 077 026 077 049
set 3 078 023 078 025 078 024 078 026 078 049
set 4 079 023 079 025 079 024 079 026 079 049
D5Z52BAA
V<>:
Evaluation VNG PSx
[ * ]
∑
V̲A-G
+
V̲B-G 1
+
V̲C-G
+ 2
1 ... 2 V<>:
V̲NG
V̲N-G
1: Calculated
2: Measured
V<>:
Parameter Evaluation VNG PSx
Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P433 from the three phase-to-ground
voltages or the neutral-point displacement voltage formed externally via the
fourth voltage measuring input, for example the neutral-point displacement
voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers (see
Section 3.12, (p. 3-76)).
The neutral-point displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it
exceeds set thresholds. This monitoring can be based either on the (Fourier-
filtered) fundamental or on the r.m.s. value. This can be set independently for
each stage with the settings V<>: Meas . V alu e VNG> PSx and V<>: M ea s.
Va lue V NG>>PSx.
The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately
configured binary signal inputs.
V<>:
Blocking tVNG> EXT
[ 041 072 ]
↗ V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ] V<>:
tVNG> PSx
V<>: [ * ]
Meas. Value VNG> PSx
[ * ]
c
V<>:
MAIN: & c VNG> PSx
Protection active [ * ]
V<>:
Ready
t 0 V<>:
[ 042 003 ] tVNG> elapsed
[ 041 045 ]
V<>:
Blocking tVNG>> EXT V<>:
[ 041 073 ] Starting VNG>
[ 041 044 ]
V<>:
tVNG>> PSx
V<>: [ * ]
Meas. Value VNG>>PSx
[ * ]
c
V<>:
c VNG>> PSx
[ * ]
t 0 V<>:
V<>: tVNG>> elapsed
V̲NG
[ 041 046 ]
V<>:
Starting VNG>>
[ 042 008 ]
t 0
V̲ref V<>:
tVref> elapsed
[ 007 047 ]
V<>:
V<>: Starting Vref>
Blocking tVref>> EXT [ 007 051 ]
[ 007 037 ]
V<>:
tVref>> PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
C Vref>> PSx C
[ * ]
t 0
V<>:
tVref>> elapsed
[ 007 048 ]
V<>: V<>:
Block. tVref>>> EXT Starting Vref>>
[ 010 248 ] [ 007 052 ]
V<>:
tVref>>> PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: V<>:
Protection active C Vref>>> PSx C
306 001
[ * ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
t 0
V<>:
tVref>>> elapsed
[ 010 242 ]
V<>:
[Starting
010 241 Vref>>>
]
Parameter V<>:
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
set 1 076 049
set 2 077 049
set 3 078 049
set 4 079 049
V<>:
Blocking tVref< EXT
[ 007 039 ]
V<>:
V<>: tVref< PSx
Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
C Vref< PSx C V<>:
tVref< elapsed
[ * ] [ 007 053 ]
V̲ref V<>:
Fault Vref<
[ 007 061 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<
[ 007 062 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Block. tVref<<< EXT V<>:
[ 010 249 ] Starting Vref<<
[ 007 056 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< PSx
V<>:
[ * ] tVref<< elapsed
[ 007 054 ]
MAIN: V<>:
Protection active Vref<<< PSx
306 001
C C
[ * ]
MCMON:
M.circ. Vref faulty
[ 007 213 ]
V<>:
Fault Vref<<<
[ 011 135 ]
Setting(s) blocked
V<>:
Starting Vref<<<
[ 010 243 ]
V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tVref< elaps. trans.
[ 007 057 ]
V<>:
tVref<< elaps.trans.
[ 007 060 ]
V<>:
tVref<<< elaps.trans
[ 010 245 ]
Parameter V<>: V<>:
tTransient pulse PSx Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx V<>:
tVref</<</<<< el.tr.
set 1 076 029 076 049 [ 007 063 ]
set 2 077 029 077 049
set 3 078 029 078 049
set 4 079 029 079 049
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
1 f<>:
& Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
1 Not ready
0
[ 042 140 ]
1
f<>:
0: No & Ready
1: Yes [ 042 101 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
Parameter Enable PSx
f<
Δf
Δt Δt
t
Start Δt Start Δt
Function blocked
Trip Δf/Δt
F5Z0128C
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-
shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for “underfrequency monitoring”.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within
the set time Δt, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t [ * ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
f<>: tf1 PSx
Ready [ * ]
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
f<>: Trip signal f1
Blocked by V< [ 042 111 ]
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas df/dt
305 726
f<>:
Start. cond. met Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
f> Setting error f<>
f<>: [ 098 028 ]
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
47Z0152A
Pf<:
General enable USER
[ 015 202]
0
Pf<:
1 Enabled
[ 016 052]
0: No
1: Yes
Pf<:
Enable PSx
[*]
0 Parameter Pf<:
Enable PSx
1 set 1 015 206
0: No set 2 015 207
set 3 015 208
1: Yes
set 4 015 209
19Z8821A
⋮
Pf<:
f10 active
[ 016 089 ]
MCMON: ≥1
Meas.circ.V,I faulty
[ 037 020 ] Pf<:
& Ready
Pf<:
Blocked by V< [ 016 053 ]
[ 016 056 ]
Pf<:
Enabled
[ 016 052 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
19Z8822B
The frequency calculation depends on the measured voltages. The active power
calculation depends on the measured voltages and currents. Therefore the
function group Pf< can only be configured in devices with voltage and current
inputs.
Under certain conditions the Pf< will be blocked and the signal Pf<: Blocked
will be issued, provided that one of the following conditions is met:
● Frequency measurement is not possibe. Pf <: Blocked by V< is issued.
● A voltage or current measuring circuits defect has been identified (by
internal functions MCMON: Me as.circ. V,I faulty).
● No frequency stage has been activated.
Pf< protection can only start if the Pf< is ready. For the purpose the following
conditions need to be met simultaneously:
● Protection is activated (on).
● Pf< is enabled.
● Pf< is not blocked.
Q/S
Blocking
of Pf< trip
Sector angle
P P
G
Q Q
Imin
P/S
P P
G
Q Q
Sector angle
Pmin
19Z8824A
If the active power check generates a trip enabling decision then the starting of
the underfrequency stage triggers the timer stage (016 004) Pf<: tPF < PSx.
After the timer has elapsed the trip signal (016 059) Pf<: Tr ip signal Pf< is
issued. The timer stage can be blocked by the binary input signal (016 030)
Pf<: Bl ock ing tP F< EXT. Moreover, it is reset if the underfrequency decision
or the active power decision is dropped.
Pf<: Pf<:
Pf<: Imin PSx Pmin PSx
Ready c
[ * ] [ * ]
[ 016 053 ]
Pf<:
≥1 c Sector angle PSx
I̲A
[ * ]
I̲B
Q/S
Blocking
of Pf< trip
P P
G
Q Q
Imin
S̲ = P + jQ P/S
V̲A-G P P
G
V̲B-G Q
Sector angle
Q
V̲C-G Pmin
Pf<:
Blocking of Pf< trip Blocked by Pmin
Pf<: [ 016 057 ]
Pmin PSx
[ * ] ≥1
↗ Blocked
◄
c
Pf<:
& Starting Pf<
↗ active stage fx
[ 016 058 ]
fmeas
Pf<:
Pf<: tPF< PSx
Blocking tPF< EXT c
[ * ]
[ 016 030 ]
t 0 Pf<:
Trip signal Pf<
[ 016 059 ]
P<>:
General enable USER
[ 014 220 ]
0: No
1: Yes
P<>:
Enabled PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Enabled
0 [ 036 250 ]
1
Parameter P<>:
0: No Enabled PSx
1: Yes set 1 014 252
set 2 014 253
set 3 014 254
set 4 014 255
45Z5051A
P<>:
Enabled
[ 036 250 ]
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ]
fnom
I̲A P<>:
P
402 631
fnom
I̲B
fnom
I̲C
fnom
V̲A-G
fnom
V̲B-G
fnom
V̲C-G
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P-
402 634
P<>:
Q
402 632
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q-
402 636
45Z5052A
P<>:
Operate delay P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
P<>: Release delay P> PSx
Blocking tP> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 082 ]
P<>: P<>:
P> PSx Signal P> delayed
[ 035 087 ]
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P> PSx
[ * ]
P<>: P<>:
P Starting P>
402 631 [ 035 086 ]
P<>:
Operate delay P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay P>>PSx
P<>:
Blocking tP>> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 083 ]
P<>: P<>:
P>> PSx Signal P>> delayed
[ * ] [ 035 090 ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio P>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
Fig. 3-349: Active power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
P<>:
Direction P> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
P<>: Trip signal P>
Signal P> delayed [ 035 088 ]
[ 035 087 ]
P<>:
P+
402 633
P<>:
P-
402 634
P<>:
Direction P>> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
P<>: Trip signal P>>
Signal P>> delayed [ 035 091 ]
[ 035 090 ]
45Z5054A
Fig. 3-350: Direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when the set thresholds are
exceeded.
P<>:
Operate delay Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q> PSx
P<>:
Blocking tQ> EXT [ * ]
[ 035 084 ]
P<>: P<>:
Q> PSx Signal Q> delayed
[ * ] [ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q> PSx
[ * ]
P<>: P<>:
Q Starting Q>
402 632 [ 035 092 ]
P<>:
Operate delay Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Release delay Q>>PSx
P<>: [ * ]
Blocking tQ>> EXT
[ 035 085 ]
P<>:
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed
Q>> PSx
[ 035 096 ]
[ * ]
P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
19Z5270A
Fig. 3-351: Reactive power monitoring when the set thresholds are exceeded.
P<>:
Direction Q> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
P<>: Trip signal Q>
Signal Q> delayed [ 035 094 ]
[ 035 093 ]
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q-
402 636
P<>:
Direction Q>> PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
P<>: Trip signal Q>>
Signal Q>> delayed [ 035 097 ]
[ 035 096 ]
45Z5056A
Fig. 3-352: The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when the set thresholds
are exceeded.
3.44.8 Active Power Monitoring when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds
P<>:
Blocking tP< EXT
[ 035 050 ]
P<>:
P< PSx
P<>:
[ * ] Operate delay P< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: P<>:
Diseng. ratio P< PSx Release delay P< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>: P<>:
P Signal P< delayed
402 631 [ 035 055 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>:
& Fault P<
P<>: [ 035 057 ]
Blocking tP<< EXT &
[ 035 051 ]
P<>:
P<< PSx P<>:
[ * ] Operate delay P<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>: P<>:
Diseng.ratio P<< PSx Release delay P<<PSx
[ * ]
C [ * ]
P<>:
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
Fault P<<
& [ 035 063 ]
&
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ]
P<>:
tP<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 062 ]
P<>:
tP</tP<< elaps.trans
[ 035 178 ]
Fig. 3-353: Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
The P433 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it
falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set. When the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The
starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
3.44.9 Active Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
P<>:
Direction P< PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional P<>:
& Trip signal P<
P<>: & [ 035 058 ]
Signal P< delayed
[ 035 055 ]
&
&
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
[ 035 056 ] & P<>:
& Trip signal P< trans
[ 035 059 ]
P<>:
P+ 402 633
&
P<>:
P- 402 634
&
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
Direction P<< PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
& Trip signal P<<
P<>: & [ 035 064 ]
Signal P<< delayed
[ 035 061 ]
&
&
&
Fig. 3-354: The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
The P433 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a
forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-)
directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is
triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-
directional decision.
P<>:
Starting P<
035 054
P<>:
Operate delay P< PSx
*
P<>:
Release delay P< PSx
*
2
P<>:
Signal P< delayed
035 055
P<>:
tP< elapsed trans.
035 056 3
P<>:
Fault P<
035 057
1 2 3
19Z5278A
Fig. 3-355: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring.
P<>:
Blocking tQ< EXT
[ 035 052 ]
P<>:
Q< PSx P<>:
[ * ] Operate delay Q< PSx
[ * ]
P<>: P<>:
Diseng. ratio Q< PSx Release delay Q< PSx
C
[ * ] [ * ]
P<>:
P<>: Signal Q< delayed
Q
402 632 [ 035 067 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>:
& Fault Q<
P<>: [ 035 069 ]
Blocking tQ<< EXT &
[ 035 053 ]
P<>:
Q<< PSx P<>:
[ * ] Operate delay Q<<PSx
[ * ]
P<>:
P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx
Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx
[ * ] C [ * ]
P<>:
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
Setting(s) blocked
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>:
& Fault Q<<
[ 035 049 ]
&
P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx P<>:
tTransient pulse PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
[ 035 068 ]
P<>:
tQ<< elapsed trans.
[ 035 016 ]
P<>:
Parameter P<>: P<>: P<>: P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans
Q< PSx Diseng. ratio Q< PSx Operate delay Q< PSx Release delay Q< PSx [ 035 179 ]
set 1 018 035 018 044 018 052 018 056
set 2 018 036 018 045 018 053 018 057
set 3 018 037 018 046 018 054 018 058
set 4 018 038 018 047 018 055 018 059
Fig. 3-356: Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds.
The P433 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
falls below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be
set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The
starting signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
3.44.11 Reactive Power Direction when Values Fall Below Set Thresholds
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>:
Direction Q< PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
P<>:
3: Non-directional Trip signal Q<
P<>: &
[ 035 155 ]
Signal Q< delayed &
[ 035 067 ]
&
&
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
P<>:
[ 035 068 ] & Trip sig. Q< trans.
& [ 035 156 ]
P<>:
Q+
402 635 &
P<>:
Q-
402 636
&
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>:
Direction Q<< PSx
[ * ]
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
P<>:
& Trip signal Q<<
[ 035 176 ]
P<>: &
Signal Q<< delayed
[ 035 011 ]
&
&
P<>:
P<>: & Trip sig. Q<< trans.
tQ<< elapsed trans. &
[ 035 177 ]
[ 035 016 ]
&
Fig. 3-357: Direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set
thresholds.
The P433 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a
forward-directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward- (reverse-)
directional decision results. A setting determines whether a trip signal is
triggered by a forward-directional, a backward- (reverse-) directional or a non-
directional decision.
P<>:
Starting Q<
035 066
P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx
*
P<>:
Release delay Q< PSx
*
2
P<>:
Signal Q< delayed
035 067
P<>:
tQ< elapsed trans.
035 068 3
P<>:
Fault Q<
035 069
1 2 3
Parameter P<>: P<>: P<>:
Operate delay Q< PSx Release delay Q< PSx tTransient pulse PSx
set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246
set 2 018 053 018 057 018 247
set 3 018 054 018 058 018 248
set 4 018 055 018 059 018 249
19Z5279A
Fig. 3-358: Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
P<>:
& Direction P forw.
P<>: [ 035 181 ]
Starting P>
[ 035 086 ]
P<>:
Starting P>>
[ 035 089 ]
P<>:
Starting P<
[ 035 054 ]
P<>:
Starting P<<
[ 035 060 ]
P<>:
& Direction P backw.
P<>: [ 035 191 ]
P+
402 633
P<>:
P-
402 634
19Z5274B
Fig. 3-359: Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring.
P<>:
Q+
402 635
P<>:
Q-
402 636
P<>:
Direction Q forw.
&
P<>: [ 035 193 ]
Starting Q>
[ 035 092 ]
P<>:
Starting Q>>
[ 035 095 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<
[ 035 066 ]
P<>:
Starting Q<<
[ 035 010 ]
P<>:
& Direction Q backw.
[ 035 194 ]
Apparent power S
> 0,010 Snom
19Z5275B
Fig. 3-360: Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring.
QV:
General enable USER
[ 013 147 ]
0
QV:
1 Enabled
[ 013 181 ]
0: No
1: Yes
QV:
Enabled PSx
[*]
0 Parameter QV:
Enabled PSx
1 set 1 013 223
0: No set 2 013 224
set 3 013 225
1: Yes
set 4 013 226
19Z8811A
QV:
Blocking EXT
[ 013 149 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. A trig.
[ 041 027 ]
MAIN:
Rush restr. B trig.
[ 041 028 ]
QV:
Blocked
MAIN: [ 013 182 ]
Rush restr. C trig.
[ 041 029 ]
QV:
Enabled
[ 013 181 ] QV:
Ready
[ 013 183 ]
MCMON: QV:
Meas.circ.V,I faulty Enabled PSx
[ 037 020 ] [ 013 225 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
19Z8812A
Under certain conditions the QV will be blocked and the signal QV: Blocke d will
be issued, provided that one of the following conditions is met:
P P
19Z8814A
Reactive power is calculated based on all three phase currents and voltages. The
reactive power threshold and reactive power flow are monitored to determine
whether the reactive power is in operation area.
There are in total three conditions which must be present at the same time to
release the directional reactive power condition.
● At least one phase current exceeds QV : Imin PSx.
● The reactive power exceeds QV: Qmin P Sx.
● The angle of the apparent power is within the set operation direction.
(Power direction check see Section 10.2.6, (p. 10-7))
For forward directional setting:φ ≤ φS ≤ 180∘ − φ
QV: QV:
t1 PSx Min.dur.tr.cmd.1 PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
QV: t 0 QV:
Ready & t 0 Trip command t1
≥1
[ 013 183 ] [ 014 077 ]
QV: QV:
Starting QV Trip signal t1
[ 014 088 ] [ 014 075 ]
QV: QV:
t2 PSx Min.dur.tr.cmd.2 PSx
QV:
Starting Q direction [ * ] [ * ]
[ 014 074 ]
t 0 QV:
QV: t 0
Starting V< 3p ≥1 Trip command t2
[ 014 073 ] [ 014 078 ]
QV: QV:
Bl.Start. QV Trip signal t2
[ 014 076 ]
CBF:
General enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
CBF:
1 & Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
0: don't execute
1: execute
CBF: &
Disable EXT
[ 038 042 ]
CBF:
Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
47Z1138B
CBF: CBF:
Enabled Not ready
[ 040 055 ]
≥1
[ 040 025 ]
CBF:
&
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
≥1
CBF:
t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
blocked &
CBF:
t2
[ 022 166 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 022 171 ]
blocked
CBF:
Delay/CB sync.superv
[ 022 172 ]
blocked
19Z6130B
CBF:
I<
[ 022 160 ]
I̲A CBF:
Current flow A
[ 038 230 ]
I̲B CBF:
Current flow B
[ 038 231 ]
I̲C CBF:
Current flow C
[ 038 232 ]
CBF:
Current flow Phx
[ 038 233 ]
CBF:
Evaluation IN
[ 022 184 ]
0: Without
1: Calculated c1
2: Measured
c2
+
+ 1
CBF:
+ IN<
[ 022 180 ]
I̲N 2
≥1
1 ... 2 CBF:
Current flow N
[ 038 235 ]
CBF:
IN
460 394
64Z1103C
This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and
pole-selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values
with the set threshold value CBF : I<.
As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously
issue the phase selective signals CBF: Cu rre nt f low A, CBF: Current flow B,
CBF: Curre nt f low C and the multiple signal C BF: Cu rrent flow Phx.
Moreover, there is a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/
disabled. For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or
the value derived from the three phase currents may be used.
As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the
current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (CBF : C urr ent
flow N) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no
monitoring is carried out and the CBF: Cu rre nt f low N = No signal is issued
continuously.
≥1 & ≥1 CBF:
CB pos. implausible
& [ 038 210 ]
MAIN: &
CB closed A EXT
[ 031 029 ] &
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
CB closed C EXT
[ 031 031 ]
MAIN: ≥1
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
&
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB pos.sig. implaus.
[ 031 041 ] 47Z8831A
Trip signals included in MA IN: Ge n. trip com mand 1, which use CB status
signals in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter
C BF: Fct .assi gn m. CBAu x..
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available.
The P433 can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate
them:
● The open signal from the circuit breaker, MA IN: CB open 3p EXT
● The closed signal from the circuit breaker, MAIN: CB close d 3p EXT
● The phase-selective CB status signals
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the
respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. As a result,
the P433 will issue the C BF: CB pos. i mpl ausi bl e signal. The evaluation of
current criteria is not affected by this blocking.
The configuration or the CB status signals are considered not plausible, if:
● if at least one phase-selective CB status signal and a 3-pole CB status
signal (e.g. MAI N: C B cl ose d A E XT and MA IN : C B open 3p EXT)
have been assigned to binary inputs
● or if only one or two phase-selective CB status signals have been assigned
to binary inputs
● or if both MAI N: CB clos ed 3p EXT and MAIN: CB open 3p EX T have
been configured and the signal MAIN: CB pos.sig. implaus. is issued.
As an alternative the status signals from the external device may be used by the
P433. Assigning necessary for this is made with the parameters MAIN: Sig.
asg. CB open or MA IN : Si g.as si gn. C B cl ose. Status signals from external
devices are processed similarly to the MAIN: CB ope n 3p EXT and MAIN: CB
close d 3 p EXT CB status signals.
CBF:
Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
Startup “with no current”,
based on
Signal 1 auxiliary CB contacts.
Signal 2 m out of n
…
Signal 3
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked &
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: & ≥1
Gen. trip signal 1
[ 036 005 ]
MAIN:
Manual trip signal
[ 034 017 ] &
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx & ≥1
Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is
recognized as closed during a startup criterion. The following criteria are
evaluated as a startup criterion:
CBF: CBF:
Not ready c t1 3p
[ 040 025 ] [ 022 165 ]
CBF: CBF:
Startup 3p t 0 Trip signal t1
[ 038 211 ] [ 038 215 ]
CBF: CBF:
c t2 CB failure
[ 022 166 ] [ 036 017 ]
CBF:
t 0 Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
&
CBF:
CB faulty EXT
[ 038 234 ]
19Z6433A
CBF:
Min.dur. trip cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
MAIN: CBF:
Trip cmd. blocked t 0 Trip command t1
&
[ 021 013 ] [ 038 220 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t1
[ 038 215 ] CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
0
& S 1 1
1 R 1
CBF:
0: No Min.dur. trip cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
1: Yes
CBF:
t 0 Trip command t2
&
[ 038 224 ]
CBF:
Trip signal t2
[ 038 219 ]
CBF:
Latching trip cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
0 & S 1 1
1 R 1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Rset.latch.trip USER
[ 021 005 ]
1 MAIN:
1 Latch. trip c. reset
0: don't execute [ 040 139 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset latch.trip EXT
[ 040 138 ]
43Z6362A
While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages
available, the user can set minimum time-delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB
failure protection function, will operate in latching mode. The corresponding trip
command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating
parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
CBF:
Delay/starting trig.
[ 022 155 ]
MAIN: t 0 CBF:
General starting & Trip signal
[ 036 000 ] [ 040 026 ]
CBF: CBF:
Starting trig. EXT Starting
[ 038 016 ] [ 038 021 ]
45Z8037A
The signal CBF: S tar tin g will be issued when the signal CBF: Start ing tr ig.
EXT is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a
general starting condition is present. The signal CBF: Delay /st art in g t rig. will
be issued after timer stage C BF: Trip s ign al. has elapsed.
CBF: CBF:
CB pos. implausible Delay/fault beh. CB
[ 038 210 ]
CBF: [ 022 171 ]
I<
[ 022 160 ]
t 0 CBF:
& Fault behind CB
[ 038 225 ]
I̲A &
I̲B
I̲C
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
MAIN:
CB closed 3p EXT
[ 036 051 ]
19Z6136D
CBF:
CB pos. implausible
[ 038 210 ]
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT ≥1
[ 031 028 ] CBF:
MAIN: Delay/CB sync.superv
CB closed 3p EXT [ 022 172 ]
[ 036 051 ]
CBF:
CBF: t 0 TripSig CBsync.super
I< & [ 038 226 ]
[ 022 160 ]
I̲A
≥1
I̲B
I̲C
<3
CBF:
CBsync.superv A open
& [ 038 227 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv B open
& [ 038 228 ]
CBF:
CBsync.superv C open
& [ 038 229 ]
19Z6137B
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
CBM:
1 Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404A
3.47.2 Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of
methods:
● Monitoring the mechanical switching operations
● Accumulating ruptured current values
● Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
● Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current
values
● Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB
wear characteristic.
100000
Number of permissible CB operations
10000
1000
100
10
0.1 1 10 100
Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN
The knee points in Fig. 3-376, (p. 3-444) are necessary to set the wear
characteristic for the circuit breaker:
● The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM: Inom,CB) and the permitted
number of CB operations at nominal current (CBM: Perm. CB op.
Inom,C B)
● The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM: Med. curr. Itrip ,CB)
and the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current
(CBM: Pe rm. C B op. Im e d,C B)
● The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (CBM: Max. curr.
I trip,C B) and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum
ruptured current (CBM: Pe rm. CB op. Imax,CB)
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. A knee
point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters
for the knee point is set to Blocked.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that
the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously
descending). When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible
according to the characteristic the P433 will issue an error message and block
circuit breaker monitoring.
Where:
● Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB
● n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
● Id,CB: Ruptured current
● n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
● nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
before disconnection
● nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection
the maximum cycle time has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB
tripping are canceled and the CBM: tmax> A (CBM: tmax> B, CBM: tmax>
C) signal is issued.
CBM:
Sig. asg. trip cmd.
[ 022 152 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
CBM:
Selected signal internal trip cmd.
310 025
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
19Z6124B
The external devices' “open” state signal may be linked to the control function's
“open” state signal by setting the CBM: Si g. as g. tr ip cmd.. parameter so
that the function in the P433 will be triggered by CB auxiliary contacts.
MAIN:
Sig. asg. CB open
[ 021 017 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
MAIN:
CB open 3p EXT
[ 031 028 ]
19Z6125C
20,00
15,00
10,00
5,00
0,00
-5,00
-10,00
-15,00
-20,00
Calculating the
current-time integral
19Z6126A
Fig. 3-379: Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1.
MAIN:
Protection active & C
306 001
CBM: CBM:
Enabled Operating mode
[ 044 130 ] [ 022 007 ]
C
1
&
CBM:
2 C Inom,CB
& [ 022 012 ]
MAIN:
3
& Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
1: With trip cmd. only
CBM:
Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
2: With CB sig.EXT only [ 022 013 ]
3: CB sig. EXT or trip CBM:
CBM: Med. curr. Itrip,CB
Blocked
[ 044 199 ] [ 022 014 ]
CBM: CBM:
internal trip cmd. Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
310 025 [ 022 015 ]
CBM:
Internal CB trip CBM:
310 030
Max. curr. Itrip,CB
[ 022 016 ]
fnom
I_x CBM:
Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM:
Corr. acquis. time
[ 022 018 ]
C
CBM:
Corr. acqu.time trip
CBM: [ 007 249 ]
Set No. CB oper. A
[ * ]
CBM: CBM:
Set remain. CB op. A Itrip A
[ * ] R [ * ]
CBM:
Set ΣItrip A CBM:
I*t A
[ * ] R [ * ]
CBM:
Set ΣItrip**2 A CBM:
[ * ] Itrip,prim A
R [ * ]
CBM:
Set ΣI*t A
CBM:
[ * ] Itrip**2 A
R [ * ]
CBM:
ΣItrip A
S [ * ]
CBM:
ΣItrip**2 A
S [ * ]
CBM:
ΣI*t A
S [ * ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
S [ * ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
S [ * ]
CBM:
Initialize values
[ 003 011 ]
CBM:
Reset meas.val. USER
[ 003 013 ]
A / IA 022 131 022 134 022 137 022 140 022 143 008 011 008 014
B / IB 022 132 022 135 022 138 022 141 022 144 008 012 008 015
C / IC 022 133 022 136 022 139 022 142 022 145 008 013 008 016
B / IB 009 048 009 062 009 213 009 052 009 073 009 078 009 088
C / IC 009 049 009 063 009 214 009 053 009 076 009 079 009 089
52Z0145A
been replaced. The available interfaces on the P433 may be used to set
measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function.
Only such measured values and counter values in the P433 may be set to new
values that do not have their default values set to Blocked.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to Blocked.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P433 to
Blocked.
CBM:
C Remain No. CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM: CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. C
[ 008 016 ]
19Z6121B
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P433's counter for
the number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is
displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. CB
ope rat ions >. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations
performed exceed this threshold.
CBM:
C No. CB operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM: CBM:
No. of CB oper. A Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. C
[ 008 013 ]
19Z6122B
CBM: CBM:
General enable USER Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
[ 022 010 ]
&
CBM:
Blocking EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM:
Blocking USER
[ 022 150 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346B
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0
LIMIT:
1 Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT: LIMIT:
I> tI>
[ 014 004 ] [ 014 031 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT:
tI> elapsed
[ 040 220 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
I̲A I>> tI>>
[ 014 020 ] [ 014 032 ]
I̲B
I̲C
LIMIT:
I̲max tI>> elapsed
[ 040 221 ]
I̲min
LIMIT: LIMIT:
I< tI<
[ 014 021 ] [ 014 033 ]
LIMIT:
tI< elapsed
[ 040 222 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
I<< tI<<
[ 014 022 ] [ 014 034 ]
LIMIT:
tI<< elapsed
[ 040 223 ]
47Z0153A
Fig. 3-384: Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current.
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT:
C VPP> tVPP>
[ 040 074 ] &
[ 014 027 ] [ 014 039 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
t 0 LIMIT:
tVPP> elapsed
[ 040 228 ]
V̲C-G
t 0 LIMIT:
V̲PP,max tVPP>> elapsed
[ 040 229 ]
V̲PP,min
LIMIT: LIMIT:
C VPP< tVPP<
[ 014 029 ] [ 014 041 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tVPP< elapsed
[ 040 230 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
C VPP<< tVPP<<
[ 014 030 ] [ 014 042 ]
t 0
LIMIT:
tVPP<< elapsed
[ 040 231 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
C VPG> tVPG>
[ 014 023 ] [ 014 035 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tVPG> elapsed
[ 040 224 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
V̲PG,max tVPG>> elapsed
[ 040 225 ]
V̲PG,min
LIMIT: LIMIT:
C VPG< tVPG<
[ 014 025 ] [ 014 037 ]
t 0
LIMIT:
tVPG< elapsed
[ 040 226 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
C VPG<< tVPG<<
[ 014 026 ] [ 014 038 ]
t 0 LIMIT:
tVPG<< elapsed
[ 040 227 ]
47Z0154B
Fig. 3-385: Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum
phase-to-ground voltage.
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
LIMIT: LIMIT:
VNG> tVNG>
[ 014 043 ] [ 014 045 ]
V̲A-G
LIMIT:
V̲B-G tVNG> elapsed
[ 040 168 ]
V̲C-G
LIMIT: LIMIT:
VNG>> tVNG>>
[ 014 044 ] [ 014 046 ]
LIMIT:
tVNG>> elapsed
[ 040 169 ]
S8Z52G8A
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT: LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] IDC,lin> tIDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ] [ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: LIMIT:
Curr. IDC,lin p.u. tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 004 136 ] [ 040 182 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin>> tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ] [ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin< tIDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ] [ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin<< tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ] [ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
S8Z52G6A
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT: LIMIT:
MAIN: Vref> tVref>
Device on-line [ 042 144 ] [ 042 148 ]
[ 003 030 ]
1: Yes (= on)
LIMIT:
tVref> elapsed
[ 042 152 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Vref>> tVref>>
[ 042 145 ] [ 042 149 ]
LIMIT:
Vref tVref>> elapsed
[ 042 153 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Vref< tVref<
[ 042 146 ] [ 042 150 ]
LIMIT:
tVref< elapsed
[ 042 154 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Vref<< tVref<<
[ 042 147 ] [ 042 151 ]
LIMIT:
tVref<< elapsed
[ 042 155 ]
19Z5215A
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: LIMIT:
T> tT>
[ 014 100 ] [ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection
306 active
001
MEASI:
Temperature LIMIT:
[ 004 133 ] tT> elapsed
[ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T>> tT>>
[ 014 101 ] [ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T< tT<
[ 014 105 ] [ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T<< tT<<
[ 014 106 ] [ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
19Z5212A
TRMON:
General enable USER
[ 018 040 ]
1 c
0: No
1: Yes
TRMON: TRMON:
Insul. Alarm 1 EXT Insul. Alarm 1
[ 016 241 ] [ 016 250 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Alarm 1 EXT Buchholz Alarm 1
[ 016 242 ] [ 016 251 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Trip 1 EXT Buchholz Trip 1
[ 016 243 ] [ 016 252 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Insul. Alarm 2 EXT Insul. Alarm 2
[ 016 244 ] [ 016 253 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Alarm 2 EXT Buchholz Alarm 2
[ 016 245 ] [ 016 254 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Trip 2 EXT Buchholz Trip 2
[ 016 246 ] [ 016 255 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Insul. Alarm 3 EXT Insul. Alarm 3
[ 016 247 ] [ 018 007 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Alarm 3 EXT Buchholz Alarm 3
[ 016 248 ] [ 018 016 ]
TRMON: TRMON:
Buchholz Trip 3 EXT Buchholz Trip 3
[ 016 249 ] [ 018 039 ]
49Z8942A
Binary signals in the P433 may be linked by logical “OR” or “AND” operations
with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct.assignm.
outp. 1 (or LOGIC : F ct.as s ignm . outp. 2 to L OGIC : Fct.assignm. outp .
32, or LOG_2: Fct.assi gnm. ou tp. 1 to L O G_2 : F ct .assignm. outp. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P433, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGI C: Inpu t 01 EXT (or LOGIC: Input 0 2 EXT, …,
LOGIC : I np ut 4 0 EXT) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGIC : Set 1 EXT (or LOGI C: Set 2 E XT, …, LOGIC: Set 8 EXT) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGIC : Se t 1 E XT if the corresponding reset input LOGIC: Reset 1 EX T)
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as “Logic externally set”. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of “1”), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
WARNING
When using the programmable logic, the user must carry out a functional
type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant protection/control
application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for
the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during startup of the P433, during operation and when there is a
fault (blocking of the P433) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
LOGIC:
Address 036 051 1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
Address 036 059
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
D5Z52FAB
Fig. 3-391: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
LOGIC:
General enable USER
LOGIC:
[ 031 099 ] Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: LOGIC:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001
[ 030 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT Op. mode t output 1
[ 034 000 ] [ 030 001 ]
0
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ] 1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set 4
[ 034 067 ]
5
0 5
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ] 0: Without timer stage
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
1: Oper./releas.delay
[ 030 002 ]
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
LOGIC: LOGIC:
1 set externally Time t2 output 1
[ 034 075 ] 3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally LOGIC:
[ 034 082 ] Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-392: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
LOG_2:
General enable USER
LOG_2:
[ 011 137 ] Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0: No
1: Yes LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN: LOG_2:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001 [ 050 000 ] 0
1
Signal 1 2
3
Signal 2
4
Signal 3 5
0 5
Signal n
0: Without timer stage
LOG_2:
1: Oper./releas.delay Time t1 output 1
2: Oper.del./puls.dur. [ 050 002 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
LOG_2:
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt Time t2 output 1
5: Minimum time [ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-393: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-394, (p. 3-464) to
Fig. 3-398, (p. 3-466)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P433 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the “0” logic level.
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-394: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-395: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-396: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t1 t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-397: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-398: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Signal 1 EXT
Address AAA AAA
LOGIC: [ AAA AAA ]
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Signal 2 EXT
Address BBB BBB
[ BBB BBB ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-399: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
MAIN:
Type of bay
[ 220 000 ]
MAIN:
Auto-assignment I/O
[ 221 065 ]
BB1
Q0
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
19Z50AQA
The bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units, an automated
I/O assignment and the system/bay interlocking equations for all required
switchgear units. Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1) provides a description of all
bay types, which are pre-defined (generally for all Easergy MiCOM 30 devices)
and therefore immediately available.
The selection of a bay type can be done with the parameter (220 000)
MAIN : Type of bay. If the user tries to select a non-existing ID, then the
selection will be rejected and an error message “Signal from device: Bay type not
assigned (0x8073)” will be reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P433 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. This automatic assignment is defined via the parameter
MAIN: Aut o-assig nmen t I/O.
The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in
the List of Bay Types (Vol. 2, Chapter A5, (p. A5-1)).
MAIN:
Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
[ 221 057 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
...
Signal n
MAIN:
Inp.asg.interl.deact
[ 221 007 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
SI active USER
[ 221 002 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
0 [ 221 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
BI active USER
[ 221 003 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
0 [ 221 001 ]
0: No
1: Yes
49Z88ABC
Fig. 3-401: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the
interlocks.
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control
functions of the P433, the P433 first checks whether the switch command may be
executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has
been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are
defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is
subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without
station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled
for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station
interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and
each control direction.
The bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This cancellation is effective for all of the
operating modes “Local”, “Remote” and “Remote & Local” (setting LOC : F ct .
assign. L /R key = R & L <-> L). In other words, the functionality of the binary
input for cancelling the bay and station interlocks is independent of the operating
mode of the control point for switching between local and remote control.
ILOCK:
Rset ILOCK violation
[ 221 123 ]
0 t
DEV01: ≥1 ≥1 MAIN:
Open cmd. rejection Interlock equ. viol.
⋮ [ 221 018 ]
DEVxx:
Open cmd. rejection
DEV01: ≥1
Close cmd. rejection
⋮
DEVxx:
Close cmd. rejection
19Z83ADA
Cmd start:
Internal no
Command
parameter rejected.
check OK?
yes
no
Interlocking Command
check OK? rejected.
yes
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
Switch.device closed
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. Interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
c
◄
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
t 0
&
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
& ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
Control state
0: Intermediate pos. [ 210 018 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position 19Z50AJB
Fig. 3-404: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units.
monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is
issued.
If DEV01: Inte rm. pos. s uppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swi tch. de vice ope n, DEV 01: Swit ch. device closed or
D EV01: Dev. In term./f l t.pos.
The signal “Faulty position” is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have
not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for
running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAI N: D elay
Ma n.Op.S upe rv. have elapsed. If D EV 01: Stat.ind.in term. pos. is set to
Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs
will be signaled.
LOC:
Loc.acc.block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC:
Return t. illum. trg
305 550
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
DEV01
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
MAIN:
Electrical control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
LOC:
Rem.acc.block.active
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
COMM1:
Open command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Close command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
MAIN:
307 012
End command
306 028
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
COMM1:
Motor rel. mon. trg. 307 011
[ --- --- ]
1) Keys, local control
19Z50AAA
Note that the front panel HMI on the P433 does not feature specific keys for
switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made, then this
would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this
example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y. See Section 6.9, (p. 6-11),
particularly Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-14).
For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the
communication interface, the control commands “Open” or “Close” will also
address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
DEV01:
Open request
DEV01:
Close request
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
[ 210 041 ]
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
⋮
ILOCK:
Output 32
[ 250 063 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI open
Output 01 & ≥1
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. &
DEV01:
[ 221 001 ] Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
[ 210 042 ] & ≥1 DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act. ≥1
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI close
Output 02 & ≥1
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl ≥1
[ 210 025 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes & ≥1 DEV01:
Close cmd. rejection
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int. ≥1
[ 210 026 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI open
[ 210 039 ]
ILOCK:
Output 03 &
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
[ 210 040 ]
ILOCK:
Output 04 &
&
&
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Enable SI Close 19Z50AEB
Fig. 3-406: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching
commands by the bay interlock function.
3.51.6.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005 COMM1:
Open request DEV01
MAIN:
[ --- --- ]
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ] DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
0
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: COMM1:
Enable SI open DEV01 Close request DEV01
[ --- --- ] [ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Enabl.SI close DEV01
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AFA
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.1
[ 210 021 ]
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
0
DEV01:
1 Protection trip cmd.
307 013
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 1
[ 036 071 ]
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.2
[ 210 022 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Gen. trip command 2
[ 036 022 ]
DEV01:
With close cmd./prot
[ 210 023 ]
1 DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
D3Z75FNA
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01:
Oper. mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
1 & 1
t
2
& 1
t
3
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
& 1
t
& 1
t DEV01:
MAIN: ≥1 Open command
Device on-line [ 210 028 ]
&
[ 003 030 ]
DEV01:
↗ 0: No (= off) & ≥1 Close command
& [ 210 029 ]
MAIN:
Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. ≥1
[ 221 001 ]
&
DEV01:
Enable BI open
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
DEV01:
Open request
&
≥1
&
DEV01:
Enable BI close
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
DEV01: & ≥1
Close request
ASC:
AC effect. for DEV01
&
ASC:
Close enable DEV01 19Z81AGB
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D EV 0 1: Ope r. mode cmd.) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or
according to time control.
When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter
AS C: Syst em int egrat . P Sx is set to Autom.synchr.control a “Close” request
will automatically issue a “Close” command for the circuit breaker after a close
enable was issued by the ASC.
DEV01: c
Function group DEV01
[ 210 047 ]
DEV01:
Block cmd open
[ 218 120 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
Signal n 460 513
Selected signal
DEV01:
Block cmd close
[ 218 160 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
Signal n 460 514
Selected signal
19Z8103A
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
Switch.device closed
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. Interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
≥1 DEV01:
End open command
c
≥1 DEV01:
◄ End close command
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
◄ ◄
MAIN: t 0
Direct motor control & ≥1 ≥1
DEV01: &
Open command &
DEV01:
[ 210 028 ] Switch. device runn.
DEV01: &
Close command DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 029 ]
& [ 210 027 ]
DEV01:
Start runn.time mon.
& & ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
DEV01: Control state
StartCmdTime superv. [ 210 018 ]
0: Intermediate pos.
[ 210 007 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
19Z80AKB
After sending an Open / Close command, running time monitoring for the
switchgear unit is started.
The P433 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position
within a period of time that can be configured via DEV0 1: StartC mdTime
superv . (for DEV01, respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). If
the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by
the signal MA IN : Startcmdti me e xcee d.. In case of a switchgear unit for
which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position (for example a
Circuit Breaker) it is recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the
parameter to Blocked.
Moreover, the P433 expects a status signal – “Open” or “Closed” to be issued by
the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P433, which can be set to
debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.54.1.1, (p. 3-500)).
For the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the
switchgear unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the
signal “Intermediate position” is issued.
If DEV01: Inte rm. pos. s uppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swi tch. de vice ope n, DEV 01: Swit ch. device closed or
D EV01: Dev. In term./f l t.pos.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or
“Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. If DE V0 1: Stat .in d.in ter m. pos. is
set to Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and
there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary
inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to No) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or
‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-405, (p. 3-476)).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to Yes) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination
command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is
active.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
3
1
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
1 3 4
10 ms DEV01: DEV01:
Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5201B
Fig. 3-412: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
DEV01:
3
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
1 3
10 ms DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
19Z5202B
Fig. 3-413: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01: + MAIN:
Start runn.time mon. No. motor drive op.
307 008
R [ 221 025 ]
MAIN:
Perm.No.mot.drive op
MAIN: [ 221 027 ]
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute COMP
MAIN: n
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED MAIN:
306 020 n>No. permiss. oper. Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
n=1
MAIN:
Mon.time mot.drives
[ 221 026 ]
MAIN:
Cool.time mot.drives t
[ 221 028 ]
19Z6417A
Fig. 3-414: Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control.
For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating
links or grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors
from overheating.
The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If
the number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set
limit, the signal MAI N: Mon. mot. drive s tr . is issued. For the duration of the
set cooling time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be
executed. Once the set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are
enabled again.
DEV01:
Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
m CT=m Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
Open command
[ 210 028 ] ≥1 +
DEV01:
Oper.count.limit
R
DEV01: [ 218 211 ]
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
COMP
[ 003 002 ] 1 ≥1 DEV01:
1: execute Warning op.count.
[ 219 081 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z8104A
The diagram above shows the example of function group DEV01. The logic,
however, is valid for all DEVxx with the appropriate parameters.
All Open and Close commands to the switchgear unit are counted. One counter
per DEVxx function group is available for this purpose.
Moreover, a limit value can optionally be set for the counter value. If the counter
value reaches the set limit a warning signal is issued. Due to safety reasons the
switchgear control will not be blocked when the set limit has been reached.
For further processing each of these fault signals may be configured to selection
parameters from the function groups LED (assignment to LED indicators), OUTP
(assignment to output relays), LOGIC (processing by the programmable logic
function), COMMx / IEC / GOOSE (signaling via the control system) or they may be
mapped to the signal panel as an alarm signal. Acknowledging from the local
control panel HMI is done by pressing the CLEAR (C) key.
If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time
period, the running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously
with this status signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as
with electromechanically operated switchgear units.
If the operating mode external termination contacts was selected (MA IN : W.
ex t. cmd . te rmin. is set to No) the “Close” command to the motor relay is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the “Open” or
“Closed” position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-405, (p. 3-476)). The monitoring time period is
again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor relay
and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also
terminated. The same is valid for the shunt windings.
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAI N: W . e xt . cmd. termi n. is set to Yes) the switching command to the
motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when a
termination command is issued while the set time period for running time
monitoring is active. With the setting MA IN: Ext.cmd.term. w/o PI = No, the
switching command is also terminated when either the “Open” or “Closed”
position status signal is received. The switching command to the motor relay is
always terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. The monitoring time
period is again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor
relay and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also
terminated.
MAIN:
Device on-line
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
W. ext. cmd. termin.
[ 221 063 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DEV01:
Switch. device runn.
307 010
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
307 011
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Open
[ 210 015 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
&
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
& & CMD_1:
MAIN: & Command C011
Ext.cmd.term. w/o PI [ 200 051 ]
[ 221 115 ]
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
307 012
MAIN:
Mon.time motor relay
[ 221 060 ]
COMM1:
& Motor rel. mon. trg.
SIG_1: Debouncing [ --- --- ]
Signal S012 EXT
[ 226 092 ] &
MAIN:
Chatter suppression & & End command
306 028
MAIN: DEV01:
Cmd.end f. DC fail. & Start runn.time mon.
307 008
[ 221 111 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S012
0
& [ 226 093 ]
1
0: No
MAIN: 1: Yes
DC fail. cmd. End
[ 221 108 ]
19Z81AHA
CMD_1:
Command C011
[ 200 051 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
Fig. 3-417: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
10 ms MAIN: DEV01:
Mon.time motor relay Latching time
[ 221 060 ] [ 210 005 ]
19Z5204C
Fig. 3-418: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination, example for switching
operation “close”.
ILOCK:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 2 active
[ 221 023 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 32
[ 042 094 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Output 32 (t)
[ 042 095 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV02:
Switch. device open
[ 210 086 ]
DEV01:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 037 ]
DEV02:
Switch.device closed
[ 210 087 ]
DEV01:
Dev. Interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
DEV02:
Dev. Interm./flt.pos
[ 210 088 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
& ≥1
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
12Z80ACB
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd. OUTP:
[ 221 230 ] Fct.assignment K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
K x1
CMD_1: CMD_1:
Command C001 config. Oper. mode cmd. C001 K x2 -K xxx
[ 200 004 ] [ 200 002 ]
K x3
K xx
0 1
0: No 3
1: Yes
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Persistent command
CMD_1:
& 1 ≥1 Command C001
& t [ 200 001 ]
COMM1:
Command C001
[ - - - - - - ]
LOC:
Rem.acc.block.active
[ 221 004 ]
& 1
t
&
19Z50ALB
Fig. 3-420: Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001.
SIG_1: SIG_1:
Signal S001 config. Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 007 ] [ 226 003 ]
0: No Selected group
1: Yes
Debouncing SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
SIG_1: [ 226 005 ]
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
Chatter suppression
SIG_1:
Min. sig. dur. S001
[ 226 002 ]
COMM1:
Signal S001,log
[ --- ---]
SIG_1:
Oper. mode sig. S001
[ 226 001 ]
0: Without function
1: Start/end signal
2: Transient signal
19Z50AMA
Fig. 3-421: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001.
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
4: Group 4
5: Group 5
6: Group 6
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
8 MAIN:
Debounce time gr. 1
1: Group 1 [ 221 200 ]
2: Group 2 MAIN:
Chatt.mon. time gr.1
3: Group 3
[ 221 201 ]
4: Group 4
MAIN:
5: Group 5 Change of state gr.1
6: Group 6 [ 221 202 ]
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
Debouncing
&
COMM1:
DEV01: Chatter suppression Debounced signal
Closed signal EXT 304 400
[ 210 031 ] Group 1
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
19Z5067B
Fig. 3-422: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1.
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time
acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as
standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for
each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set.
Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious
pickups.
3.54.1.1.1 Debouncing
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e
Signal sequence
time tag
F0Z5011B
Fig. 3-423: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter
M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort or 1stEdge,OpMem sorted.) Example: Set debouncing
time: 50 ms, s: start, e: end.
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of
the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers
the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram
containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the
time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MAIN: Tim e
t ag to the value After debounce time.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is
generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce
time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of
MAIN : Time tag to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter
has been set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem sorted then all entries are always
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
Time Tag
The following overview illustrates how the (221 098) MAIN: Time tag setting is
operating.
}
(no time tag, internal signal to start debouncing)2)
1stEdge,OpMem sorted:
(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T L
1stEdge,OpMem unsort:
(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T L
T = Time tag
L = Log of state
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e 3s 4e
Signal sequence
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
200ms
time tag
Debouncing
F0Z5012A
Fig. 3-424: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. Set debouncing time: 20 ms, set chatter monitoring
time: 200 ms, number of admissible signal changes: 4, s: start, e: end.
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated
for the admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can
be set. After the first “inadmissible” signal change, no further telegrams are
generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing,
it is re-triggered by each new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed,
each signal change triggers a telegram.
3.55.2 Debouncing
Count
Signal sequence
50ms
19Z50APA
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter values are
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 217 001 ]
MAIN: 1: Yes
Device on-line COUNT:
[ 003 030 ] Count 1
1: Yes (= on) [ 217 100 ]
COUNT: COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1 m CT=m Count 1
[ 217 160 ] [ 217 100 ]
+
COUNT: Debouncing
Set counter 1 EXT
R
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
C
[ 217 007 ] COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
= 0 min
0
COUNT:
1 Reset
[ 217 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-426: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
TIMER:
Calendar 1
TIMER: c
General enable USER [ 014 178 ]
[ 014 199 ]
TIMER: m out of n
Monday
[ 014 139 ]
.
.
.
TIMER:
Sunday
[ 014 169 ]
Φ
Hardware clock
TIMER:
Start hour 1
[ 014 089 ]
TIMER:
Start minute 1
[ 014 102 ]
TIMER:
End hour 1
[ 014 109 ]
TIMER:
End minute 1
[ 014 118 ]
Φ
TIMER:
Timer stage 1
[ 015 006 ]
19Z8854A
Fig. 3-427: TIMER logic (Calendar 1 shown as an example for 4 calendar timers).
4 Design
The P433 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
Irrespective of the type a P433 is equipped with a detachable HMI or a fixed local
control panel. The local control panel is covered with a tough film so that the
specified degree of IP protection will be maintained. In addition to the essential
control and display elements, a parallel display consisting of multi-colored LED
indicators is also incorporated (see Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the
various LED indications is shown in plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
4.1 Designs
The P433 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type – pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection – the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the torx head steal screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➀) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➁). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back
of the case.
WARNING
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Do not bend the connecting cable! Secure the local control
panel by inserting it in the slots provided on the left.
WARNING
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (or – in case of a detachable HMI – the case front
panel). The illustration shows the 84TE case with (fixed) local control panel.
147.5
177.5
184.5
‑X6
213.4 257.1
242.6
260.2
177.5
‑X6
227.9
213.4 253.6
203.0
155.4
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
181.3
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
101.6
177.5
‑X6
213.4 227.9
242.6 253.6
260.2
6.4
186.5
101.6
224.5
242.6
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
147.5
177.5
184.5
‑X6
434.8 257.1
464.0
481.6
‑X6
227.9
434.8 253.6
284.9
259.0
25.9
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
410.0
Fig. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
101.6
177.5
‑X6
434.8 227.9
253.6
464.0
481.6
6.4
186.5
101.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
107.3
177.5
‑X6
20.7
206.0
46.3
197.5
192.5
148.0
168.0
3.0
181.3
Key:
● ●: standard equipment,
● ○: optional,
● ☐: depending on order,
● *: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,
(p. 5-26)).
● →xx: Module has to be fitted into slot number xx.
● 1st→xx, 2nd→yy [etc.]: If several modules of the same type may be ordered,
these must be fitted into the appropriate slots in a particular order: If only
one has been ordered it must be fitted into slot xx (i. e. slot yy is not
permitted). If two modules have been ordered these must be fitted into
slots xx and yy, etc.
9651512 B ff Binary I/O module (6 binary inputs, 3 X(6I 3O) 4TE ○→10 ○→18
output relays), Standard variant with
switching threshold at 65% of 24 VDC
(VA,min)
0337406 D ff Analog I/O module, standard variant Y(4I) 4TE ○→08 ○→08
(switching threshold 18 V) alt.
→03
9651307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold dep.
73 V on
ord.
9651335 A ff Analog I/O module, switching threshold
90 V
WARNING
Sustained exposure to high humidity during storage may cause damage to
electronics and reduce the lifetime of the equipment.
We recommend that storage humidity shall not exceed 50% relative
humidity.
Once the device has been unpacked, we recommend that it is energized
within the three following months.
Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment,
before energization.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the “Warning” page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
WARNING
The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-12) (“Protective and
Operational Grounding”) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per the
diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal” (Fig. 5-8,
(p. 5-12)).
If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
WARNING
The SC connector and RJ45 wire of the Ethernet module cannot be connected
at the same time.
WARNING
Installation of the detachable HMI: A protective conductor (protective
earth) with a cross section at least 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or thicker) must be
connected to the protective grounding conductor terminal on the detachable
HMI at one end and on the other end to the protective grounding conductor
terminal on the device’s case. Both the detachable HMI and the device have
to be installed in the same substation.
In order to prevent personal injuries the communications cable installed to
the detachable HMI must never come in contact with parts that may be
subjected to dangerous live voltages.
It is prohibited to install or run the communications cable to the detachable
HMI next to high-voltage lines or high-voltage connections. This is to prevent
induced currents that would lead to electromagnetic interferences.
We recommend to use only cables of category CAT6 (or better), which we
tested up to a length of 10 m.
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a device from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family.
The P433 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter “Order Information”
(Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)).
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P433 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P433 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-6) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter “Design”. When the P433 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See “Protective and Operational
Grounding” (Section 5.5, (p. 5-12))
For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P433 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel (or
the front element of the case for devices with detachable display) must be taken
down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1. Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180° up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2. Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-8)).
3. Then remove the local control panel.
WARNING
The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor module P
by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do
not bend the connecting cable!
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-8)). Now insert the P433 into the panel opening from the rear
so that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
WARNING
When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the M3.5
screws with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters.)
If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, the longer M3.5 and M4 bolts must be
used. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
WARNING
The P433 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
1. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-9), ➀ and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)).
4. Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
45Z5058A
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204mm
for
Frame 280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
WARNING
The P433 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted
case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2 (with angle
brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-9)) is used.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
WARNING
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P433 in a cabinet with a 19″ mounting rack.
WARNING
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p. 5-12).
1
2 1
3
2
4
4
PE terminal PE terminal
surface-mount. case flush-mount. case
1 Nut M4 1 Nut M4
4 Bolt M4 4 Bolt M4
19Y5220B
5.6 Connection
The P433 Distance Protection and Control Unit must be connected in accordance
with the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification
label. The relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P433 are to be
found either in the supporting documents supplied with the device, or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-26).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² (US: AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P433.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P433. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
WARNING
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
WARNING
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-circuit
the system current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
A
B
C
1U
2U
IA
IB
IC
IN
N(e)
E(n)
e V
W
N
P433
45Z5059A
Connection to Connection to
Holmgreen group Window-type CT
A
B BS
C
A B C
K k I̲N
L l
N(e)
E(n)
l
P433
LS 19Z5290
Fig. 5-10: Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration
and core balance transformers.
Protection device a L+ L-
PSIG:
Send (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
-K1
L+
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
L-
[ 036 048 ]
P433
Protection device b L- L+
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT -K2
[ 036 048 ]
L+
L-
PSIG:
Send (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
P433
D5Z50DBA
L+ L-
Protection device a
PSIG:
Send (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
L+
PSIG:
Receive (A) EXT
L-
[ 036 048 ]
P433
L-
Protection device b L+
PSIG:
Send (transm.relay)
[ 037 024 ]
PSIG: L+
Receive (A) EXT
[ 036 048 ] L-
P433
D5Z50DCA
PT 100
P433
S8Z52H9A
CIRCUIT BREAKER DRIVE Q1 DRIVE Q2 DRIVE Q8 TRIGGER. Shunt wd. MOTOR RELAY
‑K200.1
P433
‑X061 3 5 9 ‑X062 2 6 8 ‑X071 3 5 ‑X072 6 8
P433
‑X061 2 8 ‑X062 5 ‑X071 2
E1 E3 E1 E3 E1 E3 ‑X073 8
M1 M2 M3 X//Y
‑U706
P433
E4 E4 E4 ‑X073 9
‑K200.3
‑X072 7 9
‑K705.2 ‑K706.2
P433
‑X072 5
S8Z01G3A
Fig. 5-14: Connection example, motor with shunt winding for a direct motor control, bay type No. 89
(A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar.
5.6.3.1 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106, part 101.
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P433, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P433 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
● Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
● At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
● Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
● All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at
both ends.
● Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4‑wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also
possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-15, (p. 5-23), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-16, (p. 5-24) as an example for channel 2 on the
-X9/-X10
− 1 −
D1[T] + 2 + D2[R]
− 4 −
D2[R] + 5 + D1[T]
XXXX P433
-X9/-X10 1 2 3 4 5
− + − + − + − +
P433 XXXX
Fig. 5-15: 2-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
-X9/-X10
D1[T] D2[R]
D2[R] D1[T]
XXXX P433
-X9/-X10
P433 XXXX
Fig. 5-16: 4-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
For CH1/CH2 connection diagram, please refer to Section 5.7, (p. 5-26)
AB DC REBz2202A
The diagram above and the related tables below show the global Interface
arrangement of all board connectors, as they are the fiber optic connectors, the
serial interface and the watchdog relay contacts. The available IRIG‑B connector
is designed as a modulated input.
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A A T X X X V X
CH1 CH3 4J 6I 6I 24I 4I 4H
CH2 4V 6O 6O 8O
A N T X X Y X
ETH 4J 6I 6I 4I 6I
CH2 5V 8O 8O 3O
A X X X
Red. 24I 6I 6O
ETH 8O
CH2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A A T Y X X X X V
CH1 CH3 4J 4J 6I 6I 24I 4H 4I
CH2 4V 6O 6O 8O
A N T X X X X
ETH 4J 6I 6I 6I 6I
CH2 5V 8O 8O 8O 3O
A X X
Red. 24I 6O
ETH
CH2
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
40 TE 84 TE case
case
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays 2× 6, 7 12, 14
(2-pole)) for the control of up to 3 switchgear units X(6I/6O)
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays
(2-pole))
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays X(6I/6O) 6 12
(2-pole)) for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
X(6I/8O) 7 16
Option: X__2
X__2
V̲ref 10 1 Vin
11 7 10 1 U_09
T15 11 2 K_04 11 2
12 8 12 3 K_05 U_10
12 3
13 4 K_06 U_11
13 4
14 5 K_07 U_12
14 5
Current measuring 15 6 U_13
inputs 15 6
X042 16 7 K_08 U_14
16 7
1 1 I̲A 17 8 U_15
► T1
Signal inputs
17
18
8
9
U_16
2 2 18 9
Vin
3 3 I̲B U_01
► T2
X__3 X__3
4 4
19 1 Vin
19 1 U_17
5 5 I̲C
► T3 20 2
Vin
U_02
20 2
U_18
6 6 21 3 21 3
22 4 U_19
7 7 I̲N 22 4
► T4 Vin
U_03 23 5
U_20
8 8 23 5 U_21
24 6
Vin U_22
24 6 U_04 25 7
U_23
26 8
Power supply U_24
25 7 + V 27 9
aux
26 8 −
U100
27 9
X__2 X__2
10 1 10 1
11 2 11 2 K_04
11 2
K_02 12 3 12 3 K_05
12 3 + 13 4 13 4 K_06
14 5 K_03 14 5 K_07
15 6 15 6
16 7 16 7 K_08
X__3 17 8 Signal 17 8
inputs
18 9 18 9
Signal
inputs
Vin
U_01 X__3
Vin
19 1 19 1 U_01
X__3
K_03 Vin
20 2 + 19 1 U_02 20 2
Vin
20 2 21 3 U_02
Vin
21 3 U_03
Vin
22 4 22 4 U_03
Vin
26 8 23 5 U_04 23 5
Vin
K_04 24 6 24 6 U_04
27 9 + Vin
25 7 U_05 25 7
Vin
26 8 U_05
Vin
27 9 U_06 26 8
Vin
27 9 U_06
Ethernet [IEC],
Per order Per order Port 1 Per order
Serial [Channel 1] Ethernet [IEC] optical fiber link ST Serial [COMM3]
X7
optical fiber link optical fiber link ST optical fiber link
RX
X7 X7 X//Y U17 X31
1 RX RX
X//Y U17 X//Y U17 X8 X//Y U22
TX
X//Y U18
X8 X8 X32
1 TX TX
X//Y U18 X//Y U18 Ethernet [IEC],
Port 2
X//Y U23
optical fiber link ST
or wire link or or wire link
optical fiber link SC X14
RX
X9 X//Y X13
X//Y U28 X33 X//Y
1 RX 1
2 D2[R] X15 2 D2[R]
3 TX X//Y U26 TX
3
U19 X//Y U29 U24
4 4
5 D1[T] Serial [COMM2] 5 D1[T]
wire link only
and wire link
X12
RS 422 / 485 1 X10 X//Y RS 422 / 485
Serial [Channel 2]
> X//Y U25 1
2 D2[R]
wire link only RJ45 or wire link
3
U20
X10 X//Y Serial [COMM2]
4 X34 X//Y
1 1
5 D1[T] M5[DCD]
2 D2[R] wire link 2
D2[R]
3 3
U20 X10 X//Y D1[T] U27
4 1 RS 422 / 485 4
5 D1[T] 2 D2[R] Port supervision 5 E
7 E2[G]
3
U20 8 Alarm Port 1
4 7
RS 422 / 485 9 +UB
5 D1[T]
IRIG-B Alarm Port 1
IRIG-B RS 232
time synchronization
X11 time synchronization
1 RS 422 / 485 X11
U21 1
U21
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display.
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press “Up” or “Down” ( , ) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
Panel Level: The “up”/“down” keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
Menu Tree Level: Press the “up” and “down” keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
“up” and “down” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the “up” and “down” keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
● “Up” key: the next higher value is selected.
● “Down” key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the “up” and “down” key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
Menu Tree Level: Press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the “left” and
“right” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the “left” and “right” keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
● “Left” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
● “Right” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
( … )
By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered.
More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in Section 3.6,
(p. 3-46).
More details on handling function keys can be found in Section 6.9, (p. 6-11).
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any
other point in the menu tree, press the “READ” key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay
panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the “ENTER” key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree
level the user must simultaneously press the keys “Cursor up” and “RESET”. (If
previously no panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel,
if available, is accessed.)
After the set LOC : Au tom. re turn time has elapsed the protection unit will
also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display
panel last selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the
key “Cursor left” and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right”.
Measured Value
Bay Panel Panel(s) Record View
(state-dependent)
X0 :running Voltage VAB prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
>Q0 :running 20.7 kV Operat. data record
Q8 :running Voltage VBC prim.
Local Remote 20.6 kV
+
Device type
Fig. 6-2: Display panels and menu tree on the text display.
“Down”
“Right”
“Up”
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column. *
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
been entered, the active display will re-appear. Voltage B-C prim.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return 20.6 kV
time.
By default, no password is required and therefore
function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is Voltage B-C prim.
pressed. 20.6 kV
Step 3 Press [F1] again. The function configured to this Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4 When function keys are pressed during their associated Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
return time, then the set function is carried out directly, Yes
i.e. without checking for the password again.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does
not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 First press the “up” key and hold it down while pressing Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and 20.6 kV
+
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P433
Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
Step 0 Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
on the Panel. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 If more than two measured values have been selected, Voltage C-A prim.
20.8 kV
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Current A prim.
“up” or “down” keys. 415 A
or
The device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC : Hold-t im e for Pane ls, located at “Par/
Conf” in the menu tree) has elapsed.
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P433 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
“Left”
*
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
the Clear key before the enter key is pressed. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only X0 :Closed
>Q0 :Closed
switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be Q8 :Closed
selected. The external device designation for the Local Locked
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is marked
by a flashing “>” character.
PX yyy
Unit
type
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
Step 0 In this example, the user switches from plain text mode Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
to address mode. No (=off)
Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
versa, press the CLEAR key and either the “left” key or 0
the “right” key simultaneously. This can be done at any
point in the menu tree. +
or
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
fourth line of the display. No
********
“Right” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
“Up” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
No
*
“Down” Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
The display will change as shown in the column on the No
right. *
Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting No
can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down”
keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown in Step 1 appears.
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
The unit is enabled for further setting changes. Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN: Devi ce on-l ine, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings include
the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can be
adapted to the system. The following entries in the “Change” column of the
“Telegram Documentation” (part of the separately available
“DataModelExplorer”) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
● “on”: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
● “off”: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
● “–”: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
Step 2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will light up. The last digit of the value is 50000̲ s
highlighted by a cursor (underlined).
Step 3 Press the “left” or “right” keys to move the cursor to Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
the left or right. 5000̲0 s
Step 5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will go out and the device will now operate with 50010 s
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Step 6 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), 50000 s
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
Step 0 Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
MAIN: Fct .assig.t rip cmd.1 at “Par/Func/Glob/
MAIN” in the menu tree). The down arrow (↓) indicates ↓
that a list setting has been selected.
Step 1 Press the “down” key. The first function and the first Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, #01 DIST
respectively. The symbol “#01” in the display indicates Trip zone 1
the first item of the selection. If MAI N: Withou t
function appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
on the right will appear. #05 MAIN
?????
Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the “up” and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
“down“ keys. In this particular case, only the “OR” OR #02 DIST
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the Trip zone 4
selection of classes.
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate OR #02 DIST
with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the “OR” operator is
always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Step 7 Press the “up” key to exit the list at any point in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
list.
↓
Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Fct.assign.trip cmd.
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), OR #02 DIST
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Trip zone 2
MODE will be extinguished.
Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
Step 2 Press the “left” key repeatedly to display the entries Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
one after the other in chronological order. Once the Enabled USER
end of the operating data memory has been reached, Yes
pressing the “left” key again will have no effect.
Step 3 Press the “right” key to display the previous entry. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Operat. data record.
data memory to return to the entry point.
↓
Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
memory.
↓
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the monitoring signal Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to display the entries Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
one after the other in chronological order. If more than Exception oper. syst.
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the “overflow” signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Step 3 Press the “left” key to display the previous entry. Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 4 If the “down” key is held down while a monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
signal is being displayed, the following additional Checksum error param
information will be displayed:
Step 5 Press the “up” key at any point within the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory to return to the entry point.
↓
Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line 01.01.13 10:00:33
of the display will show the date and time the fault ↓
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the fault memory. First, Fault recording 1
FT_RC
the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd Event
fault since the last reset. 22
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to see first the Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
measured fault data and then the binary signals in Running time
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is 0.17 s
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
Start
“right” key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
“right” key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3 Press the “left” key to see the previous measured value Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the fault memory Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
to return to the entry point. 01.01.13 10:00:33
↓
6.12.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section “Resetting Actions” in Chapter “Operation”.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-
enabling function has already been activated.
Step 0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this 10
example.
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
Step 2 Press the “Up” or “Down” keys to change the setting to Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
Execute. 10
Execute
Step 3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset 0
to 0.
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
“Right” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
“Up” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
“Down” Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
The display will change as shown in the column on the Don't execute
right. *
Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
EDIT MODE will light up. This indicates that the setting Don't execute
can now be changed by pressing the “up” or “down”
keys.
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the Don't execute
command.
Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
the control action can be terminated by pressing the Don't execute
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
1 2
4
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this
change is described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Par/Conf/LOC
Password
fourth line of the display. ********
********
Step 2 Press the “left”, “right”, “up” and “down” keys to enter Par/Conf/LOC
Password
the valid password. The display will change as shown in ********
the column on the right. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The LED indicator labeled Par/Conf/LOC
Password
EDIT MODE will light up. The third line shows an _
underscore character ( _ ) as the prompt for entering a
new password.
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new password again. _
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been Par/Conf/LOC
Password
re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT ********
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
Step 3 After the four keys are released, startup will continue.
TEST
Step 1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
fourth line of the display. ********
********
Step 2 Press the “left”, “right”, “up” and “down” keys to enter Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
the valid general password. The display will change as ********
shown in the column on the right. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Step 3 Now press the enter key. The red LED indicator labeled Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
EDIT MODE will be illuminated. The current Password 1423
L/R will appear in the third line.
Step 4 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
Step 5 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again. _
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
Step 7a Press the ENTER key again. If the new Password L/R has Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
been re-entered correctly, the red LED indicator labeled ********
EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display
appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
Step 8 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P433 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled “Parameters” in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P433 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a “cold restart”. The P433 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P433_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P433 versions before P433‑630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named “IED Configurator”.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator”.
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
The P433 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs
U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN: Auto-
assignme nt I /O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P433 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to
the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B
as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the
DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new
bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence
(active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter “Technical Data”). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B.
(Whether automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN : Auto-
assignme nt I/O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P433 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond
to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A and B
are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there
will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-
signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
Parameter Address
433 0 1000
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 002 120
[spacer]
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S W date 002 122
[spacer]
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion communic. 002 103
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion 002 059
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol
per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Lang uage v ersion 002 123
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Text vers .dat a mode l 002 121
0 0 255
[spacer]
Using the ‘text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0' (factory-set
default).
Parameter Address
0 0 9999
[spacer]
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
0:
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer] DVICE: Order ext . No. 1 000 003
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
Parameter Address
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 086 050
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 086 193
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module A 086 190
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
Parameter Address
2:
[spacer]
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module L 086 191
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module B 086 192
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion m odul e B (a) 086 189
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1 000 040
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer] DVICE: Location 001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice ID 000 035
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: S ubst ation ID 000 036
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: Fee de r ID 000 037
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice password 1 000 048
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI 002 131
[spacer]
Internal software version numbers.
Parameter Address
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
Parameter Address
tion keys
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
[spacer] F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F1 080 112
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu
jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1 or LO C: F ct . me nu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer] F_KEY: Oper ating mode F 1 080 132
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
Parameter Address
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer] F_KEY: Re tur n time fct .k e ys 003 037
10 1 60000 s
[spacer]
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
Parameter Address
2: Reference language
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] LOC: De cim al de limit er 003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word 003 035
1234 0 4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word L / R 221 040
1423 0 4444
[spacer]
The password used to change the setting from “Remote” to “Local” control can
be defined here. (Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control occurs without
checking the password.)
[spacer] LOC: Dis play L/ R 221 070
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the control site – “Local” or “Remote” – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. inte rl. stat . 221 071
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the “Locked” or “Unlocked” status shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. ass ign. L/R k e y 225 208
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches
between remote / local control (L↔R) or between remote+local control / local
control (R&L↔L).
[spacer] LOC: Ass ig nment r es et ke y 005 251
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.
Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 1 030 238
[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated
reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Operation P anel 053 007
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Ove r load Pane l 053 005
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Grd.Fault Pane l 053 004
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- tim e f or P anels 031 075
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer] LOC: Autom . re t ur n t ime 003 014
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n tim e selec t. 221 030
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and any
switchgear selection that might have been made is cancelled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer] PC: Baud rate 003 081
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Parit y bit 003 181
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P433.
[spacer] PC: Spontan. sig. e nable 003 187
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Select. s pontan. si g. 003 189
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Trans m.enab.cyc l. dat 003 084
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Cycl. d ata ILS t e l. 003 185
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: De lta V 003 055
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta I 003 056
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta f 003 057
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta meas.v.ILS te l 003 155
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta t 003 058
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer] PC: Time-out 003 188
[spacer]
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 1
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 1: General enabl e USE R 003 170
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Basic IEC87 0-5 e nabl 003 215
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . - 10 1 e nable 003 216
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . I LS e nable 003 217
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US e nable 003 220
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 enable 003 231
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER e nable 103 040
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m unicat. prot ocol 003 167
[spacer]
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US prot . variant 003 214
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Line idle stat e 003 165
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 1: Baud rat e 003 071
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Parity bit 003 171
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P433.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The P433 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 1: Mon. tim e pol ling 003 202
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet comm. addre ss 003 072
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP 3 003 240
[spacer]
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.
The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COM M1: Octet comm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the
standard):
● Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5
characters
● Single character E5: single control character
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t monit or on 003 166
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer] COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r 003 161
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
● This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
● This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet address ASD U 003 073
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 003 177
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via “logical” communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat 003 074
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 003 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta V 003 050
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta I 003 051
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta P 003 054
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v.ILS t el 003 150
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t 003 053
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( e ne r gy) 003 151
[spacer]
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via
the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cont in. ge ner al scan 003 077
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P433 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the communication address length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Caus e transm. le ngth 003 192
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU 003 193
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. ASD U 003 194
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Addr.le ngth inf. obj. 003 196
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Inf .No.<- >funct.t ype 003 195
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the time tag length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv . 003 190
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU2 conver si on 003 191
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single
signal or double signal.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Init iali z. signal 003 199
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Balance d ope ration 003 226
[spacer]
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis
(full duplex operation).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Directi on bit 003 227
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e- out int erv al 003 228
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. si g. 003 211
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 10301 to 10400 are assigned to the selected
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . m. val. 003 212
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 30301 to 30400 are assigned to the selected
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . par am. 003 213
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 40301 to 40400 are assigned to the selected
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (MO DBUS) 003 152
[spacer]
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Autom .eve nt c onfirm. 003 249
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order
for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char . Time out 003 242
[spacer]
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm. M ode 003 243
[spacer]
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Max. Re tr ie s 003 245
[spacer]
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl.Co nfirm.T ime out 003 246
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl. Ne e d Time De l. 003 247
[spacer]
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin.output s 003 233
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. count . 003 234
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog inp. 003 235
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog outp 003 236
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta m e as. v. ( DNP 3 ) 003 250
[spacer]
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in
object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (DNP 3) 003 248
[spacer]
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Signal se lec tion 103 043
[spacer]
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Meas . v al. sel ect ion 103 044
[spacer]
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Param et er s ele ct ion 103 045
[spacer]
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( COURIE R) 103 046
[spacer]
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 2
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 2: General enabl e USE R 103 170
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Line idle stat e 103 165
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 2: Baud rate 103 071
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Parity bit 103 171
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P433.
[spacer] COMM 2: Dead t ime moni toring 103 176
[spacer]
The P433 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 2: Mon. tim e pol ling 103 202
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 2: Posit ive ackn. faul t 103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 2: Name of manufac ture r 103 161
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet address ASD U 103 073
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 2: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 103 177
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 103 179
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Transm.enab.c ycl.dat 103 074
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 103 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the
communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta V 103 050
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta P 103 054
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta f 103 052
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta m e as. v.ILS t el 103 150
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta t 103 053
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
Parameter Address
interface
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.
This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 3: General enabl e USE R 120 030
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 3.
[spacer] COMM 3: Baud rat e 120 038
[spacer]
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the guidance
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
[spacer] COMM 3: Source addr es s 120 031
1: 1
[spacer]
Address for send signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Receiving addr es s 120 032
2: 2
[spacer]
Address for receive signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. se nd 1 121 001
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. re c. 1 120 001
[spacer]
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals
[spacer] COMM 3: Ope r. m ode rec eiv e 1 120 002
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals
1 to 4 (single-pole transmission).
[spacer] COMM 3: Ope r. m ode rec eiv e 5 120 014
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
Parameter Address
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive
signals 5 to 8 (two-pole transmission).
[spacer] COMM 3: Default value rec . 1 120 060
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Tim e- out comm.faul t 120 033
50 10 60000 ms
[spacer]
This timer triggers the alarm signals COMM3: C ommunications f aul t
and S F MON: Communic .fault CO M M3 the received signals to their user-
defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has elapsed since the
most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
[spacer] COMM 3: Sig.as g. comm.fault 120 034
[spacer]
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
[spacer] COMM 3: Tim e- out link fail. 120 035
5 0 600 s
[spacer]
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this timer
stage has elapsed, alarm signals C OMM 3: C omm. link failure and
SFMO N: Comm .link fail.C OMM3 are raised. These can be mapped to
give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that maintenance
attention is required.
Parameter Address
Blocked 1 100 %
[spacer]
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted
before an alarm is raised (CO M M3 : Lim.e x ce e d.,tel.e rr. and
SFMO N: Lim .e x c.te l.e r .COM M3). When this threshold is exceeded, the
receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
[spacer] IRIGB: Gener al e nable US ER 023 200
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
Parameter Address
Communication
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Important notice: Some of the parameters in function group IEC are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool “IED Configurator”, they cannot be modified
from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program, and therefore
these parameters are listed separately.
[spacer] IEC: Ge neral enable US ER 104 000
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer] IEC: Switch Con fig. Bank 104 043
0: don't execute
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer] IEC: Active Config. Name 104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
[spacer] IEC: Active Config. Ve r s. 104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Name 104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Ve r s . 104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
Parameter Address
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and neither a digit
nor the underscore character must be the first character. Note that a non-
standard name causes problems with the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer] IEC: IP address 104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway add re s s 104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 1 IP 104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 2 IP 104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator".
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol
IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . local t ime 104 206
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . d ayl.sav. t ime 104 207
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
[spacer] IEC: Switch.day l.sav .ti me 104 219
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is
wanted.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.time s tar t 104 220
5: Last
7: Sunday
3: March
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.time s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like “on the last Sunday in March” may be used.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st .0:00 + 104 223
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.time e nd 104 225
5: Last
7: Sunday
10: October
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
Parameter Address
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Conf ig.
Bank.
[spacer] GOOSE: Gene ral e nable US ER 106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer] GOOSE: Output 1 fct .as si g. 106 011
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE
outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1,
GosGGIO2.ST.ind2, … in the datasets.
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1/Pos1.stVal,
GosGGIO1/Pos2.stVal, …) to a binary logical state signal on the device so that
they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions.
Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data
attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 301 152 217
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 301 152 218
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] MEASI: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R 011 100
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer] MEASI: E nable IDC p. u. 037 190
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P433 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer] MEASI: I DC < ope n circuit 037 191
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P433 will issue an “open
circuit” signal.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC 1 037 150
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC ,lin 1 037 151
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val. IDC ,lin1 037 192
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val.IDC ,l in2 0 037 193
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
Parameter Address
output
060 000: MAIN: Without function
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer] OUTP: Oper. mode K 3 01 151 046
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
Parameter Address
output
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] MEASO: Ge ne ral e nable US ER 031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. BC D 053 002
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output BC D 010 010
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d min. val. B C D 037 140
0 0 399
Parameter Address
399 0 399
[spacer]
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range “measured values to be issued” the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: “Scaled min. val. BCD” ...
“Scaled max. val. BCD”
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; range: “BCD-Out min. value” ... “BCD-Out max. value”
BBCD display values for measured values ≤ Mx,min; range: “BCD-Out min.
value”
BCD display values for measured values ≥ Mx,max; range: “BCD-Out max.
value”
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 1 053 000
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 1 010 114
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. A-1 037 104
Parameter Address
[spacer]
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is
to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range “measured values to
be issued” is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: „Scaled min. val. Ax“ ...
„Scaled max. val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
● Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
● Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
● Designation of this set value in the data model: „Scaled knee val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 1 037 107
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Output current range for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; designation in the data model: “An-Out min. val. Ax” ... “An-Out max.
val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≤ Mx,min; designation in the data
model: “An-Out min. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≥ Mx,max; designation in the data
model: “An-Out max. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: “AnOut knee point Ax”
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer] MEASO: Output value 1 037 120
[spacer]
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be
issued.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.
The function MAIN: He althy is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 2 y ell. 085 001
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN: Blocke d/ fault y is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 3 y ell. 085 004
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3.
The function SFM ON: Warning (LED ) is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 red 085 007
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H1 7 red 085 185
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 17.
The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 1 085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 2 085 002
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 3 085 005
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 4 085 008
3: ES reset (fault)
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 17 085 183
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer] MAIN: Auto- assignme nt I/ O 221 065
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling of automatic assignment of binary inputs and outputs to
the set bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Type of bay 220 000
[spacer]
Configuration of a bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Prim .S ource TimeS ync 103 210
0: COMM1/IEC
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer] MAIN: Backup SourceT ime Sy nc 103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s yn c. t ime -out 103 212
Blocked 1 60 min
[spacer]
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
Parameter Address
1: Current IA
2: Current IB
3: Current IC
5: Voltage A-G
6: Voltage B-G
7: Voltage C-G
4: Current IN
8: Voltage VNG
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter Address
1: With
[spacer]
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
blocking
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group PSB or including it in the configuration. If any function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
time protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
control
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
synchronism check
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration. If any function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GFSC or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
signaling
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GSCSG or including it in the configuration. If any
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
current protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
direction
determination
1: With
[spacer]
Canceling function group SCDD or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GFDSS or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GFTRP or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
tion signaling
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GFSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TGFD or including it in the configuration.
If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
shedding
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group Pf< or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
directional reactive
power protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group QV or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
failure protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TRMON or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (“Logic 2”) or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the
configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all
associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, s ignal 210 034
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
1 0 254
3 0 254
5 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, c ommand 210 032
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the “low
address” of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-
C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
Parameter Address
65 0 254
67 0 254
69 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.
Parameter Address
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 config. 226 007
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal or including it in the configuration. If a signal is cancelled,
then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] SIG_1: S IG_DC 3 config. 233 007
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal SIG_DC3 or including it in the configuration. This signal is
used to terminate a direct motor control command in combination with the
single-pole command CM D_1 : CMD_DC 3.
If this signal is cancelled, then all associated settings are hidden.
Parameter Address
commands
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 config. 200 004
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the command or including it in the configuration. If the command is
cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling command CMD_DC3 or including it in the configuration. This
command is used for direct motor control, the operation is delayed by the set
value MAIN: DC o p. de lay t1, and it is terminated with the signal
SIG_1: Logic SIG_DC3 or – if MAIN: Ex t.cmd.te rm. w/o PI = No –
with positive indication of the final switchgear position; in any case this reset is
delayed by the set value MAIN: DC 2 /3 re le as e delay.
If the command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden,
with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TIMER or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden.
7.1.3.1 Global
Parameter Address
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC
interface.
[spacer] PC: Sig./m eas .val.bl ock . 003 086
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured
data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 1
1: Yes Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-14)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 003 076
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 2
0: No Fig. 3-18, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 103 076
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter Address
output
0: No Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode USER 003 012
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer] MAIN: Nominal fr equ. fnom 010 030
50: 50 Hz Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer] MAIN: Phase s e que nce 010 049
[spacer]
Setting the phase sequence A-B-C or A-C-B.
(Alternative terminology: Setting for the rotary field's direction, either clockwise
or anticlockwise.)
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e tag 221 098
1: 1stEdge,OpMem sorted
[spacer]
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for
the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is
detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data
memory are made in chronological order or not.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
[spacer] MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 018
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer] MAIN: Vref ,nom V.T. pri m. 010 100
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice 010 003
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer] MAIN: IN,nom device 010 026
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
[spacer] MAIN: VNG,nom V.T . sec . 010 028
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer] MAIN: Vref ,nom V.T. s ec . 031 052
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IP 010 004
[spacer]
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the
measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and
Connection”, then the setting must be Standard, if the P433's 'forward' decision
is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is
reversed or – given a connection scheme according to Chapter “Installation and
Connection” – if the 'forward' decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the
setting must be Opposite.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on the
connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter
“Installation and Connection”, then the setting must be Standard, if the P433's
'forward' decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder.
If the connection direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according
to Chapter “Installation and Connection” – if the 'forward' decision is to be in the
busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. dire ct ion P,Q 006 096
[spacer]
This parameter allows inverting the sign for the following measured operating
values:
● MAIN: Active powe r P prim.
● MAIN: R eac. power Q prim.
● MAIN: Active powe r P p.u.
● M AIN: Reac. powe r Q p. u.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IP 011 030
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. IN 011 031
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. V 011 032
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and,
if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. val. re l. VNG 011 033
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. val. re l. Vref 011 034
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism check is
displayed.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy output.
1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately). 2nd procedure: Data
acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
[spacer] MAIN: Se tt l. t. IP,max,de l 010 113
[spacer]
Setting for the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res et 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 2 005 249
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res et 2 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 1 021 021
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (MAIN: B locking 1 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 2 021 022
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (MAIN: B locking 2 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d.block . USER 021 012
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.1 021 001
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.2 021 002
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals that trigger trip command 2.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 3.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sig.t ri p cmd.4 021 047
[spacer]
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 4.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 1 021 003
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 1.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 2 021 004
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 3 021 032
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 3.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . trip cmd. 4 021 033
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of trip command 4.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 1 021 023
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 2 021 024
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 3 021 025
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 3 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching tr ip cmd. 4 021 026
0: No
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 4 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Clos e cmd.puls e ti me 015 067
[spacer]
Setting for the duration of the close command.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power
systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism
check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only possible if
setting ASC: AR with t CB P Sx = Yes or ASC : M C with tCB PS x = Yes.
[spacer] MAIN: RC inhib .by CB close 015 042
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon
as the “Circuit breaker closed” signal starts.
[spacer] MAIN: Re l.t . e nab. man.c md 003 088
[spacer]
Setting for the release time of the enable for the manual close command.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. as s ign. fault 021 031
[spacer]
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB open 021 017
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P433 to evaluate the “CB open”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig .as sign. CB clos e 021 020
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P433 to evaluate the “CB closed”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Deb ounce time gr . 1 221 200
[spacer]
Setting for the debouncing time.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.m on. time gr.1 221 201
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Change of s tate gr.1 221 202
0 0 254
0 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur.long cmd. 221 230
20 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur. short cmd. 221 231
1 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. ctr l.enabl. 221 057
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.int er l.deact 221 007
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control commands
for switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key s w. 221 008
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
[spacer] MAIN: Electrical c ontrol 221 061
1: Remote
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control
switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control.
Parameter Address
3 0 255 s
[spacer]
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal “Sw. dev. interm. pos.” already present and the status signal continuously
absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective
binary inputs, will be issued. (See also “Processing status signals from manually
operated switchgear”.)
[spacer] MAIN: Oper. mod e CB Trip 221 080
[spacer]
Definition of the operating mode of the CB trip.
[spacer] MAIN: W. ex t. cmd. t ermin. 221 063
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the control
process of motor driven switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.assig n. t ripping 221 010
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external
protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Prot.t rip>CB tr ipped 221 012
[spacer]
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the
CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp. as g. CB t ri p 221 013
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P433 to signal the “CB open” position
signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en. ext 221 050
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. CB t rip ex t 221 024
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. m ult.sig. 1 221 051
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group
signal).
Parameter Address
selection
0: No Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-122)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control
panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer] PSS: Param.subs.se l. USE R 003 060
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSS: Ke ep tim e 003 063
[spacer]
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals “Warning
(LED)” and “Warning (relay)” and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
“ALARM”. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer] SFMO N: M on.s ig. re t enti on 021 018
Blocked 0 240 h
[spacer]
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: I> 017 065
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase currents that will trigger
fault recording and fault data acquisition.
[spacer] FT_RC: Pre- fault time 003 078
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Post -f ault ti me 003 079
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Max. re cording t ime 003 075
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage that shall be used for frequency measurement.
[spacer] MAIN: Evaluat ion t ime 018 201
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer] MAIN: Undervolt . blo ck. V< 018 200
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function and underfrequency
load shedding function will be blocked.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Enable/disable the distance protection function.
[spacer] DIST: CVT s tabil iz ation 010 031
[spacer]
This setting defines whether distance protection will operate with or without
stabilization against transient transformation errors of capacitive voltage
transformers.
Parameter Address
blocking
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling power swing blocking.
[spacer] PSB: R 014 060
[spacer]
Setting for the power swing polygon.
[spacer] PSB: Op e r. value D el ta T 014 090
20 5 60 ms
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage for operating mode PSB: Oper ating mode =
Delta Z.
[spacer] PSB: Activation co nd. dZ 008 235
[spacer]
Setting of the Activation condition for the power swing detection based on
impedance variation.
[spacer] PSB: Fct . as s ign. block . 012 017
[spacer]
Selection of the zones to be blocked if the blocking criterion is present.
[spacer] PSB: Max . PS cycl e dur. 014 055
[spacer]
Time limit of the blocking effect.
[spacer] PSB: Hold t ime 011 142
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage by which the signal for power swing blocking condition
is extended.
[spacer] PSB: B locking t ime i nt. 011 143
[spacer]
Duration of the signal PSB: Blocke d.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting of the timer stage by which the signal P S B: Blocked is delayed.
[spacer] PSB: IP> 014 058
[spacer]
If the phase current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer] PSB: Ine g> 014 057
[spacer]
If the negative-sequence current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is
cancelled without time delay.
[spacer] PSB: IN> 014 056
[spacer]
If the residual current exceeds this threshold, the blocking is cancelled without
time delay.
[spacer] PSB: Abort de lay 008 234
[spacer]
Setting of the extension of the blocking effect, which will become active after a
current trigger has started or after the maximum blocking time period has
elapsed.
[spacer] PSB: R (OOS ) 006 184
[spacer]
Settings for the power swing polygon that is used for the enhanced counting-
based tripping.
[spacer] PSB: Pe rm. No. OOS (a) 006 028
Blocked 1 10
[spacer]
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the inner zone (a).
[spacer] PSB: Pe rm. No. OOS (b) 006 189
Blocked 1 10
[spacer]
Tripping threshold value of the instable power swing counter, that counts power
swings crossing the outer zone (b).
Parameter Address
Blocked 1 10
[spacer]
Tripping threshold value of the stable power swing counter.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-218)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
[spacer] MCM ON: C urre nt monitor ing 014 006
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the current-measuring circuits shall be monitored.
[spacer] MCM ON: I min curr. monitor . 010 183
[spacer]
The current-measuring circuit monitoring function is enabled when the current
exceeds this setting in at least one phase.
[spacer] MCM ON: I neg > 014 002
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Ineg> (permissible unbalance threshold in the
current-measuring circuit).
[spacer] MCM ON: Op . m ode volt. mon. 014 007
[spacer]
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.
[spacer] MCM ON: I min Vne g monit ori ng 010 184
[spacer]
The negative-sequence voltage monitoring function is enabled when the current
exceeds this setting in at least one phase.
[spacer] MCM ON: Op erate delay 017 011
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay after which the 'Meas. circ. (V/I) faulty' signals will
be issued.
[spacer] MCM ON: FF, V e nable d USE R 014 009
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the “Fuse Failure” monitoring function.
[spacer] MCM ON: FF,Vre f enable d US ER 014 013
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the “Fuse Failure” monitoring function of the reference
voltage Vref.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage
Vref.
Parameter Address
time protection
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-226)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
[spacer] BUOC: Oper ating mode 014 000
[spacer]
Setting for the BUOC protection operating mode.
Parameter Address
protection
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling protective signaling.
Parameter Address
control
0: No Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling auto-reclosing control.
[spacer] ARC: Fct.as sgn. tLOG IC 015 033
[spacer]
Function assignment to tLOGIC.
Parameter Address
synchronism check
0: No Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the automatic synchronism check.
[spacer] ASC: Transm .cycle ,me as .v. 101 212
[spacer]
Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-294)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection.
[spacer] GFS C: Fct.as sign. bl ock ing 006 020
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will – if present – block the GFSC protection.
[spacer] GFS C: Evaluat ion VNG 002 136
[spacer]
Setting how the GFSC protection will determine the neutral-point displacement
voltage: It will either be internally calculated from the three measured phase-to-
ground voltages, or measured from the open-delta VT.
[spacer] GFS C: Virtual curr e nt pol. 006 009
0: No
[spacer]
Set to Yes if you want the device to apply “virtual current polarization”, i.e.
calculate the polarizing voltage as sum of the 2 healthy phase voltages. The
default is No to provide backwards compatibility.
[spacer] GFS C: Comp . reac tance X0 002 135
[spacer]
Setting of “cross-polarization” parameter X0 (see section GFSC, “Improved
directional measurement for series compensated line applications”).
[spacer] GFS C: IN> 018 063
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the residual current.
[spacer] GFS C: VNG> 018 062
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer] GFS C: Angle phi N 018 061
[spacer]
Setting for the position of the straight line separating forward and backward
(reverse) directions.
[spacer] GFS C: St art. oper . de lay 018 064
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of starting.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of the starting.
[spacer] GFS C: t1 (forward) 018 066
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a “forward”
decision.
[spacer] GFS C: t2 (backward) 018 067
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal in the event of a “backward”
(reverse) decision.
[spacer] GFS C: t3 (non-dir ect io nal ) 018 068
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the non-directional trip signal.
[spacer] GFS C: Crit eria tS acti ve 018 071
[spacer]
This setting defines the direction of time-voltage protection tripping.
[spacer] GFS C: Operatin g mode t S 018 080
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the voltage-dependent or current-dependent
tripping time characteristic shall apply.
[spacer] GFS C: Ire f,N 018 076
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer] GFS C: Charact e r is tic N 018 078
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
[spacer] GFS C: Factor k t,N 018 077
[spacer]
Setting for the starting characteristic factor kP.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
signaling
0: No Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling.
[spacer] GSCSG: Fct.assig n. bloc king 002 180
[spacer]
Select those binary signals that will – if present – block the GFSC protection.
[spacer] GSCSG: C hanne l mode 023 078
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether GSCSG and PSIG operate with independent
communication channels or with a common communication channel.
Note: Operation with a common communication channel is only possible, if the
same operating mode is set for both PSIG and GSCSG. The correct assignment
of signals to the functions must be done by setting the time delays
appropriately.
[spacer] GSCSG: Op erating mode 023 079
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling.
[spacer] GSCSG: T rip mod e 023 088
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether there shall be a single-pole or three-pole trip and
whether an HSR shall be triggered.
[spacer] GSCSG: T rip ping t ime 023 075
[spacer]
Setting for the delay of the send signal (of the signal comparison release
scheme) and the trip signal. This delay shall be used for coordinating GSCSG
with the other protection functions.
[spacer] GSCSG: R eleas e t ime se nd 023 076
[spacer]
This setting specifies extension of the send signal after starting of ground fault
(short-circuit) protection has dropped out.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of ground fault (short-circuit) protection
signaling in the event of a change in fault direction.
[spacer] GSCSG: Echo on rec eiv e 023 080
[spacer]
This setting determines whether ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling
operates with or without echo.
Note: Use of the echo only makes sense if the signal comparison release
scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
[spacer] GSCSG: Op erate de lay ec ho 023 081
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
[spacer] GSCSG: Puls e d urat ion echo 023 082
[spacer]
Setting for echo pulse duration.
[spacer] GSCSG: t Block echo 023 083
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of the echo signal in the event of a
change in fault direction.
[spacer] GSCSG: W eak in fe ed tr ip 023 084
[spacer]
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.
Note: Use of the weak-infeed logic only makes sense if the signal comparison
release scheme has been selected as the operating mode.
[spacer] GSCSG: Op .delay weak i nfe e d 023 087
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
[spacer] GSCSG: Block. sig. nondir . 023 089
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the blocking signal will be transmitted only in the
event of a backward (reverse) decision by ground fault (short-circuit) protection
or whether it will be transmitted as long as there is no forward decision.
[spacer] GSCSG: Frequency moni toring 023 085
[spacer]
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored.
Parameter Address
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-324)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Parameter Address
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-273, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Parameter Address
direction
determination
1: Yes Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-348)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the short-circuit direction determination.
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: No Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-361)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values.
[spacer] GFDSS : O pe rating mode 016 090
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether steady-state power evaluation or steady-state
current evaluation will be performed.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling ground fault protection signaling.
Parameter Address
tion signaling
0: No Fig. 3-311, (p. 3-377)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling ground fault protection signaling.
[spacer] GFS IG: Operate de lay 016 076
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the trip signal.
[spacer] GFS IG: S end r ese t t ime 016 074
[spacer]
Setting for the reset time of the send signal.
[spacer] GFS IG: DC loop op. mode 016 077
[spacer]
Setting for the send relay operating mode.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the transient ground fault direction determination.
Parameter Address
protection
0: No Fig. 3-319, (p. 3-384)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
[spacer] THER M : R e lat ive re pl ic a 022 064
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the Relative replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer] THER M : Absolut e r eplica 022 065
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
Parameter Address
tion
0: No Fig. 3-324, (p. 3-394)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
Parameter Address
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: No Fig. 3-340, (p. 3-410)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
Parameter Address
shedding
0: No Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-415)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling underfrequency load shedding protection.
Parameter Address
protection
0: No Fig. 3-347, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the power directional protection function.
Parameter Address
directional reactive
power protection
0: No Fig. 3-361, (p. 3-432)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling QV protection.
Parameter Address
failure protection
0: No Fig. 3-365, (p. 3-435)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
[spacer] CBF: S tart with man. tr ip 022 154
[spacer]
Setting that permit a manual trip signal to also be used as a start criterion.
[spacer] CBF: Fct.as signm. CBAux. 022 159
[spacer]
Selection of trip signals – assigned to Gen. trip command 1 – for which, in
addition to current flow monitoring, status signals from CB auxiliary contacts are
evaluated.
[spacer] CBF: I < 022 160
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold to detect a break in current flow.
[spacer] CBF: Evaluation IN 022 184
[spacer]
Select whether the measured or the calculated residual current shall be used for
residual current monitoring function. This choice is only possible when a
measuring input for the residual current is available, otherwise the internally
derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
[spacer] CBF: I N< 022 180
[spacer]
Setting of the comparator threshold for residual current monitoring function.
[spacer] CBF: t 1 3p 022 165
[spacer]
Setting the 1st CBF timer stage to 3-pole operating mode.
[spacer] CBF: t 2 022 166
[spacer]
Setting for the 2nd CBF timer stage.
[spacer] CBF: M in.dur. trip cmd. t1 022 167
[spacer]
Setting the 1st timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting the 2nd timer stage for minimum duration of trip command.
[spacer] CBF: Latching trip cmd.t 1 022 169
[spacer]
The 1st timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer] CBF: Latching trip cmd.t 2 022 170
[spacer]
The 2nd timer stage trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until
reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
[spacer] CBF: De lay/s tart ing t rig. 022 155
[spacer]
The signal CB F: Trip si gnal is issued when this timer stage's time duration
has elapsed.
[spacer] CBF: De lay/f ault beh. C B 022 171
[spacer]
If during this delay time period the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from
its auxiliary contacts that it is closed, then faults behind the CB are recognized
through the current criterion (see section “Fault behind CB protection”).
[spacer] CBF: De lay/C B s ync.supe rv 022 172
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay to bridge circuit breaker operate times during CB
synchronization supervision.
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-375, (p. 3-443)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
[spacer] CBM: S ig. as g. trip cmd. 022 152
[spacer]
Using the setting for external devices the trip command issued by the control
function may be linked to the trip command 1 issued by the protection by
assigning the trip command issued by the control function by this parameter.
[spacer] CBM: Op er ating mode 022 007
[spacer]
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer] CBM: I nom,CB 022 012
[spacer]
Setting for the CB nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Inom,CB 022 013
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: M e d. curr. I t ri p,CB 022 014
[spacer]
Setting for the average CB disconnection current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Imed, CB 022 015
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection
(ruptured) current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer] CBM: M ax . curr. It r ip,CB 022 016
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum CB disconnection (ruptured) current.
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Imax,CB 022 017
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum CB
disconnection (ruptured) current.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.
[spacer] CBM: R e main No. CB op. < 022 020
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at CB
nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip > 022 022
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip **2> 022 081
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values to the second power.
[spacer] CBM: ΣI* t> 022 096
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
[spacer] CBM: C orr. acqu.t ime trip 007 249
[spacer]
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary
contacts in case of a triggering by the open command.
[spacer] CBM: C orr. acqui s. t ime 022 018
[spacer]
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary
contacts in case of a triggering by the position signal issued by the CB auxiliary
contacts.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-388, (p. 3-457)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : I> 014 004
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : I> > 014 020
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI> 014 031
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI>> 014 032
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : I< 014 021
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : I< < 014 022
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI< 014 033
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI<< 014 034
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage of limit value
monitoring.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPG>> 014 024
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPG> 014 035
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPG>> 014 036
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPG< 014 025
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPG<< 014 026
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPG< 014 037
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPG<< 014 038
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPP> 014 027
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPP> 014 039
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPP>> 014 040
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPP< 014 029
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VPP<< 014 030
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPP< 014 041
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPP<< 014 042
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VNG> 014 043
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : VNG>> 014 044
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVNG>> 014 046
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> of limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : Vref > 042 144
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : Vref >> 042 145
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVref> 042 148
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVref>> 042 149
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : Vref < 042 146
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : Vref << 042 147
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVref< 042 150
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
monitoring.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin> 014 110
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin>> 014 111
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> 014 112
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> 014 113
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin< 014 114
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin<< 014 115
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< 014 116
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< 014 117
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T> 014 100
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > 014 103
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> 014 104
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : T< 014 105
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T<< 014 106
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < 014 107
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << 014 108
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-390, (p. 3-459)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the transformer monitoring.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER 034 030
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm. outp. 1 030 000
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 030 001
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOGIC: Tim e t1 output 1 030 002
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer] LOGIC: Tim e t2 output 1 030 003
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 044 000
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 044 001
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer] LOG_2: Fct.assig nm. outp. 1 050 000
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOG_2: Op . m ode t output 1 050 001
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1 050 002
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
[spacer] LOG_2: T im e t 2 output 1 050 003
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
Parameter Address
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig. o ut p. 1 064 000
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 064 001
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
Parameter Address
1: S001
2: S002
3: S003
4: S004
5: S005
6: S006
7: S007
8: S008
9: S009
10: S010
11: S011
12: S012
41: S041
[spacer]
Selection of the signal designation.
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mod e s ig. S 001 226 001
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
Parameter Address
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
Selection of the signal operating mode.
[spacer] SIG_1: Gr.as g. de bounc.S0 01 226 003
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
[spacer] SIG_1: M in. sig. dur. S0 01 226 002
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
The logic “1” signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the Start/end signal mode.
Parameter Address
commands
1: C001
2: C002
3: C003
4: C004
5: C005
6: C006
7: C007
8: C008
9: C009
10: C010
11: C011
12: C012
234: CMD_DC3
[spacer]
Selection of the command designation.
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C 001 200 002
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
Parameter Address
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
3: Persistent command
[spacer]
Selection of the command operating mode.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling binary counts.
[spacer] COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount. 1 217 160
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
[spacer]
Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.
[spacer] COUNT : Limit count e r 1 217 221
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer] COUNT : Cycle t.count t r ans m 217 007
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer] COUNT : IEC61850 pulsQty 221 096
1 0 1000
[spacer]
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value · pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal · pulsQty).
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling TIMER protection.
[spacer] TIM ER : Calendar 1 014 178
[spacer]
The setting defines the calender day of week for the TIMER. One or more of the
seven weekdays can be selected.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart hour 1 014 089
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart m inute 1 014 102
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start minute of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd hour 1 014 109
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
Parameter Address
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd m inute 1 014 118
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end minute of the TIMER.
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Neut r.p t. treat . PSx 010 048 001 076 001 077 001 078
1: Low-imped. grounding
[spacer]
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.
[spacer] MAIN: Ground s tarti ng PSx 001 249 001 250 001 251 002 001
1: IN> OR VNG>
[spacer]
Setting whether a ground fault is determined by an 'OR'-linked or an 'AND'-
linked condition of the IN> and VNG> thresholds.
[spacer] MAIN: Phase prio. 2 pG PSx 010 041 001 082 001 083 001 084
[spacer]
The selection of measured variables in the event of two-phase grounded faults is
a function of the set phase priority.
[spacer] MAIN: Transf e r f or 1p P Sx 010 040 001 079 001 080 001 081
1: Ground
[spacer]
For single-phase overcurrent starting without ground starting, either ground
starting or another phase starting needs to be triggered. The user may choose
to always activate the ground starting or – as a function of current magnitude
ratios – to trigger ground or phase starting.
[spacer] MAIN: Op. m ode rus h r. P Sx 017 097 001 088 001 089 001 090
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.
[spacer] MAIN: Funct.R us h r est r. PS x 017 093 017 064 017 082 017 083
[spacer]
Select the protection elements that shall be blocked when the inrush
stabilization is triggered.
[spacer] MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I( fn) PS x 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
[spacer] MAIN: I> lif t rush r. PS x 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for disabling the inrush stabilization.
[spacer] MAIN: t lift rus h r st r. PSx 019 001 019 002 019 003 019 004
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum duration of inrush stabilization.
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. s tart w. OC PS x 013 072 013 088 013 090 013 091
[spacer]
General starting with DTOC/IDMT starting conditions. This setting parameter
defines whether DTOC/IDMT starting signals contribute to general starting.
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. s tart. mode P S x 017 027 001 219 001 220 001 221
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the triggering of the residual current stages IN>,
Iref,N>, IN>> or IN>>> as well as the negative-sequence current stage Iref,neg>
should result in the formation of the general starting signal. If the setting is W/o
start. IN, Ineg then the associated time delays tIN>, tIref,N>, tIN>>, tIN>>>,
tIref,neg>are automatically excluded from the formation of the trip command.
Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Line le ngth PS x 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
acquisition
10.00 0.01 500.00 km Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-146)
[spacer]
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer] FT_DA: Line reac tance P S x 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
[spacer]
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as 100 %
when calculating the fault distance.
[spacer] FT_DA: Flt.loc. de t e rm. PSx 008 007 008 008 008 009 008 027
[spacer]
Select whether the fault location shall be determined only for short-circuits with
a general starting (with GS) or also in case of a sole neutral starting, e. g. during
a short-duration grounding (with GS or N).
[spacer] FT_DA: S tart data acqu. PS x 010 011 010 042 010 043 010 044
[spacer]
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault data
should take place.
[spacer] FT_DA: Outp . f lt.locat . P Sx 010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035
[spacer]
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location is output.
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Enable PS x 019 009 019 015 019 030 019 039
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which distance protection is
enabled.
[spacer] DIST: I>> PS x 010 054 010 074 010 094 011 014
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of overcurrent starting.
[spacer] DIST: I> ( Ib l) PS x 010 068 010 088 011 008 011 028
[spacer]
Base current setting above which undervoltage and underimpedance starting is
enabled.
[spacer] DIST: Ope rat. mode V< PS x 010 067 010 087 011 007 011 027
[spacer]
Operating mode setting for undervoltage starting.
[spacer] DIST: V< PS x 010 069 010 089 011 009 011 029
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of undervoltage starting.
[spacer] DIST: Ope rat. mode Z< PS x 010 066 010 086 011 006 011 026
[spacer]
Operating mode setting for underimpedance starting.
[spacer] DIST: Xfw PS x 010 050 010 070 010 090 011 010
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit of underimpedance starting.
[spacer] DIST: Rfw,PG PS x 010 051 010 071 010 091 011 011
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-ground
loops.
[spacer] DIST: Rfw,PP PS x 010 052 010 072 010 092 011 012
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit of underimpedance starting for phase-to-phase
loops.
[spacer] DIST: ß PS x 010 063 010 083 011 003 011 023
[spacer]
Angle setting for load blinder of underimpedance starting characteristic.
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Zfw,PG PSx 010 101 010 102 010 103 010 104
[spacer]
Setting for the circular reach (load-angle-independent limit) of underimpedance
starting characteristic for phase-to-ground loops.
[spacer] DIST: Zfw,PP PSx 010 105 010 106 010 107 010 108
[spacer]
Setting for the circular reach (load-angle-independent limit) of underimpedance
starting characteristic for phase-to-phase loops.
[spacer] DIST: Zbw/ Zfw PSx 010 053 010 073 010 093 011 013
[spacer]
Setting for the limit of underimpedance starting in the backward (reverse)
direction.
[spacer] DIST: Z evaluation PSx 025 093 024 013 024 073 025 033
[spacer]
This setting determines how the P433 will carry out the impedance calculation of
the phase-to-ground loops:
● Setting ZPG=VPG/(IP + kG*IN): The calculation will be carried out using the
phase current corrected by the set ground factor.
● Setting ZPG=VPG/2*IP: The calculation will be carried out using twice the
phase current.
● Setting ZPG=VPG/IP*(1 + kG): The calculation will be carried out using the
phase current corrected by the real value of the ground factor.
Note: Calculation with twice the phase current may be necessary in low-
impedance-grounded networks in order to avoid inadvertent starting in healthy
lines as the result of the high ground fault current. Impedance is calculated by
the distance measuring system using solely the phase current corrected by the
set ground factor.
[spacer] DIST: IN> PS x 010 055 010 075 010 095 011 015
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the residual current stage of ground starting.
[spacer] DIST: tIN> PS x 010 057 010 077 010 097 011 017
[spacer]
In isolated-neutral or resonant-grounded systems, the operate delay tIN> should
be set so as to avoid erroneous transient ground starting resulting from residual
current flow due to switching phenomena related to phase-to-ground
capacitances.
Note: For single-phase faults, neutral starting does not proceed before tIN> has
elapsed. tIN> should be set to at least 20 ms so that starting transfer does not
occur.
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: VNG> PS x 010 056 010 076 010 096 011 016
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG> of ground starting.
[spacer] DIST: VNG>> PS x 010 062 010 082 011 002 011 022
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the voltage trigger VNG>> of ground starting.
[spacer] DIST: tVNG>> PSx 010 061 010 081 011 001 011 021
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG>> trigger.
[spacer] DIST: Characteristic P Sx 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
[spacer]
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
[spacer] DIST: Op. m ode zone 4 P Sx 012 000 012 050 013 000 013 050
[spacer]
Zone 4 can be used as a special zone. This setting defines the use of zone 4.
[spacer] DIST: X1,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 001 012 051 013 001 013 051
[spacer] DIST: X2,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 002 012 052 013 002 013 052
[spacer] DIST: X3,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 003 012 053 013 003 013 053
[spacer] DIST: X4,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 004 012 054 013 004 013 054
[spacer] DIST: X5,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 100 012 101 012 102 012 103
[spacer] DIST: X6,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 104 012 105 012 106 012 107
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
[spacer] DIST: X1,PP (polygo n) P Sx 002 076 002 077 002 078 002 079
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: X2,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx 002 080 002 081 002 082 002 083
[spacer] DIST: X3,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx 002 084 002 085 002 086 002 087
[spacer] DIST: X4,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx 002 089 002 090 002 091 002 092
[spacer] DIST: X5,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx 002 093 002 094 002 095 002 096
[spacer] DIST: X6,PP (pol ygo n) P Sx 002 097 002 098 002 099 002 126
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
[spacer] DIST: R1,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 005 012 055 013 005 013 055
[spacer] DIST: R2,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 007 012 057 013 007 013 057
[spacer] DIST: R3,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 009 012 059 013 009 013 059
[spacer] DIST: R4,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 011 012 061 013 011 013 061
[spacer] DIST: R5,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 108 012 109 012 110 012 111
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: R6,PG ( polygon) PS x 012 116 012 117 012 118 012 119
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-ground loops (in secondary values).
Note: The specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8, i.e.:
Rn,PG / Xn < 8
If the ratio is greater than this (i.e. the polygon becomes extremely “flat”), the
measurement conditions for high fault resistances become quite bad, because in
this case, the angle of the fault impedance gets small, which results in quite big
measurement deviations for the reactance.
[spacer] DIST: R1,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 006 012 056 013 006 013 056
[spacer] DIST: R2,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 008 012 058 013 008 013 058
[spacer] DIST: R3,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 010 012 060 013 010 013 060
[spacer] DIST: R4,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 012 012 062 013 012 013 062
[spacer] DIST: R5,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 112 012 113 012 114 012 115
[spacer] DIST: R6,PP (polygon) P Sx 012 120 012 121 012 122 012 123
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the polygon
characteristic for the phase-to-phase loops (in secondary values).
Note: The specified precision of measurement can only be reached if the ratio
R / X is less than 8, i.e.:
Rn,PP / Xn < 8
If the ratio is greater than this (i.e. the polygon becomes extremely “flat”), the
measurement conditions for high fault resistances become quite bad, because in
this case, the angle of the fault impedance gets small, which results in quite big
measurement deviations for the reactance.
[spacer] DIST: α1 ( polyg on) PSx 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063
[spacer] DIST: α2 ( polyg on) PSx 012 014 012 064 013 014 013 064
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: α3 ( polygon) PSx 012 015 012 065 013 015 013 065
75 40 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α4 ( polygon) PSx 012 016 012 066 013 016 013 066
75 40 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α5 ( polygon) PSx 012 124 012 125 012 126 012 127
75 40 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α6 ( polygon) PSx 012 128 012 129 012 130 012 131
75 40 90 °
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
R-direction (resistance line).
[spacer] DIST: σ1 (polygon) PS x 072 086 073 086 074 086 075 086
[spacer] DIST: σ2 (polygon) PS x 072 087 073 087 074 087 075 087
[spacer] DIST: σ3 (polygon) PS x 072 088 073 088 074 088 075 088
0 -20 20 °
[spacer] DIST: σ4 (polygon) PS x 072 089 073 089 074 089 075 089
0 -20 20 °
[spacer] DIST: σ5 (polygon) PS x 012 156 012 157 012 158 012 159
0 -20 20 °
[spacer] DIST: σ6 (polygon) PS x 012 160 012 161 012 162 012 163
0 -20 20 °
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping polygon of impedance zones 1 to 6 in
X-direction (reactance line).
[spacer] DIST: Z1 (circle) PS x 012 042 073 091 074 091 075 091
[spacer] DIST: Z2 (circle) PS x 012 043 073 092 074 092 075 092
[spacer] DIST: Z3 (circle) PS x 012 044 073 093 074 093 075 093
[spacer] DIST: Z4 (circle) PS x 012 045 073 094 074 094 075 094
[spacer] DIST: Z5 (circle) PS x 012 148 012 149 012 150 012 151
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Z6 (circle) PS x 012 152 012 153 012 154 012 155
[spacer]
Setting for the impedance limit in impedance zones 1 to 6 of the circular
characteristic (in secondary values).
[spacer] DIST: α1 ( circle) PS x 072 090 073 090 074 090 075 090
[spacer] DIST: α2 ( circle) PS x 072 095 073 095 074 095 075 095
[spacer] DIST: α3 ( circle) PS x 072 096 073 096 074 096 075 096
75 10 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α4 ( circle) PS x 072 099 073 099 074 099 075 099
75 10 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α5 ( circle) PS x 012 164 012 165 012 166 012 167
75 10 90 °
[spacer] DIST: α6 ( circle) PS x 012 168 012 169 012 170 012 171
75 10 90 °
[spacer]
This setting is only important if the setting With arc compensation is active
(DI ST : Arc comp. ci rc le P Sx=Yes). In this case, the setting at this
address determines the angle where arc compensation becomes active in
zones 1 to 6.
[spacer] DIST: Ar c com p. circle P Sx 012 038 012 090 012 091 012 092
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling arc compensation when the circular characteristic is
selected.
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N1 PSx 012 023 012 073 013 023 013 073
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N2 PSx 012 024 012 074 013 024 013 074
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N3 PSx 012 025 012 075 013 025 013 075
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N4 PSx 012 026 012 076 013 026 013 076
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N5 PSx 012 027 012 077 013 027 013 077
1: Forward directional
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N6 PSx 012 132 012 133 012 134 012 135
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Dir ection N7 PSx 012 136 012 137 012 138 012 139
[spacer]
This directional setting defines the direction in which impedance stages 1 to 6 or
final timer stage 7 measure – relative to the basic measuring direction
determined by the connection of the measuring circuits and the setting at
MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. IP.
[spacer] DIST: Ope r.val.Vme mory P Sx 010 109 010 116 010 117 010 118
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded so that the measured
fault angle is used for the direction determination and the impedance
calculation.
[spacer] DIST: t1 PS x 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078
[spacer] DIST: t2 PS x 012 029 012 079 013 029 013 079
[spacer] DIST: t3 PS x 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080
[spacer] DIST: t4 PS x 012 031 012 081 013 031 013 081
[spacer] DIST: t5 PS x 012 032 012 082 013 032 013 082
[spacer] DIST: t6 PS x 012 033 012 083 013 033 013 083
[spacer] DIST: t7 PS x 012 140 012 141 012 142 012 143
[spacer] DIST: t8 PS x 012 144 012 145 012 146 012 147
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 1 to 6 and of directional and
non-directional backup timer stages 7 and 8.
[spacer] DIST: kze,PG HS R PS x 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: kze,PP HS R PSx 012 035 012 085 013 035 013 085
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-to-
phase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)⋅X1
R1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)⋅R1, if DIS T: kz e (polygon) PSx = R and X
R1,zeHSR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DIS T : k ze (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeHSR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeHSR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeHSR = (kzeHSR)⋅Z1
Z1,zeHSR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
The zone extension HSR is controlled by
● Protective signaling,
● Auto-reclosing control (ARC) before an HSR when protective signaling is
not ready,
● a reclose command, whether or not protective signaling is ready,
● Switch on to fault protection,
● an appropriately configured binary signal input.
[spacer] DIST: kze,PG TDR PSx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: kze,PP TDR PS x 012 047 012 097 013 047 013 097
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR zone extension factor for phase-to-ground loops or phase-to-
phase loops, respectively. The setting for the zone extension factor modifies the
zone 1 reactance and resistance limits of the polygon characteristic. The
following applies to the measurement:
X1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)⋅X1
R1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)⋅R1, if DIST : k ze ( poly gon) PSx = R and X
R1,zeTDR = R1 (i.e. without extension), if DI ST : k ze (polygon) PSx = Only
X
X1,zeTDR: reactance modified by the zone extension factor
R1,zeTDR: resistance modified by the zone extension factor
The following applies to measurement using the circle characteristic:
Z1,zeTDR = (kzeTDR)⋅Z1
Z1,zeTDR: impedance modified by the zone extension factor
Zone extension takes place before a TDR (time-delay reclosure), as long as a
further TDR is permitted.
[spacer] DIST: kze (polygon) P S x 010 186 010 195 010 196 010 197
[spacer]
Select whether the impedance zone 1 of the polygon characteristic shall be
extended only in reactance direction (Only X) or for both reactance and
resistance (R and X).
[spacer] DIST: t1,ze PSx 026 025 027 025 028 025 029 025
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage of impedance zone 1 with extended reach.
Note: This timer is only used if zone extension is activated from binary input.
When controlled from internal function, extended zone trip time is set from that
function (e.g. PSIG trip time).
[spacer] DIST: Ab s . value k G P Sx 012 037 012 087 013 037 013 087
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Angle kG PSx 012 036 012 086 013 036 013 086
[spacer]
Setting for the absolute value and angle of the complex ground factor k̲G.
Z̲0 - Z̲pos
k̲G =
3 ⋅ Z̲pos
Parameter Address
Power swing PSB: Enab le PS x 015 090 015 091 015 092 015 093
blocking
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-203)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which the power swing blocking function
is enabled.
Parameter Address
time protection
1.00 0.10 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-226)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I> of the phase current of the backup overcurrent-
time protection.
[spacer] BUOC: tI> PS x 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
[spacer] BUOC: IN> PS x 010 064 010 084 011 004 011 024
[spacer]
Operate value setting for the residual current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection function.
Note: For isolated / compensated networks it is possible to use the residual
stage as a backup; in this case the operate threshold has to be set greater than
the maximum ground-fault current (earth-fault current).
[spacer] BUOC: tIN> PSx 010 065 010 085 011 005 011 025
[spacer]
Operate delay for the backup overcurrent-time protection.
Parameter Address
Switch on to fault SOT F : Enab le PS x 001 203 001 204 001 205 001 206
protection
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-230)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which function group SOTF is
enabled.
[spacer] SOT F : Operating mode PS x 011 061 001 184 001 185 001 186
[spacer]
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is running, a
general starting will lead to a trip command (Trip with starting) or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone extension
factor DIST : k ze,PG HSR P S x (Trip with overreach).
[spacer] SOT F : Activation mode PS x 006 142 006 143 006 144 006 145
[spacer]
Select the SOTF activation mode (either Trigger or Line Dead State).
[spacer] SOT F : Man. clos e t ime r P Sx 011 060 001 181 001 182 001 183
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
[spacer] SOT F : With V< e nabl e PSx 006 005 006 006 006 007 006 008
[spacer] SOT F : Operate d elay PS x 006 138 006 139 006 140 006 141
[spacer] SOT F : Releas e delay PS x 002 128 002 129 002 133 002 134
[spacer]
If SOT F: Wit h V< e nable P Sx is set to Yes, then a “Line dead” condition is
determined if all 3 measured voltages are below a fixed threshold, conditioned
by settable operate and release timer stages.
If the “Line dead” condition is fulfilled either triggering of SOTF through binary
input is enabled or SOTF is permanently activated, depending on the SOTF
activation mode.
[spacer] SOT F : Tripping t ime PSx 010 218 010 219 010 221 010 222
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay of SOTF tripping.
[spacer] SOT F : I> PSx 006 130 006 131 006 132 006 133
[spacer]
Setting for the phase current operate value I>.
[spacer] SOT F : tI> PS x 006 134 006 135 006 136 006 137
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I>.
Parameter Address
[spacer] SOT F : Evaluation IN PS x 001 191 001 192 001 193 001 194
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored: the residual
current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer] SOT F : IN> (me as.) PSx 001 189 001 195 001 196 001 197
[spacer] SOT F : IN> (calc.) PSx 001 190 001 198 001 199 001 202
[spacer]
Settings for operate values of neutral current IN> (meas.) and IN> (calc.).
[spacer] SOT F : tIN> PS x 001 177 001 178 001 179 001 180
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stages IN> (meas.) or IN> (calc.).
Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG: Enab le PS x 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is
enabled.
[spacer] PSIG: Blk.f.t elcom.flt PS x 012 246 012 247 012 248 012 249
[spacer]
Depending on this setting the Protective Signaling gets blocked if the
communication is faulty on either channel (setting value Ch. (A)OR(B) faulty), or
on both channels (setting value Ch. (A)AND(B) faulty).
[spacer] PSIG: Operating mode PS x 015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.
[spacer] PSIG: Oper. mod e s end P Sx 015 036 015 037 015 040 015 041
[spacer]
This setting defines whether protective signaling generates the send signal as a
function of direction or distance.
[spacer] PSIG: Oper. mod e t rip P S x 015 107 015 108 015 113 015 114
[spacer]
This setting defines whether a trip triggered by protective signaling will be a
function of direction or distance.
[spacer] PSIG: Tripping time PS x 015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023
[spacer]
The tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection when
protective signaling is ready.
With blocking schemes this time must be set to the channel transmission delay
+30 ms.
[spacer] PSIG: Re lease t. se nd PSx 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021
[spacer]
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
Parameter Address
[spacer] PSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 015 012 024 051 025 011 025 071
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the transmitting relay will be operated in energize-
on-signal mode (“open-circuit principle”) or normally-energized mode (“closed-
circuit principle”), i.e., Transm.relay make co or Transm.relay break
c,respectively.
[spacer] PSIG: Echo on re cei ve P S x 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
[spacer]
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or without
echo.
[spacer] PSIG: Op. delay e cho P Sx 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
[spacer] PSIG: Pulse dur. echo P Sx 015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029
[spacer]
Setting for echo pulse duration.
[spacer] PSIG: Trip s ignal V< P S x 015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027
[spacer]
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.
[spacer] PSIG: V< weak infee d PSx 015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.
[spacer] PSIG: tV< PS x 015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
[spacer] PSIG: tBlock PSx 015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
[spacer] PSIG: 3ende d line prot PS x 006 039 006 046 006 047 006 048
[spacer]
Select whether the PS IG: Re ce ive ( A) E XT or PSIG: Receive (B ) EXT
signals shall be used in an OR combination (setting: No) or in an AND
combination (setting: Yes).
[spacer] PSIG: Fre quency monit. PS x 015 025 024 011 024 071 025 031
[spacer]
This setting defines whether failure of frequency transmission will be monitored.
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: Enable PS x 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049
control
0: No Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.
[spacer] ARC: C B clos.pos .s ig. PS x 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be taken into account or
not. If the setting is With, a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
Then the ARC function is ready only if the CB is closed.
[spacer] ARC: Op erating mode P Sx 015 100 015 101 015 102 015 103
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the ARC will carry out HSR and TDR, only TDR, or
only a test HSR.
[spacer] ARC: Op erative time 1 P Sx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055
[spacer]
Setting for operative time 1.
If the fault is cleared within this time, the fixed dead time 1p or 3p (depending
on the trip condition and HSR operating mode) is started.
[spacer] ARC: Op erative time 2 P Sx 015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062
[spacer]
Setting for operative time 2.
If the fault is cleared within this time, the maximum dead time is started.
[spacer] ARC: T rip tim e HSR PS x 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060
[spacer]
The HSR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly – if a HSR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e 3p PSx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050
[spacer]
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e max P Sx 015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum dead time.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t . f. HS R P Sx 015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by the
zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and while the
operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
[spacer] ARC: No. permit . T DR PS x 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057
0 0 9
[spacer]
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting,
only one HSR is carried out.
[spacer] ARC: T rip tim e TDR PS x 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061
[spacer]
The TDR tripping time replaces timer stage t1,ze of distance protection or the
operate delay of backup overcurrent-time protection – provided that the BUOC
operating mode is set accordingly – if a TDR is permitted and protective
signaling is not ready.
[spacer] ARC: T DR d ead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR dead time.
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t . f. T DR PS x 015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended prior to
a TDR.
[spacer] ARC: Enable R RC PSx 015 085 024 044 025 004 025 064
[spacer]
Enabling the rapid reclosure (RRC) function.
[spacer] ARC: t RRC PSx 015 086 024 045 025 005 025 065
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage of rapid reclosure (RRC).
[spacer] ARC: V> RR C PSx 015 087 024 046 025 006 025 066
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage threshold that must be exceeded in order for an RRC to
be carried out.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t .d ur. RC P S x 015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the following takes place:
● A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR that
is not synchronism-checked.
● Zone extension will occur with each reclose command.
[spacer] ARC: R eclaim time PS x 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048
[spacer]
Setting for the reclaim time.
[spacer] ARC: Block. tim e int . P Sx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by internal functions, such as SOTF.
[spacer] ARC: Block. tim e e xt. PS x 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
[spacer] ARC: M on. PS IG re cv . PSx 015 082 024 050 025 010 025 070
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the number of PSIG receive signals is monitored
during the dead time.
[spacer] ARC: Paralle l trip PS x 015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047
0: Without function
[spacer]
This setting defines whether and how the trip command(s) of a protection device
operating in parallel to the P433 will affect operation of the ARC function.
Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: Enab le PS x 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023
synchronism check
0: No Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism check
(ASC) is enabled.
[spacer] ASC: CB ass ignment PS x 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134
[spacer]
This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
[spacer] ASC: Sys te m int e grat . PS x 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138
[spacer]
This setting defines whether ASC will operate in “Autom. synchron. check” or
“Autom. synchr. control” mode.
[spacer] ASC: Active for HSR PS x 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Active for TDR PS x 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Active for RRC PS x 018 006 077 033 078 033 079 033
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether enabling by the ASC function is required before
reclosing after a rapid reclosure can occur.
[spacer] ASC: Clos .rej.w.block PS x 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Op erative t ime PS x 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time for ASC.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: Me as.V(T90) USE R PS x 016 222 016 223 016 224 016 225
0: No
[spacer]
This setting decides which voltage(s) the ASC function shall use for the
operating modes “voltage-checked close enable” and “voltage/synchronism-
checked close enable”:
● If set to No then the three phase-to-ground voltages are checked.
● If set to Yes then the (single-phase) voltage measured at transformer T90
is checked. (Note that it is left to system engineering that the proper
voltage – matching the setting ASC: Me asure ment loop PSx – is
connected to the T90 input.)
[spacer] ASC: Me asur e ment loop P Sx 031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044
[spacer]
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage, must be
selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to
phases A & B. The measurement loop should be set to Loop A-B.
[spacer] ASC: Phi off set PS x 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042
[spacer]
Setting for a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
[spacer] ASC: AR op. m ode P Sx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028
1: Voltage-checked
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
[spacer] ASC: AR with tCB PSx 000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051
0: No
[spacer]
Function ASC provides a choice as to whether the CB operating time (tCB), as
configured at M AI N: tCB ,clos e is to be taken into account for the precisely
synchronized reclosure (AR) or not.
[spacer] ASC: AR Op.m ode v- chk .P Sx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: AR V> volt.che ck PS x 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
“Voltage present”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer] ASC: AR V< volt.che ck PS x 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as “No voltage”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer] ASC: AR tmin v- check PS x 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer] ASC: AR V> s ync.che ck PS x 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: AR delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential voltage between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: AR delta f max PS x 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential frequency between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: AR delta phi max PS x 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential angle between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PS x 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer] ASC: MC op. mod e P Sx 000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059
1: Voltage-checked
[spacer]
Manual close command: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
[spacer] ASC: MC wit h tCB P Sx 000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105
0: No
[spacer]
Manual close command: In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this
parameter to Yes ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into
account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close
command.
[spacer] ASC: MC op.mode v- chk. PSx 000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063
[spacer]
Manual close command: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC V> volt .che ck PSx 000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
“Voltage present”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
[spacer] ASC: MC V< volt .che ck PSx 000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as “No voltage”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
[spacer] ASC: MC tm in v-che ck P Sx 000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: MC V> sync .che ck P Sx 000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC delta Vmax PS x 000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential voltage between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC delta f max P Sx 000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential frequency between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC delta phi max P Sx 000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential angle between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC tm in s ync.chk PS x 000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
Parameter Address
Ground fault (short- GFS C: Enable PSx 018 072 018 073 018 074 018 075
circuit) protection
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-294)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection is enabled.
Parameter Address
Ground fault (short- GSCSG: Enable P Sx 023 071 023 072 023 073 023 074
circuit) protection
signaling
0: No Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ground fault (short-circuit)
protection signaling is enabled.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC: Enable PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-324)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
[spacer] DTOC: Funct. st art ARC PSx 013 127 013 128 013 129 013 130
[spacer]
Using this setting parameter, any of the DTOC elements can trigger an
autoreclosing cycle: DTOC: F unct . st art AR C PSx is set to
DTOC: St arting I > or DTOC: St art ing Ineg>>, or ... (up to 8 DTOC
elements can be set simultaneously).
[spacer] DTOC: Mod e t ime r st art P Sx 002 138 002 139 002 142 002 143
[spacer]
This parameter permits the selection whether the timer stages for phase or
residual current stages are triggered with the start (With starting) or are
direction-dependent (With direction).
[spacer] DTOC: Me as .value I/ IN> PS x 060 002 060 003 060 004 060 005
[spacer] DTOC: Me as .val. I/ IN>> P Sx 060 006 060 007 060 008 060 009
0: Fundamental
[spacer] DTOC: Me as .val.I/ IN>>> P Sx 060 010 060 011 060 012 060 013
0: Fundamental
[spacer] DTOC: Me as .v. I/ IN>>>> P Sx 060 014 060 015 060 016 060 017
0: Fundamental
[spacer]
These settings allow to select for the respective overcurrent stage whether the
starting decision shall be based on the fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
Remark: For the negative-sequence stages, the starting decision is always based
on the fundamental.
[spacer] DTOC: I> PS x 072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007
[spacer] DTOC: I>> PS x 072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008
[spacer] DTOC: I>>> PS x 072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009
[spacer] DTOC: I>>>> PS x 072 010 073 010 074 010 075 010
[spacer]
Setting for operate value of the overcurrent stage.
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: tI> PSx 072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019
[spacer] DTOC: tI>> PSx 072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020
[spacer] DTOC: tI>>> PSx 072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021
[spacer] DTOC: tI>>>> PSx 072 022 073 022 074 022 075 022
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage.
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t I> PS x 017 071 077 237 078 237 079 237
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t I> > PS x 017 072 077 238 078 238 079 238
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t I> >> PS x 007 230 007 231 007 232 007 233
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t I> >>> PS x 013 115 013 116 013 117 013 118
[spacer]
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a trip signal in the
DTOC phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or non-
directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set accordingly
then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
[spacer] DTOC: Ineg> PSx 072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011
[spacer] DTOC: Ineg>> PSx 072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012
[spacer] DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx 072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013
[spacer] DTOC: Ineg>>>> PSx 072 014 073 014 074 014 075 014
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer] DTOC: tIneg > PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023
[spacer] DTOC: tIneg >> P Sx 072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024
[spacer] DTOC: tIneg >>> P Sx 072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: tIneg >>>> P Sx 072 026 073 026 074 026 075 026
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage of the negative-sequence
system.
[spacer] DTOC: Evaluat ion IN P S x 073 189 073 190 073 202 073 219
[spacer]
This setting defines which residual current will be monitored by the residual
current stages: the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or
the residual current measured at the T 4 transformer.
[spacer] DTOC: IN> PS x 072 015 073 015 074 015 075 015
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN> (IN= residual current).
[spacer] DTOC: IN>> PS x 072 016 073 016 074 016 075 016
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>> (IN= residual current).
[spacer] DTOC: IN>>> PS x 072 017 073 017 074 017 075 017
[spacer]
Setting for operate value IN>>> (IN= residual current).
[spacer] DTOC: IN>>>> PSx 072 018 073 018 074 018 075 018
[spacer]
Setting the operate value of the fourth overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Chapter “Technical Data”).
[spacer] DTOC: tIN> PSx 072 027 073 027 074 027 075 027
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>.
[spacer] DTOC: tIN>> PSx 072 028 073 028 074 028 075 028
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>.
[spacer] DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 072 029 073 029 074 029 075 029
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>.
[spacer] DTOC: tIN>>>> PSx 072 030 073 030 074 030 075 030
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IN>>>>.
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t IN> P Sx 072 032 072 042 072 082 072 091
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t IN>> P Sx 072 033 072 043 072 083 072 092
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t IN>>> P Sx 072 034 072 044 072 084 072 093
[spacer] DTOC: Direction t IN>>>>PS x 072 035 072 045 072 085 072 094
[spacer]
The setting for the measurement direction determines the measurement
direction of the residual current stages.
[spacer] DTOC: Puls.prol.IN>,int PSx 017 055 073 042 074 042 075 042
[spacer]
Setting for the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
[spacer] DTOC: tIN>,inte rm. P Sx 017 056 073 038 074 038 075 038
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground faults.
[spacer] DTOC: Hold- t. tIN>,int mPSx 017 057 073 039 074 039 075 039
[spacer]
Setting for the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.
Parameter Address
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-273, (p. 3-334)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which IDMT protection is enabled.
[spacer] IDMT: M ode t imer star t PS x 007 226 007 227 007 228 007 229
1: With starting
[spacer]
This parameter permits the selection whether the timer stages for phase or
residual current stages are triggered with the start (With starting) or are
direction-dependent (With direction).
[spacer] IDMT: M eas.value I/ IN PS x 060 018 060 019 060 020 060 021
[spacer]
These settings allow to select for the respective overcurrent stage whether the
starting decision shall be based on the fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
Remark: For the negative-sequence stage of each IDMTx, the starting decision is
always based on the fundamental.
[spacer] IDMT: T im e Correc tion P Sx 013 143 013 144 013 145 013 146
[spacer]
Parameter to compensate the IDMT starting time. Negative values reduce the
IDMT starting time by the set value. Positive values extend the IDMT starting
time by the set value.
[spacer] IDMT: I ref ,P PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: F actor KI,P PS x 007 250 007 251 007 252 007 253
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all types of characteristics.
This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable threshold along the X
axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not result in a shifting of the
characteristic itself.
[spacer] IDMT: C haracteristic P PSx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: F actor k t,P PS x 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: M in. trip t ime P PS x 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (phase current system). As a rule, this value
should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime P PSx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (phase current
system).
[spacer] IDMT: R e le as e P PS x 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct . tIr ef,P > PS x 017 066 077 239 078 239 079 239
[spacer]
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,P> trip signal
in the IDMT1 phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or non-
directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set accordingly
then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
[spacer] IDMT: I ref ,neg PS x 072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT: F actor KI,ne g PS x 007 254 007 255 008 002 008 005
[spacer]
Enable threshold for the IDMT protection starting for all Ineg types of
characteristics. This factor KI will result in a linear shifting of the enable
threshold along the X axis of the respective characteristic. The factor will not
result in a shifting of the characteristic itself.
[spacer] IDMT: C haracte r. ne g. P Sx 072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).
[spacer] IDMT: F actor k t,ne g PS x 072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence
current system).
[spacer] IDMT: M in.trip time ne gP Sx 072 078 073 078 074 078 075 078
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time (negative-sequence current system).
As a rule, this value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime neg PSx 072 072 073 072 074 072 075 072
[spacer]
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (negative-sequence
current system).
[spacer] IDMT: R e le as e neg. PSx 072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current
system).
[spacer] IDMT: E valuatio n IN P Sx 072 075 073 075 074 075 075 075
[spacer]
This setting determines which current will be monitored: The calculated current
∑ I̲ P or the residual current I̲ N measured at the T 4 current transformer.
[spacer] IDMT: I ref ,N PS x 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current (residual current system).
Depending on the setting of IDMT: E val uation IN PSx, either the
calculated or the measured reference current is used.
[spacer] IDMT: F actor KI,N PS x 001 173 001 174 001 175 001 176
[spacer]
The set factor I D MT: Fact or KI, N PS x is multiplied by the reference
quantity Iref,N in order to constitute the minimum operate value for the current
in the residual current measuring system.
[spacer] IDMT: C haracteristic N P Sx 072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT: F actor k t,N P S x 072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055
[spacer]
Setting for the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT: M in. trip t ime N P S x 072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time for the residual current measuring system.
This timer stage is started as soon as the minimum operate value is exceeded.
After the timer has elapsed, the trip signal is issued, regardless of the value of
the current.
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime N P Sx 072 073 073 073 074 073 075 073
[spacer]
Setting for the holding time for intermittent short circuits (residual current
system).
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: R e le as e N PSx 072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061
[spacer]
Setting for for the reset characteristic (residual current system).
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct . tIr ef,N> PSx 017 067 077 242 078 242 079 242
[spacer]
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,N> trip
signal in the IDMT1 residual current stage will be issued for forward, backward or
non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
Parameter Address
Short-circuit SCDD: Enable PSx 076 235 077 235 078 235 079 235
direction
determination
1: Yes Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-348)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which short-circuit direction
determination is enabled.
[spacer] SCDD: Tr ip b ias PSx 017 074 077 236 078 236 079 236
[spacer]
This setting determines whether an overcurrent direction determination in
forward direction shall be formed when the direction determination of the phase
current and residual current stage is blocked.
[spacer] SCDD: Evaluation I N PS x 008 105 008 106 008 107 008 108
[spacer]
This parameter is used to select whether the measured or the calculated
residual current value is to be used for the SCDD residual current stages.
[spacer] SCDD: Evaluation VNG PS x 071 056 071 057 071 058 071 059
[spacer]
User may select between Measured and Calculated (standard default).
[spacer] SCDD: VNG> PSx 010 045 010 060 010 080 010 139
[spacer]
Setting the operate value VNG>. This setting value is an enabling criterion of the
base point release of short-circuit direction determination.
In choosing this setting, the set nominal voltage M AI N: VNG,nom V.T.
sec. should be taken into account.
[spacer] SCDD: Charact. angle G P Sx 004 092 004 247 004 248 004 249
[spacer]
Setting for the characteristic angle of the residual current stage in
correspondence to the measuring relation. Using this setting, a wide range of
conditions can be accommodated, depending on the system's neutral grounding
impedance.
Examples:
● System neutral with relatively high resistance αG = 0°
● System neutral with relatively low resistance αG = −45°
● System neutral effectively grounded αG = −75°
● System neutral reactance-grounded αG = −90°
● System with isolated neutral αG = +90°
Parameter Address
Ground fault GFDSS : E nable PS x 001 050 001 051 001 052 001 053
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: No Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-361)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFDSS function is
enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : O p.m.GF pow./ adm P Sx 016 063 000 236 000 237 000 238
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values. The following settings are possible:
● “cos φ circuit” for resonant-grounded systems,
● “sin φ circuit” for isolated neutral-point systems.
[spacer] GFDSS : E valuat ion VNG PS x 016 083 001 011 001 012 001 013
[spacer]
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used for
direction determination: The displacement voltage calculated from the phase-
to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90
transformer of the P433.
[spacer] GFDSS : M eas . dir e ction P S x 016 070 001 002 001 003 001 004
[spacer]
This setting defines the measuring direction for the “forward” or “backward”
decision.
[spacer] GFDSS : VNG> PS x 016 062 000 233 000 234 000 235
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
[spacer] GFDSS : tVNG> PSx 016 061 000 230 000 231 000 232
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the VNG> trigger.
[spacer] GFDSS : f /fnom (P.me as.) PSx 016 091 001 044 001 045 001 046
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state
power evaluation.
Parameter Address
[spacer] GFDSS : f /fnom (I.me as. ) P Sx 016 092 001 047 001 048 001 049
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state
current evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : I N,act>/reac> LS PS x 016 064 000 239 000 240 000 241
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual
current that must be exceeded so that the “LS” (line side) directional decision is
enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : S ector angle LS P Sx 016 065 000 242 000 243 000 244
[spacer]
Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the line side direction.
Note: This setting is only effective in the “cos φ circuit” operating mode.
[spacer] GFDSS : O pe rate delay LS PSx 016 066 000 245 000 246 000 247
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the forward direction.
[spacer] GFDSS : R e le ase del ay LS P Sx 016 072 001 005 001 006 001 007
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the forward
direction.
[spacer] GFDSS : I N,act>/reac> BS PS x 016 067 000 251 000 252 000 253
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual
current that must be exceeded so that the “BS” (busbar side) directional
decision is enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : S ector angle BS P Sx 016 068 000 248 000 249 000 250
[spacer]
Setting for the sector angle for measurement in the direction of the busbar side.
Note: This setting is only effective in the “cos φ circuit” operating mode.
[spacer] GFDSS : O pe rate delay BS PSx 016 069 000 254 000 255 001 001
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the direction decision in the backward (reverse)
direction.
Parameter Address
[spacer] GFDSS : R e le ase del ay BS P Sx 016 073 001 008 001 009 001 010
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the direction decision in the
backward direction.
[spacer] GFDSS : I N> PS x 016 093 001 017 001 018 001 019
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of steady-state current evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : O pe rate delay IN P Sx 016 094 001 020 001 021 001 022
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of steady-state current evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : R e le ase del ay IN P Sx 016 095 001 023 001 024 001 025
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of steady-state current evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : G(N)> / B( N)> LS P S x 016 111 001 029 001 030 001 031
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of
residual current that must be exceeded so that the “LS” (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : G(N)> / B( N)> BS P S x 016 112 001 032 001 033 001 034
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of
residual current that must be exceeded so that the “BS” (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : Y (N)> P Sx 016 113 001 035 001 036 001 037
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the admittance for non-directional ground fault
determination (in operating mode “admittance evaluation”).
[spacer] GFDSS : Cor rection angle P Sx 016 110 001 026 001 027 001 028
0 -30 30 °
[spacer]
This setting is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system
transformers (in operating mode “admittance evaluation”).
[spacer] GFDSS : O pe r.de lay Y(N)> P S x 016 114 001 038 001 039 001 040
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay value of the admittance for non-directional ground
fault determination (in operating mode “admittance evaluation”).
Parameter Address
[spacer] GFDSS : R e l. de lay Y(N) > PS x 016 115 001 041 001 042 001 043
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of the admittance for non-directional
ground fault determination (in operating mode “admittance evaluation”).
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFTRP function is
enabled.
Parameter Address
tion signaling
0: No Fig. 3-311, (p. 3-377)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the GFSIG function is
enabled.
Parameter Address
Transient ground TGFD: Enable P Sx 001 054 001 055 001 056 001 057
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which the TGFD function is enabled.
[spacer] TGFD: Evaluation VNG PSx 016 048 001 058 001 059 001 060
[spacer]
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used for
evaluation: The displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a voltage
transformer assembly or the displacement voltage calculated from the three
phase-to-ground voltages.
[spacer] TGFD: M e as ur e m. dir ec. PSx 016 045 001 073 001 074 001 075
[spacer]
The direction measurement of the transient ground fault direction determination
function depends on the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection
is as shown in Chapter “Installation and Connection”, then the setting must be
Standard, if the P433's “forward” decision is to be in the direction of the
outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or – given a connection
scheme according to Chapter “Installation and Connection” – if the “forward”
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
Note: The global setting M AIN: C onn. me as. circ. IN does not affect the
direction determination feature of the transient ground fault direction
determination function.
[spacer] TGFD: VNG> PSx 016 041 001 061 001 062 001 063
[spacer]
Setting for the neutral-point displacement voltage threshold.
[spacer] TGFD: I N,p> PSx 016 042 001 064 001 065 001 066
[spacer]
Setting for the residual current threshold. A peak value is evaluated.
[spacer] TGFD: Op erate de lay P Sx 016 044 001 067 001 068 001 069
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay.
[spacer] TGFD: Buffe r t ime PSx 016 043 001 070 001 071 001 072
[spacer]
Setting for the signal buffer time for transient ground fault direction
determination.
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : S ele ct cur rent P Sx 013 139 013 140 013 141 013 142
protection
0: Max. phase current Fig., (p. 3-385)
[spacer]
Depending on this setting the thermal replica is calculated based on either the
maximum phase current, or based on the calculated residual current derived
from the sum of the phase currents (setting IN calculated), or based on the
residual current measured at the fourth transformer (setting IN measured).
[spacer] THER M : Enable PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer] THER M : Ir ef PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer] THER M : S tar t .f act.OL_RC PS x 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180
[spacer]
Setting for the starting factor to trigger overload recording.
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .1 ,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .2 ,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer] THER M : M ax.obje ct temp. P Sx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : O/ T f .Iref pe r s. PS x 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167
[spacer]
Setting for overtemperature resulting from a persistent limit current (Θmax -
Θa,max).
Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : Warning t emp. PS x 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153
[spacer]
Setting for the temperature (in °C) to trigger a warning alarm.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
[spacer] THER M : M ax. co ol. t emp. PSx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t emp. PS x 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
[spacer] THER M : M inimu m te mper at.PS x 076 178 077 178 078 178 079 178
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used for trip time calculation
if a cable runs in an underground tunnel system.
[spacer] THER M : Funct.f.CT A fai l. PSx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177
[spacer]
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will continue to
operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. User can select
between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and Blocking.
[spacer] THER M : Θ warning PS x 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the warning stage.
[spacer] THER M : Θ trip PS x 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the trip stage.
Note: If the operating mode has been set to Absolute replica, the setting here
will be automatically set to 100% and this parameter will be hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
[spacer] THER M : Hyste re s. Θ,tr ip P Sx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer] THER M : Warning pre-t rip PS x 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191
[spacer]
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : R e tain re pl ic a PS x 009 019 009 030 009 032 009 039
0: No
[spacer]
With this parameter it can be configured whether the thermal replica is retained
in the non-volatile section of the device's memory so that it will still be available
after an interruption of the supply voltage.
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct meas.input PS x 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177
[spacer]
This setting defines whether coolant temperature (ambient) shall be measured
and, if so, whether data acquisition shall take place via the PT 100 or the 20 mA
input.
Parameter Address
tion
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer] V<>: Ope rating mode PSx 076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages ('Star' operating
mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages ('Delta' operating mode) will be
monitored.
Note: In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection
function, the reference quantity is Vnom in the Delta operating mode, but Vnom/
√3 in the Star operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the following
example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of 80 V (phase-to-
phase):
operate value 80V
Setting value = = = 0.80
V nom 100V
Setting in the Star operating mode for an operate value of 46.2 V (phase-to-
phase):
operate value 46.2V 46.2V ⋅ 3
Setting value = = = = 0.80
V nom 100V 100V
3 3
[spacer] V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer] V<>: V> > PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer] V<>: V> >> PS x 011 075 011 076 011 077 011 078
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV> PS x 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tV>> PS x 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV>>> PS x 011 079 011 080 011 081 011 082
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV> 3-pole PS x 076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: tV>> 3- pole P S x 011 092 011 094 011 095 011 096
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: tV>>> 3- pole P Sx 011 099 011 105 011 117 011 118
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer] V<>: V< < PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer] V<>: V< << PS x 011 083 011 084 011 085 011 086
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<<.
[spacer] V<>: tV< PS x 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: tV<< PS x 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tV<<< PS x 011 088 011 089 011 090 011 091
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<<.
[spacer] V<>: tV< 3-pole PS x 076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: tV<< 3- pole P S x 011 119 011 124 011 125 011 126
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: tV<<< 3- pole P Sx 011 127 011 128 011 129 011 130
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
[spacer] V<>: Vpo s> PS x 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos>.
[spacer] V<>: Vpo s>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos>>.
[spacer] V<>: tVp os> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.
[spacer] V<>: tVp os>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.
[spacer] V<>: Vpo s< PS x 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos<.
[spacer] V<>: Vpo s<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vpos<<.
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tVp os< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.
[spacer] V<>: tVp os<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.
[spacer] V<>: Vneg> PS x 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vneg>.
[spacer] V<>: Vneg>> PS x 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vneg>>.
[spacer] V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.
[spacer] V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.
[spacer] V<>: Evaluation VNG PS x 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002
[spacer]
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be
monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P433 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
[spacer] V<>: Meas . Value VNG> P Sx 018 219 018 250 018 251 018 252
[spacer] V<>: Meas . Value VNG>>P Sx 018 253 018 254 018 255 019 005
[spacer]
These settings allow to select for the respective overcurrent stage whether the
starting decision shall be based on the fundamental or on the r.m.s. value.
[spacer] V<>: VNG> PS x 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011
[spacer]
Setting for operate value VNG>.
[spacer] V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012
[spacer]
Setting for operate value VNG>>.
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tVNG> PS x 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.
[spacer] V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.
[spacer] V<>: Vref> PS x 007 064 007 071 007 075 007 079
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref>.
[spacer] V<>: Vref>> PSx 007 065 007 068 007 072 007 076
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref>>.
[spacer] V<>: Vref>>> PS x 010 250 010 251 010 252 010 253
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref>>>.
[spacer] V<>: tVref> PSx 007 066 007 069 007 073 007 077
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>.
[spacer] V<>: tVref>> PSx 007 067 007 070 007 074 007 078
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>>.
[spacer] V<>: tVref>>> PSx 010 254 010 255 011 020 011 035
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>>>.
[spacer] V<>: Vref< PS x 007 086 007 097 007 101 007 105
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref<.
[spacer] V<>: Vref<< PSx 007 087 007 098 007 102 007 106
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref<<.
[spacer] V<>: Vref<<< PS x 011 059 011 062 011 069 011 070
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Vref<<<.
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tVref< PSx 007 088 007 099 007 103 007 107
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<.
[spacer] V<>: tVref<< PSx 007 096 007 100 007 104 007 108
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vref<<.
[spacer] V<>: tVref<<< PSx 011 071 011 072 011 073 011 074
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref<<<.
[spacer] V<>: Op. mode V< mon. P Sx 001 162 001 163 001 164 001 165
[spacer]
Activation of the minimum current monitoring mode for undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: I enable V< PSx 001 155 001 159 001 160 001 161
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the minimum current monitoring for
undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: tT rans ient pulse P Sx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
[spacer] V<>: Hyst . V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
[spacer] V<>: Hyst . V<> de duc . P Sx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring deduced voltages
such as Vneg and VNG.
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Enable PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: No Fig. 3-340, (p. 3-410)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
protection is enabled.
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f1 PS x 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f2 PS x 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
1: f
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f3 PS x 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
1: f
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f4 PS x 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
1: f
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f5 PS x 019 171 019 172 019 173 019 174
1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
[spacer] f<> : f1 PS x 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
[spacer] f<> : f2 PS x 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
[spacer] f<> : f3 PS x 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
[spacer] f<> : f4 PS x 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
[spacer] f<> : f5 PS x 019 151 019 152 019 153 019 154
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer] f<> : tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
[spacer] f<> : tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
[spacer] f<> : tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
[spacer] f<> : tf5 PSx 019 155 019 156 019 157 019 158
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer] f<> : df1/dt PS x 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
[spacer] f<> : df2/dt PS x 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
[spacer] f<> : df3/dt PS x 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
[spacer] f<> : df4/dt PS x 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
[spacer] f<> : df5/dt PS x 019 159 013 092 013 093 013 094
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 PS x 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
[spacer] f<> : De lta f2 PS x 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
[spacer] f<> : De lta f3 PS x 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
[spacer] f<> : De lta f4 PS x 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
[spacer] f<> : De lta f5 PS x 019 163 019 164 019 165 019 166
[spacer]
Setting for Delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 PS x 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
[spacer] f<> : De lta t2 PS x 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : De lta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
[spacer] f<> : De lta t4 PSx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
[spacer] f<> : De lta t5 PSx 019 167 019 168 019 169 019 170
[spacer]
Setting for Delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
Parameter Address
shedding
0: No Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-415)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which underfrequency load
shedding protection is enabled.
[spacer] Pf<: f1 PS x 015 211 015 212 015 221 015 222
[spacer] Pf<: f2 PS x 015 223 015 224 015 225 015 226
[spacer] Pf<: f3 PS x 015 227 015 228 015 229 015 230
[spacer] Pf<: f4 PS x 015 231 015 232 015 233 015 234
[spacer] Pf<: f5 PS x 015 235 015 236 015 237 015 238
[spacer] Pf<: f6 PS x 015 239 015 240 015 241 015 242
[spacer] Pf<: f7 PS x 015 243 015 244 015 245 015 246
[spacer] Pf<: f8 PS x 015 247 015 248 015 249 015 250
[spacer] Pf<: f9 PS x 015 251 015 252 015 253 015 254
[spacer] Pf<: f10 PSx 015 255 016 001 016 002 016 003
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold.
[spacer] Pf<: tPF< PSx 016 004 016 005 016 006 016 007
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of underfrequency load shedding protection.
[spacer] Pf<: Dire ction Pmin PS x 016 008 016 009 016 010 016 011
0: Forward directional
[spacer]
This setting defines the active power direction.
[spacer] Pf<: Pmin PS x 016 012 016 016 016 020 016 021
[spacer]
The setting defines the threshold of maximum active power for allowing tripping
in case of underfrequency threshold is reached.
Parameter Address
[spacer] Pf<: Hystere sis Pmin PSx 016 217 016 218 016 219 016 220
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the active power threshold.
[spacer] Pf<: Im in PS x 016 022 016 023 016 024 016 025
[spacer]
The setting defines the minimum current to release active power measurement.
[spacer] Pf<: S ector angle PSx 016 026 016 027 016 028 016 029
[spacer]
The setting defines the angle to provide stability under high active power
condition.
Parameter Address
Power directional P<>: Enabled PSx 014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255
protection
0: No Fig. 3-347, (p. 3-419)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional protection
is enabled.
[spacer] P<>: P> PS x 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value P> for the active power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay P > PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay P > PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage P>.
[spacer] P<>: Direction P> PS x 017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P> of active power.
[spacer] P<>: P>> PS x 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value P>> for the active power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay P >>PS x 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P>>.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay P >>P Sx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage P>>.
[spacer] P<>: Direction P>> PS x 017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
Parameter Address
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>P S x 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P>> of active power.
[spacer] P<>: Q> PS x 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Q> of the reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay Q> P Sx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay Q> P Sx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>.
[spacer] P<>: Direction Q> PS x 017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> P Sx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q> of reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: Q>> PS x 017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value Q>> of the reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay Q>>P Sx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q>>.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay Q>>P Sx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay of stage Q>>.
[spacer] P<>: Direction Q>> PS x 017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PS x 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q>> of reactive power.
Parameter Address
[spacer] P<>: P< PS x 017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033
[spacer]
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay P < PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay P < PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<.
[spacer] P<>: Direction P< PS x 017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P< of active power.
[spacer] P<>: P<< PS x 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237
[spacer]
Setting for operate value P<< of active power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay P <<PS x 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage P<<.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay P <<P Sx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage P<<.
[spacer] P<>: Direction P<< PS x 017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PS x 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value P<< of active power.
[spacer] P<>: Q< PS x 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Q< of reactive power.
Parameter Address
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay Q< P Sx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay Q< P Sx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<.
[spacer] P<>: Direction Q< PS x 018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal will
be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< P Sx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q< of reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: Q<< PS x 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088
[spacer]
Setting for operate value Q<< of reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: Op erate de lay Q<<P Sx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage Q<<.
[spacer] P<>: R eleas e de lay Q<<P Sx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239
[spacer]
Setting for the release delay (reset time) of stage Q<<.
[spacer] P<>: Direction Q<< PS x 018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245
[spacer]
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward (reverse) or non-directional fault decisions.
[spacer] P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< P Sx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098
[spacer]
Setting for the disengaging ratio of operate value Q<< of reactive power.
[spacer] P<>: t Transient pulse P Sx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by stages P<, P<<, Q< and
Q<< after the respective operate delays have elapsed.
Parameter Address
Voltage controlled QV: Enable d PS x 013 223 013 224 013 225 013 226
directional reactive
power protection
1: Yes Fig. 3-361, (p. 3-432)
Fig. 3-362, (p. 3-432)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which QV protection is enabled.
[spacer] QV: V< PS x 013 231 013 232 013 233 013 234
[spacer]
The setting defines the phase-phase undervoltage threshold. The funcation
operates when all three phase-phase voltages drop below the set threshold
(AND combination).
[spacer] QV: hystere sis V< PSx 014 079 014 080 014 081 014 082
2 1 10 %
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the undervoltage threshold of QV function.
[spacer] QV: Direction Q PSx 013 227 013 228 013 229 013 230
0: Forward directional
[spacer]
This setting defines the reactive power direction.
[spacer] QV: Qmin PSx 014 084 014 085 014 086 014 087
[spacer]
The setting defines the threshold of maximum reactive power for allowing
tripping in case of undevoltage threshold is reached.
[spacer] QV: Hystere sis Qmin PS x 016 213 016 214 016 215 016 216
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the reactive power threshold.
[spacer] QV: S e ctor ang le PSx 013 235 013 236 013 237 013 238
[spacer]
The setting defines the angle to provide stability under high active power
condition.
[spacer] QV: Im in PS x 013 243 013 244 013 245 013 246
[spacer]
The setting defines the minimum current to release reactive power
measurement.
[spacer] QV: t1 PS x 013 247 013 248 013 249 013 250
[spacer] QV: t2 PS x 013 251 013 252 013 253 013 254
[spacer]
Setting for the first or second operate time, respectively.
Parameter Address
[spacer] QV: M in.d ur .tr.cmd.1 PSx 014 065 014 066 014 067 014 068
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum pulse time of the first trip command.
[spacer] QV: M in.d ur .tr.cmd.2 PSx 014 069 014 070 014 071 014 072
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum pulse time of the second trip command.
7.1.3.4 Control
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: SI active USER 221 002
[spacer]
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 1 221 014
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Op. delay fct . block 221 029
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.
[spacer] MAIN: Pe rm.No.mot .dr iv e op 221 027
[spacer]
Setting for the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M AIN: Mon.ti me mot .dr iv e s.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time mot. drive s 221 026
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
[spacer] MAIN: Cool.t ime mot.drive s 221 028
[spacer]
Setting for the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time motor rel ay 221 060
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 max . ope r. c ap. 221 084
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. ope r.
cap..
[spacer] MAIN: DC op. delay t1 221 240
[spacer]
Setting the delay of the commands CMD_DC1, CMD_DC2 and CMD_DC3.
[spacer] MAIN: DC2/3 rele ase de lay 221 242
[spacer]
Setting the delay of the termination of the commands CMD_DC2 and CMD_DC3.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd .end f. DC fai l. 221 111
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200, this parameter can be
set to Yes or No. If the K200 contacts should not have opened until the end of
the command to the motor when the set monitoring time-delay had expired
(monitoring via binary signal input –U 706, signal S IG_1: S ignal S012 EXT
as the standard setting) then the direction control contacts are opened if this
parameter is set to Yes.
If this parameter is set to No then respective fault signals (MAIN: DC fai l.
cmd. End, MAIN: DC fail . cmd.s tar t, M AIN: DE V op.time
exceede d) are issued when the monitoring time-delay has expired and the
direction control contacts will remain closed. (Note: This behavior still bears the
danger of an undefined switch position!)
[spacer] MAIN: Ex t.cmd .ter m. w/ o P I 221 115
1: Yes
[spacer]
Select whether the command CMD_DC3 shall be terminated only by the signal
SIG_DC3, or with positive indication of the final switchgear position as well.
(Note that in either case, the termination of CMD_DC3 is delayed by the setting
MAIN: DC2/3 rele ase de lay.)
Parameter Address
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Setting for the designation of the respective external device. Either one of the
pre-defined designations or the term Device Name User may be selected. In the
latter case any text (max 4 characters) may be entered at DEV01: DEV-
Name Use r that will be used as the devices' designation. (The same holds for
DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: DEV- Name Us er 218 101
0:
0:
0:
[spacer]
Any text (max. 4 characters) may be entered as the devices’ name which will
then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. has been set to Device Name User. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at DE V01: Des ig nat.
ext. de v. it will be used and DE V01: D EV- Name User is ignored. A
designation with more than 4 characters is internally truncated. (The same holds
for DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: Oper. m ode cmd. 210 024
3: Time control
3: Time control
[spacer]
Selecting the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
[spacer] DEV01: Latching ti me 210 005
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Setting for the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear
position signal – “Open” or “Closed” – has been received.
[spacer] DEV01: Op.tim e swit ch. dev. 210 004
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
[spacer] DEV01: Gr. as s ign. de bounc . 210 011
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter
suppression.
[spacer] DEV01: S tartCmdTi me superv . 210 007
[spacer]
This parameter allows for defining a monitoring timer for the begin of a switch
command.
After sending an Open / Close command, the corresponding timer starts. If the
switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and MAIN: S tar tcmdtime
exceed. is signaled.
In the default setting blocked this monitoring is switched off. This is
recommended for switchgear units for which it is impossible to detect the
intermediate position.
[spacer] DEV01: Interm . pos. s uppr . 210 012
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the “intermediate position” signal will be
suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
[spacer] DEV01: S tat .ind .in ter m.pos. 210 027
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the “Faulty position” signal is issued.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg . s w.tr . pl ug 210 014
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal that is used to signal the position (“plugged-in” /
“unplugged”) of the switch truck plug.
[spacer] DEV01: With ge n. trip cmd.1 210 021
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
[spacer] DEV01: With ge n. trip cmd.2 210 022
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 2” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
[spacer] DEV01: With close c md. /pr ot 210 023
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the “close
command” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctrl.open 210 019
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctr.clos e 210 020
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the “Closed” position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd ope n 218 120
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Select whether open commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd clos e 218 160
[spacer]
Select whether close commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Oper.count .l imit 218 211
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit value for the number of switching commands for the respective
switchgear unit.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Ope n 210 015
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Open”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Close 210 016
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Close”
command.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Open” position is permitted without
a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e w/ o stat . int . 210 026
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Closed” position is permitted
without a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I open 210 039
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I clos 210 040
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I op 210 041
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I c l 210 042
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
“phase 2” of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Therefore it is a
requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as
with software versions that still implement “phase 1”, only with the request for a
switching operation.
This parameter sets the cycle time, after which a check of the interlock
conditions is carried out.
As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it
must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting
value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without
any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so
short that the P433 will be under too much strain. As the CPU load of the P433 is
dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is
not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
[spacer] ILOCK: R se t ILOC K violati on 221 123
[spacer]
The interlock violation signal (221 018) M AIN: Interlock equ. viol . will be
automatically reset after the time period set here. (The default value Blocked
disables the automatic reset.)
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Definition of the interlock conditions.
8.1 Operation
The P433 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the “Operation” and “Events” folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P433_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
Parameter Address
interface
0.0 0.0 100.0 %
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer] COMM 3: No.t.err.,max,st ore d 120 041
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back res ult 120 057
[spacer]
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr e nt IDC p.u. 004 135
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e 004 133
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e p.u. 004 221
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e Tmax 004 233
[spacer]
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature
input on the analog p/c board.
Parameter Address
output
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e of day 003 091
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witc hing 003 095
[spacer]
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
communication interfaces.
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que nc y f 004 040
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer] MAIN: IA prim,de mand 006 226
[spacer]
Display the three delayed phase currents (demand values) as primary
quantities.
[spacer] MAIN: IA prim,de mand st or. 006 223
[spacer]
Display the three stored phase currents (demand values) as primary quantities.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. 005 050
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: IP,max p rim.,s tor ed 005 034
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Curr. IP,m in prim. 005 055
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current A pr im. 005 040
[spacer]
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current B prim. 006 040
[spacer]
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current C pr im. 007 040
[spacer]
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current Σ( IP) pri m. 005 010
[spacer]
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IN pr im. 004 043
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity. The
measured residual current is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. 008 042
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. 009 042
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. 005 042
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary
quantity.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage C- G pr im. 007 042
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG )/ 3 pr im. 005 012
[spacer]
Display of the calculated neutral-displacement voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VNG pr im. 004 041
[spacer]
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90
as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage Vr ef pri m. 005 046
[spacer]
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. 008 044
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Volt. VPP,min prim. 009 044
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage A- B pri m. 005 044
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage B-C prim. 006 044
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a primary
quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage C- A prim. 007 044
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary
quantity.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Active powe r P pr im. 004 050
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q prim. 004 052
[spacer]
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Active powe r fac tor 004 054
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power factor.
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim 008 065
2: MWh
2: MWh
2: Mvarh
2: Mvarh
[spacer]
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
At run-time, the value is displayed with 32 bit precision. (But note that for
technical reasons, this value is internally stored as a text value.)
Value ranges:
● MAIN: Act .e ne rgy outp.pr im – 0 … 6,553,500.00 MWh
● MAIN: Act.ene rgy inp. pri m – 0 … 6,553,500.00 MWh
● MAIN: Re act.e n. out p. pr im – 0 … 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
● MAIN: Re act. e n. inp. prim – 0 … 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
Note: As an alternative, the same values also exist as numbers with 16 bit
precision:
● (005 061) M AIN: Act .e ne rgy out p.prim
● (005 062) M AI N: Act .e ne r gy inp. pri m
● (005 063) M AIN: Re act .e n. out p. prim
● (005 064) M AIN: Reac t. e n. inp. prim
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim 005 061
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
The value is displayed as a number with 16 bit precision.
The setting at M AIN: Op. mode e nergy cnt . decides which procedure
shall be used to determine the active and reactive energy:
● If procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined
every 2 s (approximately).
● If procedure 2 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined
every 100 ms (approximately).
Procedure 2 obviously gives more precise results but puts more strain on the
system.
Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded,
the determination of the energy output is restarted, and the value that
exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle. Moreover, a counter is
incremented:
● (009 090) M AIN: No.ove rfl.act .e n.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: Act .e nergy out p.pr im
● (009 091) M AI N: No.ov e r fl.act .e n.inp: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Act .e ner gy inp. pr im
● (009 092) M AIN: No. ov/ fl.r e ac. en.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: R eact .en. out p. prim
● (009 093) MAIN: No.ov/ fl. r e ac.e n.i np: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Re act . en. i np. pr im
Note that the maximum value of these counters is 10000.
As an alternative to these 16 bit numbers, there are also 32 bit precision values
available:
● (008 065) M AIN: Act .e ne rgy o ut p.pri m
● (008 066) M AIN: Act .ene rgy i np. prim
● (008 067) M AIN: R eact .e n. outp. pri m
● (008 068) M AIN: R eact . en. inp. pri m
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi A 004 055
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi B 004 056
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi N 004 072
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG.
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage
and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
[spacer]
Display of the phase relation of measured and calculated residual current. (The
phase relation is displayed as either “Equal phase” or “Reverse phase”.)
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que ncy f p.u. 004 070
[spacer]
Display of system frequency referred to fn.
[spacer] MAIN: IA p.u.,de mand 006 235
[spacer]
Display of the delayed phase currents referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored phase currents referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the positive sequence current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom. The measured
residual current is displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VP G,max p.u. 008 043
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage
and the measured residual current system quantities IN referred to 100°.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the positive-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the negative-sequence voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer T 90
referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to Vnom.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent power
Snom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A referred to 100°C.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u 005 074
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B referred to 100°C.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C referred to 100°C.
[spacer] MAIN: Angle phi N p.u. 005 076
[spacer]
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system quantities IN
and VNG referred to 100°.
[spacer]
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
[spacer] MAIN: Dumm y entry 000 031
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
Not measured 0.000 30.000 IN,nom Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-366)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the active component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the reactive component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the harmonic content of residual current
referred to IN,nom. This display is only active when the steady-state current
evaluation mode of the ground fault direction determination function (GFDSS) is
enabled.
[spacer] GFDSS : Adm itt . Y(N) p.u. 004 191
[spacer]
Display of the updated admittance value referred to YN,nom.
Note: With setting: GF DS S : E valuat ion VNG PS x set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
With setting: GFDSS: E val uation VNG PSx = Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated conductance value referred to YN,nom.
Note: With setting: G FDSS : Ev aluation VNG PSx set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
With setting: GFDSS: E valuat ion VNG P Sx = Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the updated susceptance value referred to YN,nom.
Note: With setting: G FDSS : Ev aluat ion VNG PS x set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
With setting: GFDSS: E valuat ion VNG P Sx = Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
Parameter Address
protection
Not measured -25000 25000 % Fig. 3-322, (p. 3-391)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm pr im 007 220
[spacer]
Display of the “thermal current” (as a primary quantity, or as a per unit quantity,
respectively).
These measured operating values are calculated as follows:
Statustherm. repl.
I therm,prim = I ref I nom,CT,prim
100
I therm,prim
I therm,p.u. =
I ref I nom,CT,prim
With:
● Itherm,prim = THERM : Cur re nt I, ther m prim
● Itherm,p.u. = THE RM: C ur rent I,t herm p.u
● Statustherm. repl. = THE RM : St at us THER M r eplica
● Iref = THERM: Iref PS x
● Inom,CT,prim = M AIN: Inom C .T . pr im.
In a measured values message the thermal current is processed as a per-unit
variable referred to Iref.
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t empe ratur e 004 149
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to None the set temperature value will be displayed. When set to
PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer will be
displayed. When set to 20mA input the temperature measured via an external
20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] THER M : Pre - trip t ime left 004 139
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function
referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer] THER M : Object te mp. p.u. 004 179
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t emp. p.u. 004 178
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Te m p. offse t re pli ca 004 109
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
Parameter Address
tion keys
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
● "Off": The function key is in the “Off” position.
● "On": The function key is in the “On” position.
Parameter Address
interface
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the relevant receive signal.
[spacer] COMM 3: State send 1 121 000
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
Parameter Address
Orientated
Substation Events
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 1 st ate 106 200
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
Parameter Address
output
0: Inactive Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
● Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
● Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
Parameter Address
1: Active
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
● Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
● Active: The LED indicator is energized.
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 1 E XT 030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 2 E XT 030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Illum ination on EX T 037 101
0: No
[spacer]
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
[spacer] LOC: Loc.acc.bl ock .act iv e 221 005
Parameter Address
communication
interface 1
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
interface
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Communication
0: No
[spacer]
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
[spacer] IEC: Control res e rv at io n 221 082
0: No
[spacer]
Display when a client has made a reservation to control an external device
(“select” for control by control mode “select before operate”).
Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Ext .De v01 posit ion 109 000
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 ope n 109 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 close d 109 002
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state
of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 int erm.pos 109 003
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D01 link fault y 107 180
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the protection and control unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Display when GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty or not
available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity
stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a
change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at which the next state
signal must be received.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D link f ault y 107 250
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
Parameter Address
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Block outp .r el. EXT 040 014
output
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
output
1: Yes
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: Standard time
0: No
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s ynchr oniz ed 009 109
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this fault signal is issued
(as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after it has been issued a close command and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.s uppr . st arte d 221 121
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the chatter suppression has started.
[spacer] MAIN: DC fail. cmd. End 221 108
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not reopened after the set monitoring time-delay has
elapsed.
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this signal is issued if the
K200 contacts have not closed after the set monitoring time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: St artcm dt ime e xce e d. 221 112
[spacer]
If the monitoring, set by D EV01 : St artC mdTime superv. (or
DEV02: S tartCmdTi me superv . etc.), is active then an exceeded timer is
flagged by this logic state signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 act iv e 221 017
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
selection
0: No
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
recording
0: No Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-118)
Parameter Address
recording
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
recording
0: No
Parameter Address
acquisition
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
blocking
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No
[spacer]
This parameter allows to block the “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference
voltage via binary input (e. g. from circuit breaker auxiliary contacts) or
programmable logic.
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . volt age o.k . 038 048
Parameter Address
time protection
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-226)
Parameter Address
protection
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
control
0: No
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
synchronism check
0: No
[spacer]
This parameter allows to select the ASC input source via binary input,
communication protocol signal or programmable logic. (See setting (016 222)
ASC: Me as.V(T90 ) USE R PS x for details.)
[spacer] ASC: R es et coun ter s E XT 006 074
0: No
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode automatic reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C clos e r. EXT 037 064
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Enab l.close re qu.E X T 037 063
1: Yes
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: AR close re que st E X T 008 236
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Signal that reports which voltage(s) the ASC function is currently using for the
operating modes “voltage-checked close enable” and “voltage/synchronism-
checked close enable”.
● The value No means that the three phase-to-ground voltages are checked.
● The value Yes means that the (single-phase) voltage measured at
transformer T90 is checked.
(See also parameters (016 222) ASC: M e as. V(T 90) U SER PSx, (016 221)
ASC: Me as .V(T 90) EX T.)
[spacer] ASC: Ext./us e r enabled 037 092
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C close re qu. 034 019
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: AR close re que st 008 239
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: MC Close r eques t 034 018
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Cycle running 038 019
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
signaling
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
current protection
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-341)
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
direction
determination
0: No Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-350)
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
tion signaling
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GFS IG: S end (tr ans m.r el ay) 037 089
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
protection
0: No
0: No
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
Parameter Address
tion
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
shedding
0: No Fig. 3-343, (p. 3-415)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
protection
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
directional reactive
power protection
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
failure protection
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the residual current is greater than the set value CBF: IN<.
[spacer] CBF: S tartup 3p 038 211
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-384, (p. 3-453)
Fig. 3-388, (p. 3-457)
Parameter Address
0: Not triggered
0: Not triggered
Parameter Address
0: Not triggered
0: Not triggered
0: Not triggered
Parameter Address
monitoring
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the number of switching commands has exceeded the set limit
value.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: Intermediate pos.
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: Intermediate pos.
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
commands
0: No Fig. 3-420, (p. 3-496)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Output of the respective equation of the interlocking logic.
These logic state signals are transmitted with the request for a switching
operation, and cyclically (according to the setting ILO CK: Cycle t
inte rl.che ck).
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 1
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 003 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 003 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se l. po s. dev. tes t 221 105
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Select a device DEVxx for testing the transmission of switchgear device position
in monitoring direction.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t p osition de v. 221 106
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carry out a test to check the transmission of switchgear device position in
monitoring direction for the device selected at C OMM1: S el. pos .
dev.test.
Parameter Address
communication
interface 2
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 103 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 103 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Parameter Address
interface
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting counter for number of telegram errors.
[spacer] COMM 3: Se nd s ignal for t es t 120 050
0: None
1: 1
0: don't execute
170 0 255
[spacer]
Setting a bit pattern consisting of 3 bits.
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back t est 120 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carrying out a loop back test with the PCOMM interface.
[spacer] COMM 3: Hold time for te s t 120 052
10 1 600 s
[spacer]
Selecting the hold time (in seconds) for the functional testing.
Parameter Address
Communication
060 000: MAIN: Without function
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: Not assigned
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to
updated measured values.
Parameter Address
output
0: don't execute Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay assign. f.t e st 003 042
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay te st 003 043
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d -
time f or tes t.
[spacer] OUTP: Hold- tim e for t e st 003 044
[spacer]
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
Parameter Address
output
0: don't execute Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-60)
[spacer]
Resetting the measured data output function.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● All counters
● LED indicators
● Operating data memory
● All event memories
● Event counters
● Fault data
● Measured overload data
● Recorded fault values
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. USE R 021 010
[spacer]
Reset of the following displays:
● LED indicators
● Fault data
[spacer] MAIN: Rs e t .lat ch.t rip US ER 021 005
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. cUS ER 003 007
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t IP,max,s t .USER 003 033
[spacer]
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t m eas .v. en.USE R 003 032
[spacer]
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 1 USER 005 253
[spacer]
Group of resetting commands.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel.
Note: The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.clos .cmd.USE R 003 105
[spacer]
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the local control panel
(enables manual breaker close operations).
[spacer] MAIN: Man.trip cmd. A US E R 003 017
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A phase-selective trip command is issued from the local control panel for
100 ms.
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. US ER 018 033
[spacer]
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time.
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t War m re st art 003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart of the software is carried out. The device functions as it does
when the power supply is turned on, except that no hardware tests are carried
out.
[spacer] MAIN: Warm re star t 010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t Cold re star t 000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart of the software is carried out. This means that all settings and
recordings are cleared, but no tests of the hardware are carried out during the
restart. Parameter values used by the P433 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P433 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P433 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P433 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
recording
0: don't execute Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter Address
recording
0: don't execute Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Reset of the overload memory.
Parameter Address
recording
0: don't execute Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Reset of the ground fault memory.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. USE R 003 006
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● LED indicators
● Fault memory
● Fault counter
● Fault data
● Recorded fault values
Parameter Address
blocking
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Reset of the counters that are used for the enhanced counting-based tripping.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSIG: Dis able US ER 003 131
[spacer]
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSIG: Tes t telecom. USE R 015 009
[spacer]
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Parameter Address
control
0: don't execute Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ARC: Disable USER 003 133
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ARC: T est HS R A-B- C US ER 011 066
[spacer]
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
[spacer] ARC: R ese t counte rs US ER 003 005
[spacer]
The ARC counters are reset.
Parameter Address
synchronism check
0: don't execute Fig. 3-220, (p. 3-275)
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ASC: Disable USER 003 135
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ASC: AR close re qu. US E R 008 238
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer] ASC: MC clos e r e qu. USE R 018 004
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t AR clos e r .US ER 008 237
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C clos e r US ER 018 005
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer] ASC: R es et coun ter s US ER 003 089
[spacer]
The ASC counters are reset.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
0: don't execute Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-294)
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] GFS C: Dis able US ER 003 137
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
signaling
0: don't execute Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is enabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer] GSCSG: Disab le USER 003 139
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection signaling is disabled from the local control
panel.
[spacer] GSCSG: T es t telecom. USE R 023 086
[spacer]
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: don't execute Fig. 3-303, (p. 3-367)
Fig. 3-309, (p. 3-373)
[spacer]
The counters for the ground fault direction determination function using steady-
state values are reset.
Parameter Address
tion signaling
0: don't execute Fig. 3-311, (p. 3-377)
[spacer]
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The direction decisions can be reset while the buffer time is elapsing.
[spacer] TGFD: R es et counte rs US ER 003 022
[spacer]
The counters for the transient ground fault direction determination function are
reset.
Parameter Address
protection
0: don't execute Fig. 3-323, (p. 3-393)
[spacer]
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
Parameter Address
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: M ax. frequ. for
f> and f<>: Min. fre qu. for f<.
Parameter Address
shedding
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
failure protection
0: don't execute Fig. 3-365, (p. 3-435)
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] CBF: Disable USER 003 015
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Values are initialized to trigger circuit breaker condition monitoring.
[spacer] CBM: Blocking USER 022 150
[spacer]
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection
injection testing.
[spacer] CBM: R e se t m eas .val . USER 003 013
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting circuit breaker condition monitoring
[spacer] CBM: S e t No. CB oper. A 022 131
Blocked 0 65000
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the number of CB operations.
[spacer] CBM: S e t remain. CB op. A 022 134
Blocked 0 65000
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the remaining CB operations.
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣItrip A 022 137
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
Parameter Address
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t USE R 217 003
[spacer]
Count reset.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8.2 Events
Parameter Address
interface
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of corrupted telegrams.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. 221 087
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer] MAIN: No. g en.t ri p cmds . 1 004 006
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 1.
[spacer] MAIN: No. g en.t ri p cmds . 2 009 050
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 2.
[spacer] MAIN: No. g en.t ri p cmds . 3 009 056
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 3.
[spacer] MAIN: No. g en.t ri p cmds . 4 009 057
[spacer]
Number of general trip commands 4.
[spacer] MAIN: No. f inal t rip c mds . 004 005
[spacer]
Number of final trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. close c ommands 009 055
[spacer]
Number of close commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. m otor dri ve op. 221 025
[spacer]
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated during
the monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: No.overfl .act.e n. out 009 090
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input
was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.reac.e n.out 009 092
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.reac.e n.inp 009 093
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 1000 Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Number of overload events.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-138)
[spacer]
Number of ground faults.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer] FT_RC: No. sys te m dis t urb. 004 010
[spacer]
Number of system disturbances.
Parameter Address
blocking
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of stable power swing trajectories.
[spacer] PSB: No. OO S-Swi ng 006 026
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Number of unstable power swings.
Parameter Address
control
0: don't execute Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-272)
[spacer]
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
[spacer] ARC: Num be r T DR 004 008
[spacer]
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Parameter Address
synchronism check
0: don't execute Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-291)
[spacer]
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
[spacer] ASC: No. clos e re que st s 009 033
[spacer]
Number of close requests.
[spacer] ASC: No. clos e re je ct ions 009 034
[spacer]
Number of close rejections.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
0: don't execute Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Number of trip signals.
Parameter Address
direction
determination using
steady-state values
0: don't execute Fig. 3-309, (p. 3-373)
[spacer]
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : No. GF (curr . meas ) 009 003
[spacer]
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.
[spacer] GFDSS : No. GF admit t. Y( N) 009 060
[spacer]
Number of ground faults (non-directional) detected by the admittance
evaluation method.
[spacer] GFDSS : No. GF f orward/ LS 009 000
[spacer]
Number of ground faults in the forward direction.
[spacer] GFDSS : No. GF back ward/ BS 009 001
[spacer]
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Number of transient ground faults.
[spacer] TGFD: No. GF fo rward/LS 004 013
[spacer]
Number of transient ground faults in the forward direction.
[spacer] TGFD: No. GF bac kward/B S 004 014
[spacer]
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
0 0 65000 Fig. 3-380, (p. 3-448)
0 0 65000
0 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of mechanical switching operations made.
[spacer] CBM: R e main. No. CB op. A 008 014
30000 0 65000
30000 0 65000
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear with
reference to the CB wear characteristic).
Parameter Address
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of switching operations made. It is also possible to manually set this
counter to any value from 0 to 65535.
[spacer] DEV01: De v. op. c apabi li ty 210 003
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations. It is also possible to manually set
this counter to any value from 1 to 99.
Parameter Address
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-128)
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer] OL_DA: S tatus THERM r e pl ic a 004 147
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HERM 004 058
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer] OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THE RM 004 035
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] OL_DA: C oolant te mp. T HERM 004 036
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
meas .inputPS x.
When set to None the set temperature value will be displayed. When set to
PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance thermometer will be
displayed. When set to 20mA input the temperature measured via an external
20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THE RM 004 148
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
[spacer] OL_DA: Of fs et THERM r epl ic a 004 154
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 min Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-132)
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault.
[spacer] GF_DA: GF duratio n pow.me as 009 024
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state power evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
[spacer] GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.u. 009 020
[spacer]
Display of the neutral-displacement voltage of the most recent ground fault
referred to Vnom.
Note: This display is only active if the steady-state power evaluation mode of
the ground fault direction determination function is enabled.
[spacer] GF_DA: Current I N p. u. 009 021
[spacer]
Display of the residual current of the most recent ground fault referred to Inom.
Note: This display is only active when the ground fault direction determination
function using steady state values (GFDSS) is enabled.
[spacer] GF_DA: Curr. IN,act p.u. 009 022
[spacer]
Display of the active component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to Inom.
Note: This display is only active if the steady-state power evaluation mode of
the ground fault direction determination function is enabled.
[spacer] GF_DA: Curr.I N,reac p.u. 009 023
[spacer]
Display of the reactive component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to Inom.
Note: This display is only active if the steady-state power evaluation mode of
the ground fault direction determination function is enabled.
[spacer] GF_DA: GF durat. cur r.meas. 009 026
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state current evaluation feature of the ground fault
direction determination function.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the residual current component having the set filter frequency for the
most recent ground fault (referred to Inom).
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the admittance evaluation mode of the ground fault direction
determination function.
[spacer] GF_DA: Admitt ance Y (N) p.u. 009 065
[spacer]
Display of the admittance value referred to YN,nom.
Note:
If GFDS S: Evaluat ion VNG P Sx is set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
If GF DS S: Evaluati on VNG P Sx is set to Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the conductance value referred to YN,nom.
Note:
If GFDS S : Evaluation VNG P Sx is set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
If GFDSS : Evaluation VNG P Sx is set to Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the susceptance value referred to YN,nom.
Note:
If GFDS S: Evaluat ion VNG PS x is set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom
If GF DSS : Evaluation VNG PSx is set to Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
Parameter Address
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer] FT_DA: Running t ime 004 021
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault t ype 010 198
[spacer]
Display of the fault type. This value is determined from the starting signals of
the function group MAIN.
[spacer] FT_DA: Me as . loop s ele ct e d 004 079
[spacer]
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curre nt P prim 010 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curre nt P p.u. 004 025
[spacer]
Display of the fault current referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Flt.volt . PG/ P P p.u. 004 026
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer]
Display of the fault angle.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. 004 049
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault current as a primary quantity.
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Display of the ground fault angle.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault re act ., pr im. 004 029
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault re act ance, se c. 004 028
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault impe dance , s e c 004 023
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault locat. pe rce nt 004 027
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: Line reac tance P S x.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault location 004 022
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.
Parameter Address
synchronism check
Not measured 0.000 3.000 Vnom Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-291)
[spacer]
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop voltage
and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom. The display
only appears if ASC is operating.
[spacer] ASC: Angle dif fe rence 004 089
[spacer]
Display of the angle difference between measured voltage and reference
voltage at the time of the close request (in degrees).
This display only appears when the automatic synchronism check function is
active.
[spacer] ASC: Fre qu. dif fe re nce 004 090
[spacer]
Display of the frequency difference between measured voltage and reference
voltage at the time of the close request (in Hz). This display only appears when
the automatic synchronism check function is active.
Parameter Address
circuit) protection
Not measured 0 360 ° Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-310)
[spacer]
Angle between residual current and neutral-displacement voltage when triggers
IN> and VNG> are both operating.
This display only appears when the ground fault (short-circuit) protection
function is active.
Parameter Address
direction
determination
Not measured 0 360 °
[spacer]
Angle between the residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage.
Parameter Address
underfrequency pro‐
tection
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer] f<> : M in. frequ. for f< 005 001
[spacer]
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
Parameter Address
condition monitoring
Not measured 0 65000 A Fig. 3-380, (p. 3-448)
[spacer]
Ruptured currents and their squared values.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip A 009 071
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip **2 A 009 077
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
Parameter Address
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM: I *t A 009 061
[spacer]
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
[spacer] CBM: ΣI* t A 009 087
[spacer]
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
Parameter Address
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the overload log.
Parameter Address
recording
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the ground fault log.
Parameter Address
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the fault log.
Parameter
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item “Manage IED”).
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item “Manage IED”).
Parameter
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item “Manage IED”).
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item “Manage IED”).
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
Parameter Address
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column “Template Details” only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
9.3 Communications
The category “Communications” contains the general network-related settings.
Assigned IP address of the P433 for the server function in the system.
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Network hardware provided as fiber optics (“Fibre”) or twisted pair copper wires
(“Copper”).
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9.4 SNTP
The category “SNTP” contains the clock synchronization settings.
Parameter
Location
Contents
9.6.1 System/LLN0
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority 4
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment 900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Configuration Revision 1
Application ID (hex) 0
GOOSE Identifier
Dataset Reference
Configuration Revision 0
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
9.8.1 System/LLN0
Report type:
● Unbuffered (updating)
● Buffered (saving)
Report ID TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Configuration Revision 1
9.9 Controls
sboTimeout 120000
Application ID (hex) 0
GOOSE Identifier
Dataset Reference
Configuration Revision 0
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
9.10 Measurements
Parameter
Parameter
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
9.11.1 System/LLN0
Mod.measCyc Value 5
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
10 Commissioning
DANGER
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the “Warning” page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
DANGER
When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter “Installation and Connection” (Chapter 5, (p. 5-1)) must
be observed.
DANGER
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut, appropriately
marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The
cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national
standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (US: AWG12 or thicker) is
required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device. The
cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
DANGER
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is
connected, always disconnect the device from the supply.
DANGER
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be
opened! If the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger
that the resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the
insulation.
For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for connection to the
current transformers is not a shorting block. Therefore always short-circuit
current transformers before loosening the threaded terminals.
DANGER
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
DANGER
When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the P433
must always be installed outside of this hazardous area.
WARNING
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the
supply voltage for the device is shut off.
WARNING
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently,
the female connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits
connected to the system that is required per VDE 0106 Part 101. Therefore,
when connecting the prescribed connecting cable be careful not to touch the
socket contacts.
WARNING
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance
with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see “Technical
Data”, Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)).
WARNING
When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify
that the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during device startup, during operation and
when there is a fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
10.2.1 Preparation
After the P433 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 5-
1), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
● Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
● Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
● Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.14, (p. 3-123)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P433 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type “P433” and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up. If a bay type has already been selected this bay
will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.12.3, (p. 6-
23)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.12.4, (p. 6-26).
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P433 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter “Settings” for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
10.2.2 Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P433, it is possible to
determine whether the P433 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If circuit breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for
100 ms through MAI N: Man . tri p cm d. USER (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or
an appropriately configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command
from the integrated local control panel is password-protected (see
Section 6.12.8, (p. 6-34)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
WARNING
Application of analog test values to the measuring inputs must be in
compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs
(see Chapter “Technical Data”).
MAIN : Me as. direct i on P, Q). The load angles are independent from such post-
processing and indicate the actual phase angle between phase current (as
reference) and phase-ground voltage. They are displayed for phase currents
greater than 5% Inom.
For directional control it is sufficient to check the load angles at active power
flow (which is predominantly present in power systems). If active power flow
direction is correct, inherently also reactive power flow direction is correct, which
is advantageous because only relatively small reactive power flows are in
practice available. The expected load angles for active power flow usually is
around ±0° (typically −10° ... 0° and 0° ... +10°) or ±180° (typically −170° ...
−180° and +170° ... +180°). Even for balanced loads small differences between
the three load angles may be present (typ. ±2°). Root cause of bigger
differences of load angles should be clarified.
Bus Bus
1,3,5
2,4,6
Px3x Px3x
Direction check: with active power flow ±180° ±0° ±180° ±0°
from Feeder to Bus: Load angle phi¹) =
from Bus to Feeder: Load angle phi¹) = ±0° ±180° ±0° ±180°
Im
I Re
19Z8833A
Devices from the “Easergy MiCOM 30” family use the current phasor as reference
for angle measurement. With positive reactive power the load angle is positive,
too.
V/Vnom(/√3)
1.0
DIST:
V< PSx
[ * ]
0.5
DIST: DIST:
I> (Ibl) PSx I>> PSx I/Inom
1.0 [ * ] 2.0
[ * ]
The measured values should be selected in accordance with the selected operate
values such that only one starting measuring system operates. Operation of the
checked starting threshold is possible by checking the phase‑selective and
starting‑selective state signals.
X
DIST:
Xfw PSx
[ * ]
Z<(φZ)
φZ
70°
φL
R
DIST:
ß PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Rfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Zbw/Zfw PSx DIST:
Zfw,PG PSx
[ * ]
[ * ]
DIST:
Zfw,PP PSx
[ * ]
D5Z52DGA
j·φtest
| V̲test | · e j·φZ
= 2 · | Z< | · e
| I̲test | · e j·0°
φtest = φZ
where:
● Z̲< = Starting Impedance
● φZ = Impedance Angle
● V̲test = Test Voltage
● I̲test = Test Current
● φtest = Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In the range of the reactance limit, that is, for impedance angle φZ in the range
φL<φZ<110°, the starting impedance is calculated as follows:
X fw
| Z̲< | = sinφZ
Rfw
β ≤ φZ ≤ φG
| Z< | = cosφZ
Rfw Z bw
(180°+β) ≤ φZ ≤ (180°+φG)
| Z< | = cosφZ · Z fw
X fw Z bw
(180°+φG) < φZ ≤ 290°
| Z̲< | = sinφZ · Z fw
j·φtest
| V̲test | · e j·φG j·φZ
= (1 + | k̲G | · e ) · | Z̲< | · e
| I̲test | · e j·0°
| V̲test |
| I̲test | = 1 + | k̲G|2 + 2 · | k̲G | · cosφG · | Z̲< |
or
sinφtest + | k̲G | · sin(φtest - φG)
φZ = arctan cosφ
test + | k̲G | · cos(φtest - φG)
where:
● Z̲< = Starting Impedance
● φZ = Impedance Angle
● |k̲G| = DIST: A bs. val ue kG PSx setting
● φG = D I ST: Angl e kG P Sx setting
● V̲test = Test Voltage
● I̲test = Test Current
● φtest = Phase angle between test voltage and test current
From the input measured values, the P433 calculates the residual current I̲N and
the neutral-displacement voltage V̲NG, which are used for zero-sequence starting.
They are calculated according to the following equations:
|I̲N| = |I̲A + I̲B + I̲C|
|V̲NG| = ⅓·|V̲A–G + V̲B–G + V̲C–G|
For a single-phase test where |V̲B-G| = |V̲C-G| = 0, the result of the calculation
formula for V̲NG given above is that the DIST: V N G> PSx or D IST: VNG> >
PS x triggers operate if the test voltage exceeds the following value:
V nom
| V̲test | = 3 · V NG> · 3
j·φtest
| V̲test | · e j·φZ
= 2 · | Z< | · e
| I̲test | · e j·0°
φtest = φZ
where:
● Z̲<: Tripping Impedance
● φZ: Impedance Angle
● V̲test: Test Voltage
● I̲test: Test Current
● φtest: Phase angle between test voltage and test current
10.2.7.1.3 Characteristics
With the P433, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern
calculation of the tripping impedances.
+135°
Forward direction X
αn Zn
δ
φZ
Backward direction
−45° ≘ 315°
D5Z5025A
Fig. 10-3: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the “Circle” setting.
The actual tripping impedance in the ranges −45° < φZ < α and 135° < φZ < (α
+180°) is then calculated as follows:
|Z̲trip| = |Z̲|·(1+sin ẟ)
In the range −45° < φZ < α, the following relation applies: ẟ = α−φZ
In the range 135° < φZ < (α+180°), the following relation applies: ẟ = α−φZ
+180°
where:
Z̲trip: Actual tripping impedance
Z̲: settings D IST: Z1 ( circl e) PSx to D IST: Z6 (circle ) PSx
φZ: Impedance Angle
α: settings DIS T: α 1 (ci rcle ) PSx to DIST: α6 ( circle) PSx
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor k̲G must
be taken into account if the setting for D IST: Abs . value kG PSx is not equal
to one and/or the setting for DI ST: A ngl e kG PSx is not equal to 0°. When the
test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation for the
operate condition is obtained:
V̲test
I̲test = (1 + k̲G) · Z̲<
j·φtest
| V̲test | · e j·φG j·φZ
= (1 + | k̲G | · e ) · | Z̲< | · e
| I̲test | · e j·0°
or
sinφtest + | k̲G | · sin(φtest - φG)
φZ = arctan cosφ
test + | k̲G | · cos(φtest - φG)
where:
● Z̲<: Tripping Impedance
● φZ: Impedance Angle
● |k̲G|: D IST: Abs. valu e kG P Sx setting
● φG:DI ST: Angle kG PSx setting
● V̲test: Test Voltage
● I̲test: Test Current
● φtest: Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Ztrip = kze Z1
where:
Ztrip: Actual tripping impedance
kze:
● D IS T: k ze,P G HSR P Sx or
● DI ST: kze,PP HSR PSx or
● D IST : kze,PG TDR PSx or
● DI ST: kze,PP TDR P Sx setting
Z1: DIS T: Z 1 ( circl e) PSx setting
Whether the zone extension factors kze HSR are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
● Switch on to fault protection
● An appropriately configured signal input.
● Protective signaling.
If protective signaling is not ready, then control and switching to the zone
extension factor kzeTDR, if applicable, is handled by the internal auto-reclosing
function. Regardless of the readiness of protective signaling, the zone extension
factor kzeHSR may be activated during the reclose command – if set accordingly.
R:
● Settings DIS T: R1, PG ( pol ygon) P Sx
● to D IST: R6,PG ( pol ygon) PSx
● or DIST: R 1,PP (polygon ) P Sx
● to DIST: R 6,PP ( polygon) PSx
α: DI ST: α 1 (poly gon) P Sx to DI ST: α6 (ci rcl e) PSx
+135° DIST:
Xn
Z<
φZ DIST:
αn
φL
R
DIST:
Rn,PG
DIST:
Rn,PP
−45°
D5Z50DJA
Fig. 10-4: Impedance characteristic for distance and directional determination for the “Polygon” setting.
In the range of the resistance limits (for impedance angles this means in the
range of 0° < φZ ≤ φL), the tripping impedance is calculated according to the
following equation:
R
| Z̲< | = sinφZ
cosφZ - tanα
When phase-to-ground loops are checked, the set complex ground factor kG
must be taken into account if the setting for D IST: Abs. value kG PSx is not
equal to one and/or the setting for DI ST: A ngl e kG PSx is not equal to 0°.
When the test is carried out using single-phase test current, the following relation
for the operate condition is obtained:
V̲test
I̲test = (1 + k̲G) · Z̲<
j·φtest
| V̲test | · e j·φG j·φZ
= (1 + | k̲G | · e ) · | Z̲< | · e
| I̲test | · e j·0°
or
sinφtest + | k̲G | · sin(φtest - φG)
φZ = arctan cosφ
test + | k̲G | · cos(φtest - φG)
where:
● Z̲<: Tripping Impedance
● φZ: Impedance Angle
● |k̲G|: D IST: Abs. valu e kG P Sx setting
● φG:DI ST: Angle kG PSx setting
● V̲test: Test Voltage
● I̲test: Test Current
● φtest: Phase angle between test voltage and test current
In impedance zone 1, the set zone extension factors kze enter into the tripping
impedance in all fault cases.
Rtrip = kze R1
Xtrip = kze X1
where:
Rtrip: Actual tripping resistance
Xtrip: Actual tripping reactance
kze:
● setting D IST: k ze ,P G HSR PSx
● or D IST: kze ,PP H SR P Sx
● or DIST: kze,PG TDR P Sx
● or DI ST: kze,PP TDR PSx
R1: DIS T: R 1,P G (p olygon ) PSx or DIST: R1 ,PP (polygon) PSx setting
X1: D IST: X1,PG (polygon) P Sx setting
Whether the kze HSR zone extension factors are active or not is controlled by the
following protective functions:
Enabled φX φX
Not enabled φF α
IP,max = Itest
For the operate condition that means:
1
3
· | I̲test | ≥ (I neg>) · | I̲test |
0.577 ≥ (Ineg>)
Therefore operation of the monitoring function for current-measuring circuits
with a two-phase test current in phase opposition is only possible if the threshold
operate value is set at less than 0.577.
If the threshold operate value satisfies the respective condition, then the
monitoring function for current-measuring circuits operates with a test current
greater than the setting MCMON: I min cu rr. monitor., after the set operate
delay of +300 ms has elapsed.
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
When the inrush stabilization function is triggered, the BUOC function is blocked.
If the BUOC is set to activate the ARC, then timer stages BUOC: tI> PSx
BUOC: t IN > PSx are blocked when the ARC is ready. The trip signal is then
issued instantaneously for phase starting or with an 80 ms delay for zero-
sequence starting. Timer stage tIN> is also blocked by phase starting or while the
ARC hold time is elapsing.
The P433 calculates the resultant current I̲N according to the following equation:
| I̲N| = | I̲A+ I̲B+ I̲C|
In the case of a single-phase test (for example, IB = IC = 0), the following test
current is obtained:
| I̲test| = IN>·Inom
At this test current the operate value (BU OC : IN> PSx) is reached.
current values only can be measured the P433 will decide on “ground fault”
(Steady-state current evaluation) because of the residual current value level.
Switching to Steady-state current evaluation is made via the integrated local
control panel or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Should the system permit such operation a ground fault on the busbar side (BS)
or on the line side (LS) may be simulated by wiring a short circuit. Then the P433
must issue the respective signal. With the operating mode for ground faults set
to Steady-state power it is assumed that threshold values for residual current
(set at GFDSS : IN,act> /reac> BS PSx and GFDSS: IN, act>/reac> L S
PS x) and the neutral-point displacement voltage with Steady-state current
evaluation (set at G FDSS: VNG> P Sx) or GFDSS: IN> PSx are exceeded.
With the operating mode set to Steady-state current the set threshold values for
conductance / susceptance (set at GFD SS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS PSx and
GFDSS : G(N )> / B(N) > BS P Sx) and the neutral-point displacement voltage
(GFDSS : VN G> PSx) or the admittance (GFD SS: Y(N )> PSx must be
exceeded.
A ground fault functional test by wiring a short circuit is, in most cases, not
possible as there is the danger of a double ground fault occurring. As an
alternative it is possible to wire the system’s CTs and VTs such that a functional
test is possible without causing a ground fault.
The residual current and the neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the
P433 are displayed as measured operating values in primary quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the Protection & Control device (see “Measured
Operating Data” in Section 3.12, (p. 3-76)).
A
B BS
C
IN
k IN
A
T4
l
e N(e)
E(n) T90
V VNG
n
P433
U V W N
LS
V̲A-G
I̲B
I̲N
V̲C-G
I̲C V̲B-G
V̲N-G
V̲B-G
45Z5063B
Fig. 10-5: Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and Holmgreen group, ground fault
towards BS.
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer is removed and the
associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see Fig. 10-5, (p. 10-24) and
Fig. 10-6, (p. 10-25)). This will produce a neutral-point displacement voltage
V̲N‑G with an amplitude which is smaller by the factor 3 than with a saturated
ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A
line current transformer must be disconnected and shorted (see Fig. 10-5, (p. 10-
24)).
A test-wire is inserted through the core balance current transformer to obtain a
current flow from the phase B line (see Fig. 10-6, (p. 10-25)). The ancillary
circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current and
voltage vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the busbar is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault
on the line side.
A
B BS
C
K k I̲N
T4
L l
e N(e)
E(n) T90
V VNG
n
U V W N
V̲A-G
LS
I̲N
V̲C-G V̲B-G
V̲N-G
V̲B-G 19Z5291C
Fig. 10-6: Ancillary circuit for systems with ground fault compensation and core balance current transformer,
ground fault towards BS.
A
B BS
C
IN
k IN
A
T4
l
e N(e)
E(n) T90
V VNG
n
P433
U V W N
LS
V̲A-G
I̲N
V̲C-G
V̲B-G
V̲B-G 45Z5065B
Fig. 10-7: Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and Holmgreen group, ground fault towards LS.
First the fuse in the phase A line to the voltage transformer’s primary side is
removed and the associated secondary VT line is short circuited (see Fig. 10-7,
(p. 10-26) and Fig. 10-8, (p. 10-27)). This will produce a neutral-point
displacement voltage V̲N‑G with an amplitude which is smaller by the factor 3
than with a saturated ground fault.
If current is measured at a Holmgreen group the secondary side of the phase A
and B line current transformers must be disconnected and shorted (see Fig. 10-7,
(p. 10-26)).
A test-wire is inserted through the core balance current transformer to obtain
current flow from the phase B and C lines (see Fig. 10-8, (p. 10-27)). The
ancillary circuit figures include vector diagrams displaying the position of current
and voltage vectors.
A simulated ground fault on the line side is displayed in the example. The current
connections or the voltage connections must be exchanged to test a ground fault
on the busbar side.
A
B BS
C
K k I̲N
T4
L l
e N(e)
E(n) T90
V VNG
n
P433
A
U V W N
V̲A-G
LS
I̲B-C ≙ I̲N
V̲C-G V̲B-G
V̲N-G
V̲B-G
19Z5292C
Fig. 10-8: Ancillary circuit for isolated neutral-point systems and core balance current transformers, ground fault
towards LS.
A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists from the
communication interface to the substation control level. If the communication link
is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay interlock (BI) without
substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a communication error is present can be
checked at M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any switchgear unit
and in any control direction – “Open” or “Close”. (Check – e.g. for DEV01 – at
D E V 0 1 : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or D E V 0 1 : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t . (Par/Func/
Cont menu branch).
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P433 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-3) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the “Warning” page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
WARNING
Before checking further, disconnect the P433 from the power supply.
WARNING
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
Problem
● Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
o Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection
points.
o Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P433 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
● The P433 issues an “Alarm” signal on LED H 3.
o Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal
memory (see Section 6.12.6.2, (p. 6-31)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. ass ign. warning), the faulty area,
the P433's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
“Warning” and “Blocked/faulty”.
Key
● –: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
● Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
● Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The external input CBF : CB fault y EX T has become active.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm re start e x ec. 041 202
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st. che ck sum 093 024
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st. SW updat e 093 025
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: B lockin g HW failur e 090 019
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
Device reaction: –
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM 093 026
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: +15V s upply faulty 093 081
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: +24V s upply faulty 093 082
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
[spacer]
The −15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule s lot 1 096 100
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot 1 097 000
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule N +15V fault y 093 096
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule N - 15V fault y 093 097
[spacer]
The −15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule N DAC faul ty 093 095
[spacer]
The digital-to-analog converter of the transient ground fault evaluation module
is defective.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule N DP R fault y 093 090
[spacer]
The checksum feature of the transient ground fault evaluation module has
detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule N RAM faulty 093 091
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the transient ground fault evaluation
module.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: E rror K 3 01 097 021
Parameter Address
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Output relay K xxx defective.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion 093 030
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a
(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this
error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected
an error.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the
time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module N 093 092
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the transient ground fault
evaluation module. It has detected an error.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ty pe of bay 096 122
[spacer]
If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P433 hardware configuration
that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display
(DHMI).
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. N 093 093
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for transient ground fault evaluation module has
been downloaded.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nom not adjust able 093 118
[spacer]
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: F ct s .not pe rm.f.60 Hz 093 098
[spacer]
A protective function has been activated that is not permitted for operation at a
system frequency of 60 Hz.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng A-1 093 114
Parameter Address
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM 098 035
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
Device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload protection.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for “overfrequency”
monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M 098 020
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: Pe riphe ral fault 098 018
[spacer]
Multiple signal.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The m.c.b. monitoring the neutral-displacement voltage has tripped.
The Ground fault protection (GFSC and GSCSG) is blocked (if these function
groups are operated with measured neutral-displacement voltage)
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip Vref 098 011
[spacer]
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of automatic synchronism check (ASC).
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I ns ul. Alarm 1 098 091
[spacer]
The transformer monitoring has received/detected a Buchholz/insulation fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: Phas e s equ. V faulty 098 001
[spacer]
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of the
phase-to-ground voltages.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: Vne g> tr igger e d 098 014
[spacer]
The negative-sequence monitoring function of measuring-circuit monitoring has
been triggered.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd er volt age 098 009
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed 098 021
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the reference
voltage-measuring circuit.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. V,Vref fl ty. 098 023
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or the
reference voltage faulty.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. V f aul ty 098 017
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas .circ .VNG faulty 098 254
[spacer]
The voltage-measuring circuits for the neutral-point displacement voltage are
faulty.
Device reaction: Selective blocking of the neutral-point displacement voltage
monitor (in function group V<>) if it were set so that it would evaluate the
measured value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. Vre f fault y 098 255
[spacer]
The voltage-measuring circuits for the reference voltage are faulty.
Device reaction: Selective blocking of the neutral-point displacement voltage
monitor in function groups V<> and LIMIT as well as blocking of ASC.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: B UOC n ot act iv e 098 002
[spacer]
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, but the unit has not switched to backup overcurrent-time protection.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: B UOC act ive w/ o ARC 098 003
[spacer]
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC
is not activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Due to a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection has been
blocked, and the unit has switched to backup overcurrent-time protection. ARC
is activated by the backup overcurrent-time protection function.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y 098 005
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-
measuring circuits.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas .circ .V,I fault y 098 016
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: Z ero-se qu. s tart ing 098 015
[spacer]
The zero-sequence starting of distance protection has been triggered without
phase starting.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir cuits GF S C 098 013
[spacer]
Ground fault (short-circuit) protection monitoring has been triggered.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C ommunic.fault C OMM 3 093 140
[spacer]
The set time C OMM3: T ime -out comm.faul t has elapsed since the most
recent 100% valid telegram was received. The receive signals are set to their
user-defined default values.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware e r ror COM M3 093 143
[spacer]
The device has detected a hardware error in the effective connection
InterMiCOM (communication interface 3).
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Timer stage COM M3: T ime -out link fail . has elapsed indicating a
persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: L im .e x c.te l.e r .COM M3 093 141
[spacer]
The threshold set for timer stage COMM3: Limit telegr. e rrors was
exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: T elecom. faulty / PSI G 098 006
[spacer]
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
Device reaction: Blocking of protective signaling.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: O p.mode PS IG inv al. 098 019
[spacer]
The operating mode settings for protective signaling and ground fault (short-
circuit) protection signaling are not identical.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: T elecom.faulty / GFS IG 098 012
[spacer]
The transmission channel for ground fault protective signaling is faulty.
Device reaction: Blocking of ground fault protection signaling.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C B pos .s ig. implaus. 098 124
[spacer]
The plausibility logic was triggered during the acquisition of the circuit breaker's
(CB) status signals.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: T GF D mon. tr igge re d 093 094
[spacer]
The monitoring function for transient ground fault direction determination has
operated.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C B rem . No. C B op. < 098 067
[spacer]
The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has fallen
below the threshold.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip > 098 068
[spacer]
The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
[spacer]
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power has
been exceeded.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> A 098 070
[spacer]
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The underfrequency load shedding protection function Pf< has been set for
“overfrequency” monitoring (based on Pf< underfrequency threshold settings
and nominal frequency).
If fnom = 50 Hz and any Pf< threshold setting is greater or equal to 50 Hz, the
alarm is raised and the Pf< function is blocked. Ditto fnom = 60 Hz and any Pf<
threshold setting is equal to 60 Hz.
Whether the threshold with false setting is activated or not does not matter.
Device reaction: Blocking of the underfrequency load shedding protection
function Pf<
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 098 053
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
[spacer]
The P433 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer “PT100” to the analog I/O module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
Parameter Address
[spacer]
The P433 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error 098 034
[spacer]
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
12 Maintenance
WARNING
Only qualified personnel, familiar with the “Warning” page at the beginning of
this manual, may work on or operate this device.
The P433 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
DANGER
Always turn off the power supply voltage before removing a hardware
module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed.
Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
WARNING
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in
connecting cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the
connecting cable.
NOTICE
The replaced power supply module must be disposed of in compliance with
applicable national regulations.
In general, the electronic components used for the device family Easergy MiCOM
30 are designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend
preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P433 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
WARNING
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
13 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled “Technical Data”). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P433 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges rapidly. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
84 TE frame 88512-4-9650723-301
15 Order Information
Basic Configuration Variants
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 -417
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 -419
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -418
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Further Options
Communication Options
Key
● 2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
● 3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM interface (‑95x) is
ordered.
● 4) Second included language in brackets.
● 7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special West
European characters.
● 8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not
explicitly required by the application.
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension
number (‑805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option
supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference
menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western
European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported.
Consequently, selecting the “Russian / English” ordering option means that it will
not be possible to download Western European data models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in
most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also “Technical Data”,
Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)) are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P433/EN M/R-63-A Volume 1 06/2016